Entries |
Document | Title | Date |
20080205262 | NODE CONTROLLER AND NODE SYSTEM - A communication network including non-GMPLS nodes is treated as a virtual single GMPLS node by a GMPLS integrated controller, in which, when fault recovery is possible within the communication network including the non-GMPLS nodes, the fault recovery is autonomously performed. When fault recovery is unlikely to be achieved within the communication network including the non-GMPLS nodes, GMPLS-based fault recovery process is activated to effectively recover from the fault. | 08-28-2008 |
20080225695 | FAILURE PROTECTION IN A PROVIDER BACKBONE BRIDGE NETWORK USING FORCED MAC FLUSHING - A technique for operating a network involves controlling the black-holing of traffic by forcing customer source MAC address (CMAC)-to-backbone source MAC address (BMAC) associations at provider backbone bridge (PBB) provider edge (PE) devices to be flushed from their corresponding forwarding information bases (FIBs) in response to a service failure so that new CMAC-to-BMAC associations, which are reflective of a secondary traffic path, are learned faster than they would otherwise be learned if the network had relied on native functionality to learn new CMAC-to-BMAC associations that are reflective of the secondary traffic path. | 09-18-2008 |
20080225696 | VIRTUAL PATH RESTORATION SCHEME USING FAST DYNAMIC MESH RESTORATION IN AN OPTICAL NETWORK - A method for restoring a virtual path, provisioned between a source and a target node, in a mesh zoned optical network is described. The method, in one embodiment, broadcasts or floods restore path requests in the network to expedite the identification of an alternate route and minimize the service disruption for failed virtual path. The flooding of requests is controlled to ensure efficient performance of the network yet guaranteeing minimum restoration time to allow critical telecommunication related traffic to flow through the network with virtually no interruption. The constant update of nodal topology by each node allows a fast identification of alternate physical path for failed virtual path. | 09-18-2008 |
20080232242 | Evaluating the Position of a Disturbance - The present invention relates to a method of and apparatus for evaluating the position of a disturbance on an optical link, in particular where the disturbance is a time-varying disturbance. An optical time domain reflectometry technique in which a series of low coherence test pulses is launched into an the optical link, and the backscattered return signal is monitored. The test pulses pass through an unbalanced Mach Zhender interferometer with the result that for each test pulse, a pair of time-displaced pulse copies is launched onto the link. The backscattered return signal is passed through the same interferometer, which causes the pulse copies of each pair to become realigned and to interfere with one another. A time-varying disturbance is likely to affect each pulse copy of a pair differently. As a result, an abnormality such as a step is likely occur in the backscattered signal. From the time position of an abnormality, the distance of the disturbance responsible is evaluated. | 09-25-2008 |
20080232243 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING REDUNDANCY FOR STREAMING DATA IN AUDIO VIDEO BRIDGING NETWORKS - Aspects of a method and system for implementing redundancy for streaming data in audio video bridging networks are provided. Network resources may be reserved over a plurality of network paths. Reserved resources may be utilized for the transmission and/or reception of a corresponding plurality of data streams, wherein one or more of the streams may comprise redundant data. A plurality of data streams may be transmitted and/or received by a plurality of network interface hardware devices. Similarly, a plurality of data streams may be transmitted and/or received by a plurality of ports integrated into a single network interface hardware device. Each of the plurality of data streams may be assigned a unique identifier and the identifier of a first data stream may differ by one bit from an identifier of a data stream comprising data redundant to the first data stream. | 09-25-2008 |
20080239942 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR VERIFYING RECOVERY FROM AN INTERMITTENT HARDWARE FAULT - Systems and methods for verifying recovery from intermittent hardware faults. Exemplary embodiments include a method for verifying recovery from intermittent hardware faults, the method including generating an error in a computer interface by forcing a hardware fault after setting an error injection enable control bit in a register coupled to the computer interface, detecting an error in a hardware checker coupled to the computer interface which asserts an error interrupt signal resetting the error injection enable control bit when the error interrupt signal and a hardware reset control bit coupled to the computer interface are both active, disabling error forcing when the error injection enable control bit is reset, and executing an error recovery and logging procedure in the computer interface. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239943 | Traffic protection in a communication network - A loop protection mechanism including dynamically determining a link connecting two adjacent nodes of a loop in a communication network in accordance with a predefined criterion, and reconfiguring the loop so that the loop is broken at the determined link which is an optimal link in terms of the predefined criterion. The breaking of the loop enables for example to utilize loop-free technologies (e.g. Ethernet) in a physical loop architecture. | 10-02-2008 |
20080239944 | Classification of signaling protocol errors to trigger network connectivity troubleshooting - In an embodiment, a system and method which monitors a signaling plane for error events among one or more network nodes in a converged network. The system and method classifies and calculates, based on user defined parameters, a threshold value or percentage of error events which occur within a desired amount of time and automatically triggers an alert in the network that a potential network connectivity problem exists in the transport plane. In an embodiment, the trigger automatically initiates troubleshooting procedures to solve the network connectivity problem. | 10-02-2008 |
20080253280 | Redundant Wireless Base Station - In a redundant wireless network, a first baseband processing unit is defined as an active baseband processing unit and a second baseband processing unit as a standby baseband processing unit. An active address is associated with the first baseband processing unit and a standby address is associated with the second baseband processing unit. Subscriber traffic is routed to the first baseband processing unit via the active address. If the second baseband processing unit becomes an active baseband processing unit and the first baseband processing unit becomes a standby baseband processing unit, he active address is associated with the second baseband processing unit, and the standby address is associated with the first baseband processing unit. Subscriber traffic is routed to the second baseband processing unit via the active address. | 10-16-2008 |
20080259784 | Failure notification in a network having serially connected nodes - Multicast capabilities of a link state protocol controlled network are used to accelerate the flooding advertisement of topology change notifications within portions of the network. This flooding mechanism may be particularly efficient in a network with a large number of two-connected nodes such as a ring network architecture. A control plane specific multicast group address is used when flooding topology change notifications, and a process such as reverse path forwarding check is used as an additional control on forwarding of the notification to prevent looping of control plane packets. Two-connected nodes insert a forwarding entry into their FIB to enable frames containing the control message to be forwarded via the data plane on to the downstream node so that propagation of the control message along a chain of two-connected nodes may occur at data plane speeds. | 10-23-2008 |
20080267060 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROVIDING HIGH SPEED FAULT TRACING WITHIN A BLADE CENTER SYSTEM - Providing high speed fault tracing within a blade center system by using a high speed transmitter port of a switch to implement a first snoop port and using a high speed receiver port of the switch to implement a second snoop port, thus permitting snooping of the blade center system from a single blade slot. | 10-30-2008 |
20080267061 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING CELL RESELECTIONS AND TRANSITIONS TO AND FROM AN ENHANCED CELL_FACH STATE - A method and apparatus for handling cell reselections and transitions includes executing a cell reselection. A medium access control (MAC)-ehs reset is performed. | 10-30-2008 |
20080273454 | Harq Failure Indication Over Iub-Interface - The specification and drawings present a new method, system, apparatus and software product for improving the performance of an uplink communication utilizing a hybrid automatic repeat protocol (HARQ) by an HARQ failure indication over Iub-interface (e.g., from a node B to a radio network controller, RNC) in mobile communication networks including a number of HARQ retransmissions before said failure occurred. | 11-06-2008 |
20080279092 | Channel control based on error correction values - A computing device configured for wireless communication may effectively control adaptation to channel conditions. The device may be configured to identify and classify conditions impacting performance of a channel so that appropriate adaptations may be made. Interference may be detected by correlating received signal strength and packet errors. High received signal strength correlated to a high packet error rate may signify presence of a source of interference. Once a source of interference is detected, other criteria may be used to determine the nature of the interference so that an adaptation that is minimally disruptive of applications can be selected. Additionally, channel degradation may be predicted by monitoring trends in error rates, including Forward Error Correction rates, and adaptation may be used before packet error rates exceed an unacceptable level. | 11-13-2008 |
20080279093 | Interference detection - A computing device configured for wireless communication may effectively control adaptation to channel conditions. The device may be configured to identify and classify conditions impacting performance of a channel so that appropriate adaptations may be made. Interference may be detected by correlating received signal strength and packet errors. High received signal strength correlated to a high packet error rate may signify presence of a source of interference. Once a source of interference is detected, other criteria may be used to determine the nature of the interference so that an adaptation that is minimally disruptive of applications can be selected. Additionally, channel degradation may be predicted by monitoring trends in error rates, including Forward Error Correction rates, and adaptation may be used before packet error rates exceed an unacceptable level. | 11-13-2008 |
20080291822 | Method and Arrangement for Failure Handling in a Network - The invention relates to failure handling in a tree sructure network (NW | 11-27-2008 |
20080291823 | DATA DRIVEN CONNECTION FAULT MANAGEMENT (DDCFM) IN CFM MAINTENANCE POINTS - A Connection Fault Management (CFM) maintenance point and method for providing Data Driven Connection Fault Management (DDCFM) in CFM maintenance points in a communication network. A Reflection Responder, an RFM Receiver, and a Decapsulator Responder are implemented in existing CFM maintenance points. The Reflection Responder selects frames to be reflected, mirrors the selected frames if a Continuation option is set, and encapsulates the selected frames with Return Frame Message (RFM) OpCode. The RFM Receiver sends received RFM frames to an analyzer if addressed to the maintenance point and otherwise to a passive multiplexer. The Decapsulator Responder decapsulates Send Frame Message (SFM) frames and sends decapsulated frames toward the destination specified in each frame. | 11-27-2008 |
20080304406 | Method and apparatus for error messaging in a multimedia network - In certain home multimedia networks having a plurality of terminals, there are no provisions for sending error messages when a service cannot be delivered owing to conflicts with another service. The present invention proposes to let the media server of the tuner in such a network provide an image bearing the message and deliver this image to the terminal that otherwise would be left in the dark. | 12-11-2008 |
20080310297 | ERROR CONTROL APPARATUS - A plurality of system board modules are connected to a crossbar module. An error detection unit detects an error in a packet received from a corresponding system board module. When an error is detected by the error detection unit, a transmission control unit issues a completion data generation request. When receiving the completion data generation request, a packet completion unit generates completion data. When receiving an error packet, a selector circuit outputs a completion packet in which completion data is provided in place of a data unit involving error. | 12-18-2008 |
20080316914 | Method and System for Fault and Performance Recovery in Communication Networks, Related Network and Computer Program Product Therefor - A system for fault and performance recovery in a communication network includes a set of network apparatuses as well as a plurality of sites connected by means of connections having a given topology. The network also includes routers for implementing given routing policies and has associated therewith at least one database maintaining information regarding the network apparatuses. The system includes test modules for executing performance tests created automatically by exploiting the information available on the topology of the connections between the various sites and by accessing the database in question. The test modules are configured for analysing the results of the performance tests to detect possible fault and performance impairment conditions of the network. In the presence of a fault and performance impairment condition detected in the network, the routers modify the routing policy to compensate for the fault and performance impairment condition. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316915 | Method & apparatus for identifying the cause of communication session faults - A communication network includes a wireless LAN and associated wireless communication devices and a computational device either located remotely from the wireless LAN or located in the wireless LAN. The wireless communication devices operate to conduct communication sessions with other communication devices associated with the communication network and they operate to log communication session event activity. In the event that a communication session being run by a wireless communication device unexpectedly ends due to a fault event, the wireless communications device is capable of sending the entire contents of the logged communication session to the computational device for analysis to determine the cause of the fault event. The computational device operates to run a virtual communication session under the control of a debug module such that the session can be stopped at any time to examine the contents of the virtual communication session. | 12-25-2008 |
20080316916 | Method for Transmission of Information Between Nodes of a Network and Network Using Said Method - The invention describes a method for communication between nodes (UR | 12-25-2008 |
20090003192 | Protection Mechanisms for a Communications Network - A method of path protection for a connection-oriented packet switched communications network is described using a protection hub in communication with a worker hub via a core protection path. Both the worker hub and the protection hub communicate with at least one provider edge device via a respective worker and protection paths. The method detects a failure in the communications network, indicates the failure to the at least one of the provider edge device, the worker hub, and the protection hub. The method then employs the core protection path if a failure occurs along a worker path is detected, or a worker path and a protection path in parallel if a failure occurs along the core protection path. | 01-01-2009 |
20090003193 | Network Architecture for Data Communication - This invention relates to a network architecture for data communication between data sources and data destinations via network nodes and at least one data concentrator. According to the invention the nodes ( | 01-01-2009 |
20090010151 | Method for providing dumps in a distributed environment of a telecommunication network - The invention proposes a method for providing dumps. The method is performed in a first functional entity of a distributed environment of a telecommunication network. The first functional entity may communicate with a second functional entity. During a call set-up procedure typically a unique identification is exchanged between the first and the second functional entity. When an error is detected, information related to the call is dumped and the unique identifier is associated thereto. Furthermore, a message is generated which comprises a signal descriptor indicating that the message is generated in response to a detected error. Subsequently, the generated message is send to the second functional entity to provoke a dump of information related to the call and associating the unique identification. Furthermore, alternative embodiments and devices adapted for the methods are disclosed. | 01-08-2009 |
20090010152 | Interface system and methodology having scheduled connection responsive to common time reference - An input interface system for mapping data packets, each comprising a header portion and a payload portion, from at least one source to at least one destination. An interface method and system between asynchronous data packet flows and synchronized switching systems, which utilize a global common time reference. The synchronized switching systems utilize a time frame switching method based on predefined switching schedules that are responsive to a global common time reference, where the global common time reference is divided into a plurality of contiguous periodic time frames. The asynchronous data packet flows are routed according to information contained in the packets' header. The interface method and system maps the header information of the asynchronous data packet flows to respective time frames that match the predefined switching schedule over the synchronized switching system. The interface system can aggregate multiple asynchronous data packet flows into a single pre-defined switching schedule over the synchronized switching system. | 01-08-2009 |
20090022051 | ADJUSTING THE DEGREE OF FILLING OF A JITTER BUFFER - A method and arrangement for adjusting the degree of filling of a jitter buffer in a network element receiving digital data. To the jitter buffer, there is connected a read-out unit for reading digital data from the jitter buffer. In the method, there is composed a time reserve indicator for the received protocol unit, the time reserve indicator being essentially the difference of an order indicator connected to the protocol unit and an order indicator connected to the operational cycle of the read-out unit. The time reserve indicator of the protocol unit indicates whether the protocol unit was received in good time, in order to ensure that the digital data is in the jitter buffer when the digital data is in turn to be read out. The degree of filling of a jitter buffer is adjusted on the basis of time reserve indicators composed for the received protocol units. | 01-22-2009 |
20090040920 | Byzantine-Fault Tolerant Self-Stabilizing Protocol for Distributed Clock Synchronization Systems - A rapid Byzantine self-stabilizing clock synchronization protocol that self-stabilizes from any state, tolerates bursts of transient failures, and deterministically converges within a linear convergence time with respect to the self-stabilization period. Upon self-stabilization, all good clocks proceed synchronously. The Byzantine self-stabilizing clock synchronization protocol does not rely on any assumptions about the initial state of the clocks. Furthermore, there is neither a central clock nor an externally generated pulse system. The protocol converges deterministically, is scalable, and self-stabilizes in a short amount of time. The convergence time is linear with respect to the self-stabilization period. | 02-12-2009 |
20090046572 | Shared protection method and apparatus for reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexer (roadm) based mesh networks - Example embodiments of a method and corresponding apparatus for sharing protection resources in a reconfigurable optical add-drop multiplexer (ROADM) based mesh network are presented. The use of dedicated 1+1 methodologies for protection in a mesh network is reliable, but requires a large amount of equipment redundancy, as well as a large associated cost. According to the embodiments of the present method and apparatus, the total number of protection transponders needed to support single failures in a mesh network is reduced by implementing a preconfigured protection cycle (p-cycle) in the mesh network and configuring nodes along the p-cycle to share protection transponders. Accordingly, the embodiments of the present method and apparatus allow for reliable protection against single failures while lessening the amount of equipment redundancy and reducing the associated cost. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046573 | FORWARD HANDOVER UNDER RADIO LINK FAILURE - System(s) and method(s) are provided for forward handover under radio link failure. A configurable criterion for radio link failure (RLF) is established through a reference threshold for a channel quality metric; the threshold (CQI | 02-19-2009 |
20090046574 | Virtual Circuit Connectivity Verification Insertion for Packet Loss Control in Pseudowire - A method includes inserting a virtual circuit connectivity verification packet into aggregated traffic of m packets transmitted over multiple pseudowires in a network path, replying to the transmitted m packets with a virtual circuit connectivity verification packet with a packet loss indication when at least one packet loss is detected in an m packet group, and adjusting a rate of transmitting the aggregated m packets responsive to the packet loss indication. In the preferred embodiment the multiple pseudowires are one of constant bit rate and variable bit rate and the adjusting of the rate includes rate adjustment of variable bit rate pseudowires. | 02-19-2009 |
20090046575 | FAILURE HANDLING SYSTEM - A failure handling system capable of performing failure notification and shutoff control, thereby improving network operability. When failure is detected, an outgoing frame shutoff controller performs shutoff control on the local device such that the local device stops outputting communication frames to a receiving client device. A failure notifier notifies a network manager that the failure has been detected. On receiving a shutoff command, an incoming frame shutoff controller performs shutoff control on an originating client device such that the originating client device stops outputting the communication frames. A communication route manager manages communication routes through which the client devices communicate with each other across the network. On receiving a failure notification from a first transmission device, a shutoff information sender looks up the communication routes to identify a second transmission device connected with the originating client device, and sends a shutoff command to the second transmission device. | 02-19-2009 |
20090067320 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ASSIGNING A PLURALITY OF MACS TO A PLURALITY OF PROCESSORS - A bank of processing units is connected to a number of LANs via a bank of MAC controllers. An interconnect switch allows any of the processing units to access any of the MAC controllers. A housekeeping processor periodically detects faults in the connectivity of the processing units to the LANs. When a fault is detected, a redundant processing unit is assigned to be connected to the LAN. If a fault still exists, then a redundant MAC controller is assigned to the redundant processing unit. The MAC address of the previous MAC controller is reassigned to the redundant MAC controller. | 03-12-2009 |
20090073870 | AUTOMATIC RE-CONNECTION OF A PREVIOUSLY LOST CONNECTION IN A FREQUENCY HOPPING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - This disclosure relates to frequency hopping (FH) communication systems, such as Bluetooth. In particular, it relates to a substantially automatic recovery procedure for re-establishing a previously lost link or connection between a master unit and a slave unit in a frequency hopping communications system. Some embodiments of the disclosed invention relates to methods for recovery of a previously lost link or connection between two Bluetooth units in a Bluetooth Sniff mode. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073871 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND NETWORK SEARCH METHOD THEREOF - A network search method for a communication apparatus connected to a network is disclosed. The method comprises the following steps. The communication apparatus enters a sleep mode when the communication apparatus loses signals from the network. Then, power status of the communication apparatus is detected. A trigger signal is automatically sent when a change in power status of the communication apparatus is found. Next, a radio frequency module is enabled to search for the signals from the network according to the trigger signal so as to re-connect to the network. | 03-19-2009 |
20090073872 | METHOD OF OPERATING A MOBILE RADIO NETWORK - A method of operating a mobile radio network for adjusting the counter states of the packet data units to be transmitted in the convergence protocol layer protocol units of network entities of the mobile radio network. User data is transmitted from a first network entity of the mobile radio network, in particular a mobile station, to a second network entity of the mobile radio network, in particular a higher-level network unit, the user data is combined prior to transmission into at least one packet data unit in a first convergence protocol layer protocol unit of the first network entity; and the at least one packet data unit is transmitted from a first radio link control layer protocol unit of the first network entity to a second radio link control layer protocol unit of the second network entity. If the transmission of the at least one packet data unit fails, the first radio link control layer protocol unit transmits an error message to the first convergence protocol layer protocol unit after receiving a confirmation message confirming the failure from the second radio link control layer protocol unit. | 03-19-2009 |
20090086620 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING NETWORK CONFLICT - A resiliency-link having a master node and slave nodes may be used to automatically avoid network conflicts due to failure of a node stack. Any stack stub formed as a result of the failure of a stack node or link may use the resiliency-link to determine whether the stack Master node is still online and providing service. If communication over the resiliency-link determines that the original Master node is offline, a new stack stub takes over and provides the desired service. If the original Master node is still online, then the new stack stub takes an appropriate alternative or fallback action. | 04-02-2009 |
20090092042 | NAVIGATION DEVICE AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM - The present invention provides a navigation device which performs communication with an information-providing server device. The navigation device ( | 04-09-2009 |
20090097397 | FAULT TOLERANCE FRAMEWORK FOR NETWORKS OF NODES - In some implementations, a first message handler may be configured to receive first network-related data associated with a first network of nodes, the first network of nodes using a first communications protocol. A second message handler may be configured to receive second network-related data associated with a second network of nodes, the second network of nodes using a second communications protocol. A message transport system may be configured to receive the first network-related data and the second network-related data and further configured to route the first network-related data and the second network-related data in a common protocol, and a fault manager may be configured to receive the network-related data in the common protocol and configured to determine a fault associated with an operation of one or more of the first network of nodes and the second network of nodes, based on the network-related data in the common protocol. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097398 | FAILURE RECOVERY IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORK - A method and apparatus for facilitating recovery from the failure of a Serving Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) within an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. A Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF) receives a SIP request sent by a User Equipment (UE) having an identity previously registered with the IMS network and for which a given S-CSCF was allocated. The P-CSCF determines whether the given S-CSCF has failed or is otherwise unreachable. If so, the P-CSCF sends a re-registration message to the UE. Receipt of the re-registration message at the UE forces the UE to perform an IMS registration procedure with the IMS network. | 04-16-2009 |
20090097399 | System and Method for Path Failure Recovery in a Communications Environment - Provided are a system and method for recovering from failure of a path connecting first and second nodes in a communications network. In one example, the method includes identifying that the path has failed. Contexts affected by the path failure are deleted on the first node, and the second node with which the path was shared is notified that the contexts have been deleted. | 04-16-2009 |
20090103429 | Method and System for Remote Power Feeding of a DSL Communication Device - The invention relates to a method and system of remote power feeding of a DSL communication device. The system for performing the method comprises a central DSL system connectable to a plurality of DSL communication devices via a plurality of associated subscriber lines. A subscriber line provides a plurality of communication channels for signal transmission between the central DSL system and the DSL communication device. The method involves receiving a power failure indication signal from the at least one DSL communication device. Following the transmission of the power failure indication signal, one or more communication channels are selected from the plurality of communication channels for signal transmission over the subscriber line. Then, power is fed to the at least one DSL communication device in combination with signal transmission over said selected one or more communication channels of the subscriber line. | 04-23-2009 |
20090109836 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING REDUNDANCY OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS OF A REMOTE FACILITY SYSTEM - A remote facility and method for operating the same includes a signal processing system including a primary multiplexer multiplexing IP signals to form a multiplexed signal, a primary modulator a primary transport processing system forming a transport stream signal from the multiplexed signal, a primary modulator modulating the transport stream signal to form a modulated signal, a backup multiplexer multiplexing IP signals to form the multiplexed signal, a backup modulator a primary transport processing system forming a transport stream signal from the multiplexed signal, a backup modulator modulating the transport stream signal to form a modulated signal. The remote facility includes a controller in communication with the primary multiplexer, the primary transport processing system, the primary modulator, the backup multiplexer, the backup transport processing system and the backup modulator, said controller forming an output signal using at least one of the primary multiplexer, the primary transport processing system, and the primary modulator and at least one of the backup multiplexer, the backup transport processing system and the backup modulator. The remote facility may be part of a television signal collection system that includes an IP network and a local collection facility in communication with the remote collection facility through the IP network. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109837 | Scalable Connectivity Fault Management In A Bridged/Virtual Private Lan Service Environment - A method and apparatus that proxies connectivity check messages and sends fault state changes messages across an MPLS/VPLS network is described. A network element proxies connectivity check messages for remote maintenance endpoints based on a local database. The network element updates the database based on received fault state change message that identify a fault state change of a remote maintenance endpoint. The network element detects fault state changes of local maintenance endpoints and sends a fault state change message to other network elements that proxy connectivity check message for the local maintenance endpoints. | 04-30-2009 |
20090109838 | Method of Handling Random Access Procedure Failure and Related Communication Device - A method of handling random access procedure failure for a user equipment in a radio resource control connected state in a wireless communication system includes initiating a random access procedure corresponding to uplink or downlink data arrival, and then, when the random access procedure fails, determining that a radio link failure is detected and performing a radio link recovery procedure. | 04-30-2009 |
20090116377 | Early service loss or failure indication in an unlicensed mobile access network - An Unlicensed Mobile Access Network Controller (UNC) and method for providing an early indication of service failure to a mobile station registered with the UNC. When the UNC detects a network failure that prevents service to the mobile station, the UNC prohibits new registrations by other mobile stations, starts a timer, and monitors the network failure to determine if the failure clears. If the failure clears before the timer expires, new registrations are accepted from other mobile stations. However, if the timer expires before the failure clears, the UNC continues to prohibit new registrations from other mobile stations, and deregisters the mobile station when a network Keep Alive timer expires for the mobile station. When a plurality of mobile stations are registered with the UNC, the UNC deregisters the plurality of mobile stations one at a time as the network Keep Alive timer expires for each mobile station. | 05-07-2009 |
20090116378 | Method for handling radio link failure in wireless communications system and related apparatus - After radio link failure is detected, a wireless communications system handles the radio link failure efficiently by utilizing at least two first timers in a first entity or at least two second timers in a second entity to perform radio link recovery or re-establishment to determine when to enter an idle mode or when to release radio resource. | 05-07-2009 |
20090129260 | Devices, Systems, and/or Methods Regarding Virtual Routing Forwarding - Certain exemplary embodiments can provide a method that can comprise automatically rendering information indicative of a cause of a failure in a Virtual Private Network (VPN) that comprises one or more routers that utilize Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) tables to route traffic via the VPN. The cause of the failure can be automatically determined. | 05-21-2009 |
20090147670 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR RECOVERING INVALID DOWNLINK DATA TUNNEL BETWEEN NETWORKS - Described herein is a method for processing an invalidation of a downlink data tunnel between networks. The method includes the following steps: (1) a core network user plane anchor receives an error indication of data tunnel sent from an access network device, (2) after deciding that the user plane corresponding to the error indication uses a One Tunnel technology, the core network user plane anchor notifies a relevant core network control plane to request recovering the downlink data tunnel, (3) the core network control plane recovers the downlink data tunnel and notifies the core network user plane anchor to update information of the user plane. In addition, a communication system and a communication device are also provided. The method, system, and device can improve the speed of recovering data transmission after the downlink data tunnel becomes invalid. | 06-11-2009 |
20090147671 | SYSTEM FOR TESTING THE UPSTREAM CHANNEL OF A CABLE NETWORK - A system for testing a portion of a cable network provides a pattern generator, Addresser, forward error corrector, and comparator. The system is particularly adapted to testing the upstream channel in a cable network. The pattern generator generates a test signal. The addresser addresses the signal to a known server and also instructs the known server to return the test signal to the test system. The forward error corrector corrects errors introduced in the test signal in transmission from the known server to the test system. The comparator then compares the returned test signal to the originally transmitted test signal to determine the performance of the back channel. Preferably, the comparator uses a bit error rate test to determine the performance of the back channel. | 06-11-2009 |
20090154337 | Protection switching method based on change in link status in ethernet link aggregation sublayer - An Ethernet protection switching method based on a change in link status in a link aggregation sublayer is disclosed. If an Ethernet link aggregation sublayer is present on an Ethernet connection path, a link aggregation sublayer Management Entity Group (MEG) end point is assigned to the Ethernet link aggregation sublayer to generate a link aggregation message for Ethernet connection management and protection switching. When a change in link status is detected in the Ethernet link aggregation sublayer, the link-aggregation-sublayer MEG end point generates and sends the link aggregation message to an MEG end point performing Ethernet connection management and protection switching. Adequate Ethernet protection switching may be performed even in the presence of the link aggregation sublayer. | 06-18-2009 |
20090154338 | NETWORK, NODE DEVICE, NETWORK REDUNDANCY METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM - There is provided a network capable of coping with occurrence of failure including a plurality of autonomous networks. The network includes an existing network A including a plurality of autonomous networks AS | 06-18-2009 |
20090161530 | Method and System of Addressing A Problem Associated With A Network Including A Video Access Ready Device - A method can be used to detect a problem, isolate the cause of the problem to a particular device in which the cause resides, and potentially repairing the particular device. In one embodiment, the method can be fully automated using a system. In another embodiment, the method may be partly automated. In this particular embodiment, the system can perform most or all of the testing or diagnosis automatically. The system can perform the method until a point where human intervention is required. The problem, the cause, and particular device may be known at the time notification is sent to customer care, a workcenter, or another network operations center. With the information regarding the problem, cause and particular device, a technician or other personnel can be dispatched and repair the problem more quickly than if only the problem is provided and the technician needs to perform the testing and diagnosis. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161531 | INTELLIGENT DATABASE EXCHANGE FOR OSPF - The present invention relates to systems and methods for eliminating unnecessary link state database exchanges and processes when two OSPF routers are forming a full adjacency. In particular, the invention provides methods and mechanisms for deducing information about unreachable routers from link state changes received, recording the information about the unreachable routers for a given period of time, constructing a neighbor database summary list that does not contain the LSAs that the neighbor has through using the information about the unreachable routers and reachable routers, and determining whether the neighbor router is restarted after it becomes unreachable. In addition, the present invention provides a few of options to deduce and use the information about the unreachable routers and the information in the link state database for eliminating unnecessary link state database exchanges and processes. | 06-25-2009 |
20090161532 | System and Method for Troubleshooting Broadband Connections - A method is disclosed that includes detecting a problem with a broadband connection at an end device and determining whether the problem can be resolved at the end device. The method also includes requesting that a data network connection device remotely connected to the end device attempt to determine a cause of the problem when the end device cannot resolve the problem. The method also includes determining whether the broadband connection is available. When the broadband connection is available, the method includes initiating a broadband data communication session via the data network connection device. | 06-25-2009 |
20090175163 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL RE-ESTABLISHMENT - A method and apparatus of performing packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) re-establishment includes determining a PDCP re-establishment trigger. An error event is detected based upon the PDCP re-establishment trigger, and PDCP re-establishment procedures are requested. | 07-09-2009 |
20090185477 | Transmitting Data In A Mobile Communication System - The present invention is related to transmitting data in a mobile communication system. Preferably, the present invention comprises transmitting first data to a receiving side and receiving acknowledgment information for indicating whether the first data was successfully transmitted to the receiving side. If the first data was not successfully transmitted to the receiving side, the method further comprises determining whether an amount of available radio resources is sufficient for retransmitting the first data to the receiving side, retransmitting the first data to the receiving side if the amount of available radio resources is sufficient to retransmit the first data, reconfiguring the first data into at least one second data if the amount of available radio resources is insufficient to retransmit the first data, wherein the at least one second data can be transmitted to the receiving side using the amount of available radio resources, and transmitting the at least one second data to the receiving side. | 07-23-2009 |
20090185478 | METHOD AND NODE FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTICAST FAST REROUTE - A method for implementing multicast fast reroute includes: determining a route for a backup LSP according to the tree topology of a point-to-multipoint primary LSP and establishing the backup LSP according to the determined route for the backup LSP. In the process of establishing the backup LSP, messages for the primary LSP and its corresponding backup LSPs are further merged to decrease the number of network signaling states. A node includes a transceiver unit and a backup LSP path establishing unit. The present invention can save protection bandwidth, optimize network resource utilization, and enhance utilization efficiency of resources. | 07-23-2009 |
20090190466 | Method and an apparatus for preventing traffic interruptions between client ports exchanging information through a communication network - A method for preventing a temporary traffic interruption between two client ports and the consequent state transition of the receiving port in a communication network providing for the transmission of a data stream between two clients along at least one path when a fault condition is detected in the path. The method includes the steps of monitoring the data stream directed to the receiver and, upon detecting in the data stream an error sequence capable of starting the state transition, replacing the data stream with a filling data stream to prevent the receiver from detecting an error condition, and resuming the forwarding of the received data stream after a predetermined time interval. An apparatus able to mask to the receiver for the predetermined time interval, a storage area network and a computer program product are also disclosed. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190467 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING FAULT IN A MULTI PROTOCOL LABEL SWITCHING SYSTEM - A system, method and computer readable media for detecting and managing fault within a network using the network's label distribution protocol transactions. Initially, the system will monitor and analyze all transactions within the network to determine if the network has degraded at or between any nodes in the system. The system can then recognize if there is any failure and determine if the network has degraded past a threshold value that is needed for proper operation. If the network has a failure that is beyond this threshold, it will notify a fault management system and subsequently a ticketing system to notify the user that a failure within the system has occurred. | 07-30-2009 |
20090190468 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENSURING SERVICE CONTINUITY IN CASE OF A PROXY PROFILE GATEWAY FAILURE OR INTERRUPTION - Aspects of the present invention relate to methods, systems and computer products that guarantee the availability of basic services to subscribers during the failure of a Proxy-Profile Gateway. An independent module equipped with monitoring probes for tracking the actual location of the end-customer, an interface for controlling the Gateway availability, and an active SS7 signaling interface are also provided, in order to initiate the recovery procedures, along with a database for storing the relevant information necessary to apply the restoration procedures. | 07-30-2009 |
20090196167 | Method and Apparatus for Improving Reset Mechanism of Radio Link Re-establishment Timers in a Wireless Communications System - In order to avoid system malfunctions, the present invention discloses a method of improving the reset mechanism of radio link re-establishment timers for a user equipment in a wireless communications system. The method includes performing a cell update procedure according to a radio link failure event, stopping a plurality of re-establishment timers after responding to a CELL UPDATE CONFIRM message, and clearing a variable including the expiration states of the plurality of re-establishment timers. | 08-06-2009 |
20090196168 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO LINK FAILURE RECOVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a method for radio link failure (RLF) recovery in a wireless communications network, a timer T sets a predetermined time period from a command to a mobile terminal UE to hand over to a new eNB. Resources are reserved at a target eNB | 08-06-2009 |
20090201798 | METHOD FOR SIGNALING BACK-OFF INFORMATION IN RANDOM ACCESS - A method for performing random access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a preamble for random access in uplink, receiving a random access response message including back-off information as a response to the preamble, and performing back-off using the back-off information when the random access has failed. | 08-13-2009 |
20090207726 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK RECOVERY FROM MULTIPLE LINK FAILURES - Methods and systems for fast and reliable network recovery from multiple link failures. In accordance with one example of the method, a master node receives a request from a transit node having a blocked port to open the blocked port for data forwarding, wherein the blocked port is associated with a restored link. The master node starts a health-check timer and transmits a health-check message on its primary port to determine that all failed links of the network are restored. Upon determining that the health-check message is received at its secondary port, the master node transmits a message to each transit node indicating that all failed links are restored. Upon determining that the health-check message is not received at its secondary port before the health-check timer lapsed, the master node transmits a message to the transit node to open the blocked port associated with the restored link for data forwarding. | 08-20-2009 |
20090207727 | METHOD FOR NUMBERING WORKING SERVICES ON CHANNEL PROTECTION RING - A method for numbering working services on a channel protection ring. The process of numbering working services includes: after detecting that the node has an added or dropped working service in the downstream segment in the specified direction, the node on the ring sends a notification message which includes the identifier corresponding to the node to the downstream node in the specified direction; after receiving the notification message and detecting that the node has an added or dropped working service in the downstream segment in the reverse direction of the specified direction, the node on the ring assigns a serial number to the working service according to the identifier in the notification message. The present invention enables automatic numbering of services and dynamic adjustment of the service numbers on the ODUk protection ring, and fulfills the requirements of ODUk protection switching. | 08-20-2009 |
20090213725 | NETWORK FAULT CORRELATION IN MULTI-ROUTE CONFIGURATION SCENARIOS - A method and network device are shown that include identifying at least one fault identifier to be a member of a first fault set, and identifying at least one fault identifier to be a member of a second fault set, the first fault set associated with a first path from a source node to a destination node, and the second fault set associated with a second path from the source node to the destination node. Further, the method and network device include identifying a reduced fault set by eliminating the second fault set, when the first fault set is a subset of the second fault set. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213726 | LOSS-FREE PACKET NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a method can include: receiving a packet in a device; classifying the received packet as a first packet type or a second packet type; when the packet is the first packet type, forwarding the packet to a next hop; and when the packet is the second packet type: performing forward error correction (FEC) encoding on the packet to generate repair data, modifying the packet by adding a multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) header to indicate that the packet is to be forwarded on an FEC-protected label switched path (LSP), generating an additional MPLS packet carrying the repair data, and forwarding the modified packet and the additional packet to a next hop. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213727 | VOICE PACKET COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM WITH COMMUNICATIONS QUALITY EVALUATION FUNCTION - A voice packet communications system which objectively evaluates the voice quality in real time. Voice packets received from a network are input into an adjustment circuit. The adjustment circuit evens out the periods of the voice packets, detects the drop-out of voice packets, and inserts substitute packets in the voice packet sequence. Furthermore, the adjustment circuit outputs the number of voice packets that have dropped out, the number of substitute packets that have been inserted, and the number of voice packets that have accumulated inside the circuit, as quality information in each monitoring period. A decoding circuit converts the voice packets adjusted by the adjustment circuit into voice information. A judgement circuit calculates an index that indicates the communications quality of the voice packets from the quality information using a specified calculation formula. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213728 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PACKET REDUNDANCY AND RECOVERY - Apparatus and method for packet redundancy and recovery are disclosed. In a transmitter, parity packets are generated by executing exclusive OR between the corresponding data packets, and are transmitted along with the data packets to a receiver. In the receiver, lost data packets are found out and are recovered by executing exclusive OR between the corresponding data packets and the corresponding parity packets. This invention enhances the reliability of streaming data transmission using loss-recovery packets. Data packets are grouped and transmitted with redundant packets to allow the receiver to recover a lost packet within the group. This will minimize the need and therefore the time and delay to request a retransmission of the damaged or lost packets. | 08-27-2009 |
20090213729 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LINK CONTROL IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for controlling transmission of packets on multiple links are described. In one design, a transmitter may generate packets of data for a receiver, assign the packets with sequence numbers from a single sequence number space, demultiplex the packets into multiple streams for multiple links, and send each stream of packets on the associated link to the receiver. The receiver may receive some packets in error, and the correctly received packets may be out of order. In one design, the receiver may maintain the largest sequence number of correctly received packets for each link. After detecting at least one missing packet, the receiver may send status information conveying the missing packet(s) and the largest sequence numbers for all links to the transmitter. The transmitter may use the largest sequence numbers for all links and its packet-to-link mapping to determine whether to quickly resend each missing packet or wait. | 08-27-2009 |
20090238066 | SELECTION OF RETRANSMISSION SETTINGS FOR HARQ IN WCDMA AND LTE NETWORKS - Improvements in the performance of HARQ operation are achieved by considering two channel coding parameters, the number of filler bits F and the number of dummy bits N | 09-24-2009 |
20090245094 | OUTAGE ANALYSIS SYSTEM - A device may receiving alarms identifying failures of network elements, create a site table that includes a list of sites at which the alarms are generated and a number of alarms for each of the sites, determine whether an outage has occurred based on the alarms, analyze whether the outage is a false outage based on a failure of a probe that generates the alarms, and provide a notification that includes the site table, an indication of whether the outage has occurred, or an indication whether the outage is a false outage. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245095 | Voice Over Internet Protocol Clarity During Degradation - Illustrative embodiments provide a computer implemented method, a data processing system and a computer program product for improving voice over Internet Protocol clarity during degradation. In one illustrative embodiment, the computer implemented method comprises monitoring a call, determining whether degradation exists; and responsive to a determination that degradation exists, applying a corrective action. The computer implemented method further comprises determining whether a quality of the call has improved and responsive to determining that the quality of the call has improved, further monitoring the call to form a monitored quality. The computer implemented method further comprises, determining whether monitored quality is acceptable, and responsive to determining monitored quality acceptable, removing the corrective action. | 10-01-2009 |
20090245096 | Apparatus and method for supporting hybrid automatic repeat request in a broadband wireless communication system - A broadband wireless communication system using a plurality of Frequency Allocations (FAs) is provided. A method for packet transmission of a packet of a transmitting end includes dividing one encoded packet into a plurality of parts, mapping a plurality the plurality of parts of the packet to the FAs through the plurality of different FAs transmission, when a re-transmission request is received, re-mapping the plurality of parts of the packet to the FAs such that at least one of the at least one of the plurality of parts is re-mapped to an FA that is different than an FA previously mapped thereto. Retransmitting the encoded packet by at least one of a number of subunits. | 10-01-2009 |
20090252029 | Method, Detection Device and Server Device for Evaluation of an Incoming Communication to a Communication Device - A method, a detection device and a server device for evaluation of a communication arriving via a connecting line at the communication device are provided. Communication information which can be read or determined from the incoming communication is detected by the detection device which is coupled between the connecting line and the communication device, and is associated solely with the communication device. Furthermore, the detection device checks whether the detected communication information matches predeterminable data pattern information, and/or whether a response message to be initiated by the incoming communication from the communication device via the connecting line is absent. If the check result is positive, the detected communication information is stored, and is read out during the course of a central evaluation process carried out by the server device | 10-08-2009 |
20090252030 | REDUCING TRAFFIC LOSS IN AN EAPS SYSTEM - A ring network with an automatic protection switching domain includes a control VLAN and at least one data VLAN. A master node in the ring is connected to at least one transit node. Each node in the ring network is linked to an adjacent node by a primary port or a secondary port. The master node receives notification of a fault via the control VLAN, the fault indicating a failed link between adjacent nodes. In response, the master node unblocks its secondary port to traffic on the data VLAN(s). The forwarding database entries on the master node and on the transit node(s) are flushed. Data traffic is flooded to the ring network until forwarding database entries on the master node and on the transit node(s) have been reestablished. | 10-08-2009 |
20090252031 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING PROTOCOL DATA UNIT HEADER RE-SYNCHRONIZATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for performing protocol data unit (PDU) header re-synchronization in a communication system includes: when a header check sequence (HCS) fail occurs, detecting whether there exists a valid HCS in a first portion of first data by utilizing at least one detection window, where the first data is derived from an input signal received by the communication system; and when a valid HCS is detected in the first portion of the first data, detecting whether at least a second portion of the first data matches a connection identifier (CID) to determine whether the PDU header re-synchronization is completed. | 10-08-2009 |
20090257345 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROVIDING SELF ADAPTING TRANSPORT OF PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK (PSTN) CIRCUITS OVER A WIRELESS NETWORK - An adaptive telecommunications system for transporting communication traffic over a network comprising a means for transmitting communication traffic between a plurality of devices through a network, monitoring the communication traffic between the plurality of devices, and a adaptively changing the mode of operation either before and/or during a call, based on at least one of instantaneous network changes, connection type characteristics, and type of communication traffic. The devices attached to the network may consist of, for example, a fax machine, phone, mobile phone, public branch network exchange, a computer, or a switch. The traffic traveling across the system, voice, fax, or data, for example, may be compressed and/or restricted based on the type of traffic. The system may fully replace the existing PSTN circuits or may be used for overflow when the existing PSTN circuits are at near or full capacity. | 10-15-2009 |
20090262642 | Updating Routing and Outage Information in a Communications Network - After power is restored to a node in a utility network, that node employs one or more of its neighboring nodes as proxies to route a message to a central control facility of the utility. The message contains information about the restored node, and possibly one or more of its neighbor nodes. This information may include reboot counters, the amount of time that the node was down, momentary outages or power fluctuations, and/or the time of power restoration. The node that creates and initially sends the message can be the restored node itself, or another node that recognizes when a restored node has recently come back online. | 10-22-2009 |
20090268605 | Method and System for Network Backbone Analysis - A method and system of an embodiment may include receiving network path information identifying one or more network paths, receiving network traffic information specifying a network ingress and a network egress for the network traffic on a first network path of the one or more identified network paths and the network traffic information specifying one or more attributes of the network traffic, emulating failure of one or more components of the first network path, determining a second network path between the specified network ingress and the specified network egress to accommodate the network traffic from the first network path, and providing information associated with the second network path. | 10-29-2009 |
20090268606 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING AND CORRECTING FAULTS IN A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) NETWORK - Malfunctions in a communications network may introduce an unacceptably low level of reliability for many users, thereby slowing further adoption of Internet Protocol (IP) telephony, for example. In an example embodiment of the present invention, a method and corresponding apparatus for supporting a call in a presence of a fault in a network is provided. The method includes supporting a primary protocol to service a call between near-end and far-end access nodes associated with two or more callers. Signaling information in the primary protocol supporting the call may be identified and used to establish a backup protocol between the near-end and far-end access nodes. The primary protocol may be monitored for a fault and, in an event a fault occurs, supporting the call using the backup protocol. As a result, IP telephony may be transported in a more reliable manner, thereby reducing the number of dropped and uncompleted calls. | 10-29-2009 |
20090274040 | Mid-call Redirection of Traffic Through Application-Layer Gateways - A method and apparatus are disclosed for redirecting traffic associated with an application so that the traffic advantageously traverses (or “hairpins”) through an application-layer gateway. Because the present invention advantageously redirects traffic without any participation by routers, no changes to or replacement of routers in a network is required. The illustrative embodiment is disclosed in the context of Internet telephony, but is also applicable to other kinds of applications and types of communication (e.g., Internet Protocol Television [IPTV], instant messaging [IM], videoconferencing, etc.) | 11-05-2009 |
20090274041 | Fast feedback contention-based ranging procedure in wireless communications systems - A fast feedback mechanism is provided in a contention-based ranging procedure. A Subscriber Station (SS) initializes a ranging procedure by sending a ranging code on a selected ranging opportunity for resource access to a Base Station (BS) on a shared ranging channel in a previous uplink frame. The SS also starts a time associated with the ranging code. In response to all received ranging opportunities, the BS broadcasts an acknowledgement (ACK) in a subsequent downlink frame. The ACK comprises a reception status message that indicates the decoding status of the ranging opportunities. With the novel fast feedback mechanism, when ranging collision or failure occurs, upon receiving the reception status report, the SS will proceed with the next round of contention without continuing wait for the entire timeout period. As a result, the total latency due to the ranging collision or failure is reduced. | 11-05-2009 |
20090279423 | Recovering from Failures Without Impact on Data Traffic in a Shared Bus Architecture - Methods of detecting and recovering from communication failures within an operating network switching device that is switching packets in a communication network, and associated structures. The communication failures addressed involve communications between the packet processors and a host CPU over a shared communications bus, e.g., PCI bus. The affected packet processor(s)—which may be all or a subset of the packet processors of the network switch—may be recovered without affecting hardware packet forwarding through the affected packet processors. This maximizes the up time of the network switching device. Other packet processor(s), if any, of the network switching device, which are not affected by the communication failure, may continue their normal packet forwarding, i.e., hardware forwarding that does not involve communications with the host CPU as well as forwarding or other operations that do involve communications with the host CPU. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279424 | METHODS, COMMUNICATION NETWORKS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR COMMUNICATING TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXING TRAFFIC USING A TRAFFIC ENCAPSULATION STANDARD CONFIGURED TO SUPPORT STATISTICAL MULTIPLEXING (STATMUX) TRAFFIC - A communication network is operated by communicating Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) traffic and data (STATMUX) traffic over a single connection, where the single connection may include multiple aggregated lines using a traffic encapsulation standard configured to support STATMUX traffic. | 11-12-2009 |
20090279425 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND NETWORK ELEMENT FOR SERVICE PROCESSING AFTER DATA OF NETWORK ELEMENT IS INVALID OR NETWORK ELEMENT FAILS - A method, a system, and a network element for service processing after data of a network element is invalid or a network element fails is provided. When the service network element receives the service request message from the network and is initiated to a called end and the user data is invalid, the service network element returns a data invalid message of the called end to the network. When a network element containing registration data of a user is abnormal and the registration data of the user is invalid, by using the present invention, the service unavailable time is shortened, and user services can be recovered rapidly. | 11-12-2009 |
20090285087 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND ABNORMALITY RESTORATION METHOD - According to one embodiment, a communication apparatus includes an acquisition module selectively acquires equipment information showing communication equipment including the same program as the program recorded on the first recording medium to record the equipment information in a second recording medium differing from the first recording medium, and a failure restoration module obtains a program from communication equipment based on the equipment information recorded on the second recording medium, and start the communication apparatus based on the obtained program, when the communication apparatus cannot start by the program recorded on the first recording medium. | 11-19-2009 |
20090285088 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS OF IMPLEMENTING INTER-SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS - Methods for implementing inter-system communications includes as follows: a serving base station selects a relay terminal, transmits a neighboring base station access request to the selected relay terminal; the relay terminal receives the neighboring base station access request, and accesses a neighboring base station; the relay terminal receives relay information, and communicates with the serving base station or the neighboring base station based on the relay information. Systems and apparatuses for implementing inter-system communications are also disclosed. With the methods, systems and apparatuses of the embodiments of the present disclosure, the probability of correct receipt of relay information at the neighboring base station may be improved. | 11-19-2009 |
20090290483 | METHOD OF AND A SYSTEM FOR AUTONOMOUSLY IDENTIFYING WHICH NODE IN A TWO-NODE SYSTEM HAS FAILED - A method of and a system for autonomously identifying which node in a two-node system has failed are described. The system includes two nodes and a fault-tolerant communication fabric. The fabric defines a plurality of communication paths connecting the two nodes, and fault-tolerant loop-back communication in which each node can send a message to itself utilizing at least one switch structure of the fabric. In addition, each of the two nodes includes logic for performing the service; logic for testing the functionality of the respective node; logic for sending test result messages to both nodes; fault-isolation logic for analyzing test result messages from both nodes; and logic for disabling the other node from performing the service only if the fault-isolation logic determines that the respective node is capable of successfully performing the service and also determines that the other node is incapable of successfully performing the service. | 11-26-2009 |
20090290484 | METHOD AND SYSTEM MAKING IT POSSIBLE TO MANAGE ERRATIC INTERRUPTIONS IN A TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - Method and system are disclosed for managing erratic interruptions in a transmission system where the messages to be transmitted are composed of data packets and are expressed by means of a polynomial of degree t−1. The senders and the receivers share information making it possible to reference the data packets. In the course of the transmission of a message represented by a polynomial P, at least t points Ai are generated and P(Ai) of the polynomial P is evaluated, with t′ greater than or equal to t. The evaluations P(Ai) are transmitted of the t′ points to the receiver or receivers concerned, with information allowing the receivers to detect the transmission errors. Each receiver verifies that it has received t valid evaluations, that is to say free of transmission errors, uses the information referencing the packets and the t valid evaluations P(Ai) of the polynomial to determine the points Ai, and on the basis of the P(Ai) and of the Ai and determines the polynomial P used and on the basis of said polynomial deduces the message therefrom. | 11-26-2009 |
20090303870 | METHOD FOR RESTORING A SERVICE BOOKING SYSTEM IN A NETWORK AFTER FAILURE - The invention relates to a method for of restoring a service reservation booking system in a network after a failure, that comprises a first step of invalidating at least a portion of the bookings which cannot be seen anymore by said service booking system due to-said failure, a second step of recalculating said bookings which cannot be seen anymore by said service booking system by validating the bookings which are valid in the network topology after the failure and by cancelling the bookings which are invalid in the network topology after said failure. Advantageously, the method of the present invention further includes a third step during which the nodes of the network disappear from the service booking system. The present invention also relates to a service booking system in a network. | 12-10-2009 |
20090303871 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PACKET AGGREGATION ACCORDING TO TRAFFIC CHARACTERISTICS - A method and apparatus for packet aggregation is provided. The apparatus for packet aggregation may include an upper layer management unit to generate a plurality of Media Access Control (MAC) Service Data Units (MSDUs) and traffic characteristic information of each of the plurality of MSDUs; a MAC layer management unit to determine a sequence number of each of the plurality of MSDUs based on the traffic characteristic information of each of the plurality of MSDUs, and to generate an aggregated MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) based on the sequence number of each of the plurality of MSDUs; and a physical (PHY) layer management unit to transmit the aggregated MPDU to a destination. | 12-10-2009 |
20090323516 | DIAGNOSING NETWORK PROBLEMS - The method collects configuration data about the network, compares it to known good configurations to see if a corrective configuration is available. In addition, the method will review known bad configurations and determine if any of the successful corrective configurations for the bad configuration would be appropriate for the bad configuration under consideration. | 12-31-2009 |
20100008218 | Termination Message for Wireless Wide Area Network Routers - A wireless router device is configured to detect a fault that would prohibit wireless communications between the router and a wireless wide area network. A message, referred to herein as a termination message, is then generated. The termination message contains information describing the fault and is configured to cause termination of wireless communication with the wireless wide area network. The wireless router than transmits the termination message to at least one base transceiver station that is part of the wireless wide area network. The base transceiver station is then able to assess and reallocate resources, including power management, based on the fault information contained in the received termination message. | 01-14-2010 |
20100008219 | Automatic network signal diversion mechanism - The present invention provides an automatic network signal diversion mechanism capable of preventing interruptions of power supply and signals, which comprises an electronic device, at least one filter module and an automatic diversion device. The electronic device has a circuit board mounted with a plurality of electronic components, the filter module, the automatic diversion device and a circuit layout, and equipped with at least one signal input port and signal output port connected electrically with the filter module and the automatic diversion device. The filter module is electrically connected with a data processing unit on a motherboard of a computer host to enable filtering of external network signals, and the automatic diversion device is electrically connected with a power input device. When the power input device fails, a signal diversion component of the automatic diversion device will be in a closed-circuit connection status for allowing external network signals to be inputted from the signal input port and directly diverted and outputted to the signal output port, so as to avoid interruptions of power supply or signals for the electronic device that may occur as a result of short circuits, cut-off or failure of the power input device. | 01-14-2010 |
20100014414 | BRIDGE, SYSTEM, BRIDGE CONTROL METHOD AND PROGRAM RECORDING MEDIUM - A bridge according to an exemplary aspect of the invention comprises a BPDU-receiver which receives a BPDU packet of an STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) including failure information and an error-handler which performs error handling according to the failure information. | 01-21-2010 |
20100014415 | MOBILE ROUTER THAT MONITORS LINKS - A mobile router having a link monitor module is disclosed. The mobile router may be installed in a mobile vehicle and permit a local end-user to access wide area networks (e.g., the Internet) via the mobile router. The link monitor module may monitor the layer | 01-21-2010 |
20100027411 | System and Method for Compensating for a Satellite Gateway Failure - The disclosed embodiments relate to a system and method for compensating for a satellite gateway failure. There is provided a system comprising a first satellite gateway, and a second satellite gateway ( | 02-04-2010 |
20100027412 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SERVICE RESTORATION IN A MEDIA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a set-top box (STB) having a controller to generate a trouble report indicating a malfunction with one or more services, and submitting the trouble report to a mitigation system. The mitigation system can be adapted to detect one or more operational faults in at least one of a Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer (DSLAM), a residential gateway (RG), and the STB, cycle operations of at least one of the DSLAM, the RG, and the STB responsive to detecting an undesirable state of operation of at least one of the DSLAM, the RG, and the STB, and generate a trouble ticket directed to a service agent responsive to detecting that at least one of the DSLAM, the RG and the STB continues to exhibit at least one operational fault. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027413 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a control signal in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a control signal on an uplink channel, determining whether an unrecoverable error, which cannot be corrected in a specific layer, is detected during the transmission of the control signal and if the unrecoverable error is detected, transmitting a message which informs that the unrecoverable error is detected. A deadlock due to an unrecoverable error in the specific layer can be prevented. | 02-04-2010 |
20100027414 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, IMAGE INPUT APPARATUS, IMAGE OUTPUT APPARATUS, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM - After connection to another communication apparatus using the first communication-parameter set fails, and thereafter, connection to the other communication apparatus using the second communication-parameter set is successfully established, the connection to the other communication apparatus using the first communication-parameter set is attempted again. | 02-04-2010 |
20100039929 | INDOOR WIRELESS POSITIONING SYSTEM AND METHOD - Provided is an indoor wireless positioning system and method including: a signal receiving unit receiving first signals from wireless communication access points and measuring strengths of the received first signals and a position estimating unit estimating a current position by comparing the strengths of the first signals measured by the signal receiving unit with a table recording strengths of second signals predicted by a simulation for indoor space the system is currently positioned. Accordingly, it is possible to rapidly and accurately create a fingerprint database and calculate position information on the terminal in the terminal or the server on the basis of the database information. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039930 | Method, Apparatus, and System for Disaster Recovery of IMS - A method, apparatus, and system for disaster recovery of an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) are provided. The method includes: triggering a redundant Call Session Control Function (CSCF); obtaining, by the redundant CSCF, user backup data of registered IMS Private User Identities (IMPIs) that are associated with IMPUs and user service configuration data of IMS Public User Identities (IMPUs) in an IMS subscription from a network storage entity of a user; and recovering, by the redundant CSCF, a corresponding service according to the obtained user backup data of the registered IMPIs and user service configuration data of the IMPUs in the IMS subscription. With the present invention, the one-IMPU multi-IMPI, one-IMPI multi-IMPU, or multi-IMPI multi-IMPU service can be recovered, and this enables the user to have better service continuity experiences. | 02-18-2010 |
20100039931 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR UPDATING ROUTES AFTER NODE FAILS IN P2P NETWORK - A method for updating routing table information after a node fails in a P2P network is disclosed herein. The method includes: the range of the nodes whose route is directed to the failed node is determined according to the distance between the failed node and the neighboring node of the failed node; the failure information of the failed node is sent to the LDN of the failed node within the node range; and the LDN updates the routing table according to the failure information. A network device and a P2P communication network are also disclosed herein. The embodiments of the present invention enhance the capability of the whole P2P network in perceiving node churn and improve the route search efficiency and system stability of the whole P2P network. | 02-18-2010 |
20100046362 | METHOD FOR DEALING WITH THE PACKET DOMAIN GATEWAY SUPPORT NODE ERRORS - “A method for dealing with the packet domain gateway support node errors, including: a Radio Network Controller ( | 02-25-2010 |
20100046363 | METHODS FOR MANAGING AN ELECTION OF A CLUSTER HEAD IN AD HOC MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYSTEMS THEREOF - A method, computer readable medium, and system for managing a mobile communication network includes identifying one or more mobile communication devices within a region. One of the one or more identified mobile communication devices which have been dynamically formed into one or more clusters having a tree structure and are at least partially meshed together is elected as a cluster head in each of one or more clusters based on one or more parameters. | 02-25-2010 |
20100046364 | Transmitting system, apparatus, and method - A system includes a first apparatus and a second apparatus connected via a transmission path. The first apparatus includes a transmitting unit that transmits a request as at least one packet and retransmits the at least one request packet if a time period between the request and a response is not less than a predetermined time period; and a receiving unit that receives the response as at least one response packet and discards any error packet and any redundant packet from among the received at least one response packet. The second apparatus includes: a receiving unit that receives the at least one request packet and discards any error packet from among the received at least one request packet; and a transmitting unit that determines a response type, selectively makes the at least one response packet redundant for any response of a specific type, and transmits the redundant response packets. | 02-25-2010 |
20100054117 | GLOBAL PORTS IN MULTI-SWITCH SYSTEMS - Global ports are supported in multi-switch systems having arbitrary topologies. In some implementations, global ports are implemented in a manner which makes the switch system robust in the face of link failure. In specific Ethernet implementations, global ports enable flooding, learning, forwarding, and link aggregation across the switch system. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054118 | SELF-OPTIMIZATION AND SELF-HEALING OF VOICE QUALITY PROBLEMS UTILIZING SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE - A method and system for automatically resolving a voice transmission problem in real time in a communication system. Service oriented architecture (SOA)-based reporter services report voice transmission characteristic measurements. An enterprise service bus aggregates the measurements into a combination of measurements. An analyzer that is a SOA service provider determines that the combination of measurements indicates a voice transmission problem. The voice transmission problem determination includes identifying a match between the combination of measurements and a pattern of predefined conditions stored in a database. The database associates the pattern with one or more corrective actions. Using the database, the analyzer identifies the one or more corrective actions that are associated with the pattern of predefined conditions. SOA-based fixer services execute the corrective action(s) to resolve the voice transmission problem. As new voice transmission problems become known, the system expands to add reporting services and fixer services. | 03-04-2010 |
20100054119 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, USER EQUIPMENT, AND COMMUNICATION ENDING PERIOD SHORTENING METHOD TO BE UTILIZED IN THE SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT - The present invention provides a user equipment that can shorten the time required for a communication ending. The user equipment is put into an error monitoring state in the procedure a | 03-04-2010 |
20100061225 | NETWORK-ADAPTIVE PREEMPTIVE REPAIR IN REAL-TIME VIDEO - A network-adaptive error recovery method for real-time video transmission based on sending repair frames preemptively with a frequency that is based on observed run-length of good frames and round trip time. | 03-11-2010 |
20100061226 | Control Method for Access Gateway and Communication System - In order to provide a redundancy configuration to an access gateway apparatus in which a control plane and a user plane are separated, the access gateway apparatus includes: a control computer for receiving control signals from the networks to establish the communication path, thereby determining packet transfer information for the data; and a transfer computer for receiving the packet transfer information from the control computer to transfer the data through the communication path. The transfer computer includes: a plurality of first transfer computers for executing the transfer of the data; and a second transfer computer for taking over, when a fault occurs in any one of the plurality of first transfer computers. The control computer includes: a first control computer for processing the control signals received from the networks; and a second control computer for taking over, when a fault occurs in the first control computer. | 03-11-2010 |
20100067369 | INFORMATION MANAGEMENT METHOD AND INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - An information management method and an information processing device functioning as a node are provided to enable an effective use of information distributed to, and shared with, a plurality of nodes on a network and to enable maintenance of security against leakage of information by controlling information retention. This management method of information gathers information distributed to, and shared with, a plurality of the nodes on a network and holds the information in a state accessible from other nodes to a temporary information memory unit when generating restored information. The information management method is also characterized in setting a flag for showing a history of the information and immediately discarding the information in the case that the retention of restored information becomes improper from a view point of contents of the flag. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067370 | DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS AND A DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD - A data transmission apparatus of this invention includes a first transmitting unit, a second transmitting unit, and a switching unit. The first transmitting unit generates a first error correction information, outputs the first data and the first error correction information to the switching unit and transmits a timing information of the first data and a first specified information to specify the first data to the second transmitting unit. The second transmitting unit compares a second specified information to specify the second data and the first specified information and transmitting the a first comparison result of the second specified information and the first specified information to the switching unit. The switching unit transmits the first data and the first error correction information when the first comparison result is not indicating a match of the second specified information and the first specified information. | 03-18-2010 |
20100067371 | USING IDENTIFIER MAPPING TO RESOLVE ACCESS POINT IDENTIFIER AMBIGUITY - Ambiguity (e.g., confusion) associated with access point identifiers may be resolved by querying candidate target access points and/or by using historical records indicative of one or more access points that the access point has previously accessed. For example, messages may be sent to access points that are assigned the same identifier to cause the access points to monitor for a signal from an access terminal that received the identifier from a target access point. The target access point may then be identified based on any responses that indicate that a signal was received from the access terminal In some aspects the access points subject to being queried may be selected using a tiered priority. In addition, it may be determined based on prior handoffs of a given access terminal that when that access terminal reports a given identifier, the access terminal usually ends up being handed-off to a particular access point. Accordingly, a mapping may be maintained for that access terminal that maps the identifier to that access point so that the mapping may be used to resolve any future confusion associated with the use of that identifier by that access terminal. | 03-18-2010 |
20100074096 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REGISTRATION OF A NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE DURING LOSS OF POWER - A system and method for registration of a network access device including a processor configured to identify power loss at a network access device, initiate backup power at the network access device, identify when the backup power at the network access device decreases to or below a first predetermined level, and identify when backup power at the network access device is restored to or above a second predetermined level, and a transmitter configured to transmit, to a server, a registration extension message to reconfigure conditions for handling inbound communications and a registration extension cancellation message to restore original conditions for handling inbound communications. | 03-25-2010 |
20100080115 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MONITOR BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL SESSIONS - Example methods and apparatus to monitor border gateway protocol sessions are disclosed. A disclosed example method includes detecting a failure of a first border gateway protocol (BGP) session and initiating a session-down timer in response to detecting the failure. The example method also includes generating a sustained-down alarm when a threshold time value of the session-down timer is exceeded before the first BGP session is re-established. | 04-01-2010 |
20100080116 | RE-ESTABLISHING A RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL CONNECTION WITH A NON-PREPARED BASE STATION - A method for establishing a radio resource control connection is disclosed. A wireless communication device may establish a radio resource control connection with a first base station. The wireless communication device may send a message to a second base station that requests re-establishment of the radio resource control connection. The wireless communication device may receive a message from the second base station that initiates setup of a new radio resource control connection. | 04-01-2010 |
20100085867 | System and method for an EMBS design to optimize spectrum efficiency, link adaptation and EMBS traffic security - A wireless communication network capable of providing Enhanced Multi-Broadcast Service (EMBS) to a plurality of subscriber stations. At least one base station in the network transmits a downlink frame to the plurality of subscriber stations. The downlink frame includes an EMBS MAP configured to identify locations of EMBS data bursts. The downlink frame also includes a security and data multiplexing burst and EMBS data burst. A number of the subscriber stations are configured to decode the EMBS MAP to determine the locations of a number of EMBS data burst in a number of subsequent downlink frames. | 04-08-2010 |
20100085868 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED MULTICAST STREAMING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The invention includes a method and apparatus for providing media content. The method includes duplicating each packet of an original packet stream for which an associated importance level satisfies an importance condition, inserting each duplicate packet within the original packet stream to form thereby a modified packet stream, and transmitting the modified packet stream toward a wireless terminal adapted for processing the modified packet stream for presenting the media content conveyed by the original packet stream. The duplicate packets may be inserted within respective windows associated with the duplicate packets, wherein each window is determined according to an original packet position associated with the original packet from which the duplicate packet is formed. | 04-08-2010 |
20100091643 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ROBUST SLOTTED MODE OPERATION IN FADING WIRELESS ENVIRONMENTS - Methods, devices and computer program products are disclosed that allow for wireless communication devices to operate more robustly in the slotted mode of operation in the event of network system loss. Specifically, present aspects require the wireless device to move to or remain in the slotted mode of operation as opposed to immediately entering into a system determination/acquisition mode upon failing to acquire an active set pilot during a slotted wake-up. By moving to the slotted mode of operation or providing for additional slotted-wake-ups, a number of attempts at acquiring the active set pilot can be performed before declaring the system as lost, thereby allowing for fading channel conditions to prevail without the need to re-acquire the lost system or otherwise acquire another system. Since the performance of the slotted mode is less power intensive than acquiring or re-acquiring a system, a substantial power savings is realized. | 04-15-2010 |
20100091644 | Method of handling Response Failure for a Bluetooth Communication System and Slave Device for Controlling the Same - A method of handling a response failure for a slave device of a Bluetooth communication system includes increasing a size of a variable backoff window when a transmission failure of a response packet utilized for responding to an inquiry packet sent by a master device of the Bluetooth communication system is detected, randomly selecting a wait time from the variable backoff window, and then sending the response packet according to the wait time. | 04-15-2010 |
20100097924 | DATA TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM, TERMINAL, RELAY DEVICE, AND DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD - The terminal includes: the transmitting and receiving unit ( | 04-22-2010 |
20100110877 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FAILOVER OF MOBILE UNITS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of handling a discontinuation of service from a wireless access device is provided. The first wireless access device has a first basic service set identifier and communicates with a plurality of mobile units using a first channel. The method comprises transmitting a first service notice with a second wireless access device using the first channel, wherein the first service notice containing information instructing the first plurality of mobile units to transfer to a second channel for service, and providing service to the first plurality of mobile units using the second channel. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110878 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CONTROL SIGNALING - An approach is provided for an efficient control signaling associated with an error control scheme. A determination is made whether data has been properly received according to an error control scheme. A first pilot sequence representing an acknowledgement is generated if the data is properly received. A second pilot sequence representing a negative acknowledgement is generated if the data is not properly received. A frame including either the first pilot sequence or the second pilot sequence is output. | 05-06-2010 |
20100110879 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE - Provided are a method and an apparatus for providing a multimedia broadcast multicast service. The method for providing a multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) in a base station includes determining the number of terminals receiving the MBMS and determining a unit-cell or multi-cell transmission scheme by comparing predetermined unit-cell and multi-cell thresholds with the determined number of terminals. | 05-06-2010 |
20100124163 | Preserving Stable Calls During Failover - According to one method for preserving stable calls during failover, during a dialog between two user endpoints, a determination is made whether a standby call processor has become operational, such as when a corresponding primary call processor is in fault. Responsive to determining that the standby call processor has become operational, a signaling protocol message is received from a requester. A determination is made whether the message includes an in-dialog signaling protocol request. Responsive to determining that the message includes the in-dialog request, a determination is made whether a call state associated with the dialog is found in memory. Responsive to determining that the call state associated with the dialog is not found in memory, a non-call terminating error response is made responding to the in-dialog request. The non-call terminating error response may cause the requester to terminate the in-dialog request but not terminate the dialog. | 05-20-2010 |
20100124164 | CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS BASED CONTINGENCY TRANSMISSION | 05-20-2010 |
20100128595 | Utilizing A Replacement Pathway For Lost Packet Delivery During Media Reception In A Set-Top Box (STB) - A replacement pathway in an STB is utilized to determine loss of packets and delivery error during reception of media broadcasts, and to retrieve replacement data from one or more replacement media servers. The retrieval of the replacement data is performed during playback of the received media broadcasts. The communication of media broadcast incorporates delays to accommodate the retrieval of replacement data. Alternatively, received broadcast media streams are buffered to enable retrieval of replacement data and to provide seamless presentation of media content in the media broadcasts. The replacement media server performs access authentication operations during replacement data retrieval. The replacement media server is accessed via markup language, for example, HTML and/or XML, based interfaces and/or dedicated APIs. The replacement media server may deny replacement data based on plurality of service criteria such as acceptance and denial criteria, which may comprise allowable bandwidth and/or error rates. | 05-27-2010 |
20100128596 | TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - There is provided a transmission apparatus being operable to realize a link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) between a plurality of nodes forming a network over which signals are transmitted by using a virtual concatenation (VCAT) system, the transmission apparatus including a receiving part being operable to detect a failure of a member as a transmission path forming a virtual concatenation group (VCG) in each member, and a controller being operable to control setting of detection conditions of the failure received at the receiving part in each member. | 05-27-2010 |
20100142366 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PATH STATE DETERMINATIONS - A system and method for determining a state of a communications system. A determination is made whether a communications path is fully functional, impaired, or non functional. A maximum capacity available to the communications path is determined in response to deterting the communications path is impaired. The communications path is limited to a maximum capacity available in response to determining the maximum capacity of the connection as impaired. | 06-10-2010 |
20100142367 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR NON-ACCESS STRATUM MESSAGE PROCESSING DURING HANDOVER IN EVOLVED NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for non-access stratum (NAS) message processing during handover in an evolved network are provided. The method includes the following steps. An evolved packet core (EPC) receives a message which indicates that a UE is being handed over sent by a source evolved NodeB (S-eNB), and stops sending an NAS message to the UE temporarily. The EPC receives a message which indicates that the UE returns to an S-eNB service area sent by the S-eNB. The EPC sends the NAS message to the UE through the S-eNB, if needed. With the method and the apparatus, the EPC can acquire a location of the UE in time in the case of a handover failure of the UE, a time limit of a retransmission timer is set precisely, and a specific implementation for forwarding an NAS message through an X2 interface is provided. | 06-10-2010 |
20100149964 | System and Method to Mitigate Physical Cable Damage - Method, system and computer-readable medium for handling a dig ticket to mitigate physical cable damage are disclosed. In accordance with the method, a network alarm indicating a logical circuit is received. The logical circuit is mapped to at least one physical cable segment associated with the logical circuit. One or more other physical cable segments diversity of which is affected by the at least one physical cable segment are determined. The diversity associated with the one or more other physical cable segments is updated. The dig ticket is processed based at least on a risk factor that accounts for the diversity of at least one physical cable segment of the one or more other physical cable segments. | 06-17-2010 |
20100149965 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RESTORING NETWORK CONNECTED WITH USERS HAVING DIFFERENT RECOVERY REQUIREMENTS - A method of restoring a target network to which users having different recovery requirements are connected is provided. The method includes analyzing network components including availability information of each user and parameters reflecting characteristics of the target network; and determining optimized restoration architecture for the target network based on the result of the analysis. Accordingly, when failure occurs in a network to which various subscribers having different recovery requirements are connected, the network can be promptly recovered from the failure. | 06-17-2010 |
20100157788 | DETERMINATION OF PACKET LOSS LOCATIONS - In one embodiment, a system may determine receiver identifiers to identify affected receivers, where each of affected receivers failed to receive a packet identified within a packet stream. A loss signature may identify the packet. Each of the affected receivers may be identified by a corresponding one of the receiver identifiers. The system may also determine a packet loss location of the packet from a network topology tree. The network topology tree may include a model of a logical network over which the packet stream was transmitted from a stream source to the affected receivers. The packet loss location may correspond to a lowest common ancestor node of at least two of the affected receivers. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157789 | RANDOMIZED BACKUP ROUTING - A method of routing a call in a network includes receiving the call at a switching node; selecting a primary route to a destination of the call; determining that the primary route is unavailable; randomly selecting, by the switching node, at least one of a plurality of predetermined backup routes for the primary route; and routing the call to the destination over one of the selected backup routes. | 06-24-2010 |
20100157790 | ERROR CORRECTION SCHEME IN A HEARING SYSTEM WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of wireless data communication between a hearing instrument and another device, includes receiving N data packages A | 06-24-2010 |
20100157791 | Multi-Carrier Incremental Redundancy For Packet Based Wireless Communications - Methods and apparatus are disclosed herein for providing incremental redundancy in a wireless communication system to aid in error recovery. One or more redundancy versions are sent on different carriers than the primary version of information to be transmitted. At the receiver end the redundancy versions may be combined using hard or soft combining techniques, including selection combining, selective soft combining or soft combining. | 06-24-2010 |
20100165830 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RECOVERY OF PACKETS IN OVERLAY NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a packet recovery method for packets communicated between sender and receiver nodes of an overlay network that runs over an underlying IP network. The present invention executes a packet recovery process at a receiver node upon satisfaction of a packet recovery condition that is associated with meeting a deadline driven criteria for a transmitted packet. The packet recovery process associates N number of scheduled times with N requests for retransmission of the transmitted packet. At least one of the N scheduled times includes a receiver waiting time. At each N scheduled time, a request for retransmission of the transmitted packet is transmitted to a source node. A packet retransmission process at the sender node is executed upon the first receipt of a request for retransmission of the transmitted packet. In one embodiment, the packet retransmission process retransmits the transmitted packet to the receiver node at M number of scheduled times, where the N and M are non-zero positive integers and at least one of the N or M number of scheduled times is greater than one. In another embodiment, the packet retransmission process uses an erasure coding function, with integer parameter k greater than 1 and less than M, to generate M encoded blocks such that any k out of M encoded blocks are sufficient to recreate the transmitted packet at the receiver node and transmits the M encoded blocks to the receiver node at M scheduled times, where the N and M are non-zero positive integers and M is greater than 2. The M scheduled times are relative to the first receipt of the request for retransmission of the transmitted packet and at least one of the M scheduled times includes a sender waiting time. | 07-01-2010 |
20100177629 | Protocol Fallback Technique for Wireless Data Communications - A wireless communications device is configured to establish a radio level session with a network at a relatively high or highest protocol level among a plurality of protocol levels supported. Upon failures in establishing, or during, a network level data session, the radio level session is closed. Thereafter, the device re-attempts to establish the network level session at a lower, fallback protocol level, by pretending it is a legacy device incapable of supporting the high protocol level. In this manner, the network is likely to follow a different procedure in establishing data communications, whereby an error that caused the failure is less likely to be repeated. As examples, error conditions in eHRPD data sessions result in fallback to HRPD or 1xRTT data sessions. A network based alternative embodiment implements protocol fallback via appropriate fallback instructions to the wireless device. | 07-15-2010 |
20100188967 | System and Method for Providing a Replacement Packet - The system generates a first data stream which represents a data signal. The first data stream is encoded via a first encoding technique. The first data stream comprises one or more packets with a duration and timestamp. The data signal is encoded into a second data stream using a different encoding technique with a corresponding packet in the second data stream. A packet in the second data stream has the same duration and timestamp as the corresponding packet in the first data stream. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188968 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING ETHER RIG NET MESSAGE AND AN ETHER RIG NET PROTECTION SYSTEM USING THE METHOD - A method for processing Ethernet ring messages and a corresponding Ethernet ring protection system are provided. The method comprises distinguishing a message to be processed by processors of transit nodes from that not to be processed by the processors of the transit nodes, and setting a distinguishing identifier when constituting a message; after receiving the message, the transit node forwarding the message not to be processed by the processor thereof to other nodes, or sending the message to be processed by the processor of the transit node to other nodes and meanwhile reporting the message to its processor depending on the distinguishing identifier; the system comprises a master node and transit nodes which generates messages with the distinguishing identifier and performs different process for these messages according to the distinguishing identifier. | 07-29-2010 |
20100188969 | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION SCHEME FOR EFFICIENT MANAGEMENT OF COMMON ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL - A signal transmission scheme for efficient management of a common E-DCH is provided. In the case of a common E-DCH that a UE in an idle mode or in a CELL_FACH status uses within a limited period of time, the UE may notify a Node B of release of radio resources of the common E-DCH using scheduling information including TEBS=0 within the period of time when the UE has completed data transmission. It is possible to prevent unnecessary waste of resources and unnecessary battery consumption of the UE by taking into consideration the above circumstances when triggering new scheduling information since HARQ transmission of the scheduling information has failed. | 07-29-2010 |
20100195488 | OPTIMIZED TRANSPORT PROTOCOL FOR DELAY-SENSITIVE DATA - Transmission delays are minimized when packets are transmitted from a source computer over a network to a destination computer. The source computer measures the network's available bandwidth, forms a sequence of output packets from a sequence of data packets, and transmits the output packets over the network to the destination computer, where the transmission rate is ramped up to the measured bandwidth. In conjunction with the transmission, the source computer monitors a transmission delay indicator which it computes using acknowledgement packets it receives from the destination computer. Whenever the indicator specifies that the transmission delay is increasing, the source computer reduces the transmission rate until the indicator specifies that the delay is unchanged. The source computer dynamically decides whether each output packet will be a forward error correction packet or a single data packet, where the decision is based on minimizing the expected transmission delays. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195489 | INTERFACE MONITORING FOR LINK AGGREGATION - The present invention provides network interface monitoring and management that may be employed with link aggregation technologies. Multiple network interfaces may be aggregated into a single bond and data may be transferred to and from a backbone network via this aggregated bond. A link aggregation monitor employs a heartbeat generator, sniffer and data store to keep track of health and availability of network interfaces. The heartbeat generator sends heartbeats to the network interfaces, which pass the heartbeats around in a token ring configuration. If a network interface fails or otherwise goes offline, detection of this condition causes the monitor and heartbeat generator to prepare new or modified heartbeats so that data may be efficiently and accurately routed around the token ring and health of all remaining alive interfaces can be monitored properly. If a network interface re-enters or is added to the aggregate bond, new/modified heartbeats are then employed. | 08-05-2010 |
20100195490 | AUDIO PACKET RECEIVER, AUDIO PACKET RECEIVING METHOD AND PROGRAM - The audio packet receiver according to the present invention includes a buffer unit ( | 08-05-2010 |
20100202284 | CQI Adjustment for Arbitrary Transport Format Selection Algorithms - Network node ( | 08-12-2010 |
20100208579 | ADAPTIVE USE OF A TRANSMIT OPPORTUNITY - Various embodiments are described to adaptively use a transmit opportunity. | 08-19-2010 |
20100208580 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, AND CONTROL METHOD - In a communication device for monitoring a network system where a frame is transferred, with a maintenance frame for maintenance and management, an input-output section inputs or outputs a frame. A failure detection section detects occurrence of a failure in the network system on the basis of the inputted frame. A setting section sets the communication device according to the detection of the failure so as to terminate or transfer a data frame inputted from the input-output section. A data frame control section controls whether to terminate or transfer the data frame, according to the setting of the data frame by the setting section. A maintenance frame control section controls whether to terminate or transfer the maintenance frame inputted from the input-output section, according to the setting of the data frame by the setting section. | 08-19-2010 |
20100214907 | Method for Synchronizing Voice Traffic With Minimum Latency in a Communications Network - A supervisory communications node monitors and controls communications with a plurality of remote devices throughout a widely distributed network. A method is provided to convey and maintain information used to synchronize the packetization and burst operations within the network. During session setup, jitter constraints indirectly are used to explicitly communicate a synchronization timing reference. The timing reference is set at the beginning of a phase/period boundary used to service the session. In an embodiment, the announcement of the first grant is used as an explicit indication of the synchronization timing reference value. In another embodiment, the synchronization timing reference value is inferred if a remote device receives contiguous voice grants meeting certain conditions. In an embodiment implementing periodic scheduling, the actual arrival of the first grant is used to infer the synchronization timing reference value. In an embodiment, the present invention enables the synchronization timing reference value and/or the periodicity to be modified if network conditions indicate that packetization and burst operations are out-of-synchronization. | 08-26-2010 |
20100220584 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AUTOMATICALLY GENERATING SYSTEM RESTORATION ORDER FOR NETWORK RECOVERY - Embodiments relate to systems and methods for automatically generating a system restoration order for network recovery. A set of managed machines, such as personal computers or servers, can be managed by a network management platform communicating with the machines via a secure channel. The network management platform can access a dependency map indicating a required order for restoration of machines or nodes on a network. The network management platform likewise access a reverse kickstart file for each machine to be automatically restored in order to ensure proper functioning of the network, and extract a current configuration of that machine for purposes of restoring the overall network. | 09-02-2010 |
20100220585 | Systems and Methods for Seamless Communications Recovery and Backup - A recovery network may provide communication recovery and backup services to an organization. The recovery network may be communicatively coupled to the existing communication infrastructure of an organization via one or more alternative communication paths. The alternative communication paths may couple the recovery network to the organization independently of a public communication network. Upon activation of recovery services, the recovery network may receive communication requests directed to the organization from the public communication network. The recovery network may service one or more of the requests using one or more of the alternative communication paths. Similarly, the recovery network may service outbound communication requests originating at the organization over an alternative communication path. Communication requests may be backed up (e.g., within a voicemail or other backup system) until an alternative path or communication network becomes available and/or may be redirected to other addresses within the public communication network. | 09-02-2010 |
20100226243 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTICAST TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention provides a method and apparatus for multicast transmission of a transmitting station in a wireless network. The method according to the present invention transmits a plurality of data packets to a plurality of receiving stations, receives information on loss of the plurality of the data packets from at least one of the plurality of the receiving stations, codes the plurality of the data packets into a single coded data packet based on the information on the loss of the plurality of the data packets and transmits an error control frame including the coded data packet to the plurality of the receiving stations. Therefore, when an error occurs at a data packet that a transmitting station transmits to a plurality of receiving stations by a multicast transmission, a number of retransmission of the data packet can be reduced. | 09-09-2010 |
20100232286 | FAILURE RECOVERY METHOD, COMPUTER SYSTEM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM RECORDED FAILURE RECOVERY PROGRAM FOR A STREAM DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM - Provided is a failure recovery method for switching to a standby system if a failure occurs in an active system, which allows reduction of loads on the standby system and a network. A computer system, which receives data to which timestamp information is appended in a chronological order and processes the received data by registered queries, includes the active system for processing the received data and the standby system for processing the received data instead of the active system upon occurrence of a failure. The active system processes the received data by the respective queries according to a predefined sequence, and transmits results obtained from the received data by the respective queries to the standby system as intermediate data on a query basis at a predetermined timing. The standby system restores the data by processing the received data and the intermediate data if a failure occurs in the active system. | 09-16-2010 |
20100238788 | Connection verification for MPLS label switched paths and pseudowires - In one embodiment, a connection verification (CV) message is initiated from an initiating maintenance end point (MEP) for an MPLS LSP, the CV message carried in a packet having a time-to-live (TTL) value of 1. Each maintenance intermediate point (MIP) along the MPLS LSP receives the packet and decrements the TTL, and in response to determining that the TTL equals 0, examines a payload of the packet to determine that the packet carries the CV message. The MIP may then append its MIP ID to a route record field of the payload having any previous MIP IDs of upstream MIPs, and forwards the CV message downstream along the MPLS LSP in a packet having a TTL value of 1. The end MEP receives the CV message, and sends a CV reply having the route record field with MIP IDs and an end MEP ID to the initiating MEP. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238789 | ERROR RECOVERY IN AN AUDIO-VIDEO MULTIPOINT CONTROL COMPONENT - Architecture for enabling a communications endpoint to quickly recover from a packet loss, reducing duration of a signal dropout. A communications component sends a downlink of dependency-structured signals, such as audio and/or video signals using compressed frames between key frames. A multipoint control component (MCC) is located between the communications component and multiple endpoints, and distributes the downlink to the multiple endpoints. A frame caching component caches a key frame of the downlink. If a key frame is lost at one of the endpoints, the endpoint sends a packet loss report to the frame caching component. The key frame is resent from the frame caching component to the endpoint in response to the key frame loss. In this way, the frame caching component can respond to specific frame loss situations on any of the endpoints, without interfering with the performance on the other endpoints. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238790 | METHOD FOR QUICK MAP RECOVERY IN CASE OF ERROR IN MOCA - A method comprises receiving a predetermined length of information, the information including a first MAC Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) being of variable length and including at least one Sub-MPDU; independently decoding the first Sub-MPDU and a plurality of additional portions of the received information, each portion having a length equal to the length of one Sub-MPDU; processing data from the first Sub-MPDU; and determining from the processed data how many of the other decoded portions constitute Sub-MPDUs of the received MPDU. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238791 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT EXTENSIONS FOR AUTOMATED ACTIVATION OF SERVICES THROUGH ASSOCIATION OF SERVICE RELATED ATTRIBUTES - The present disclosure provides systems and methods for Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) extensions to provide a CFM messaging mechanism for support of information exchange and the like, in addition to end-to-end connectivity and fault management. In an exemplary embodiment, the present invention utilizes CFM extensions to provide Pseudowire (PW) MAC addressing. Here, the present invention can enable the exchanging of MAC addresses and other attributes for PDH pseudowire transport. Advantageously, this avoids involving the OSS/EMS/NMS in pre-provisioning these necessary but arbitrary attributes across the network elements supporting a pseudowire service. Also, the present invention can be extended to support numerous other applications involving sharing of attributes between nodes over the extensions provided herein. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238792 | INFORMATION ACQUISITION SYSTEM, TRANSMIT APPARATUS, DATA OBTAINING APPARATUS, TRANSMISSION METHOD, AND DATA OBTAINING METHOD - A data obtaining apparatus includes an obtaining section configured to obtain data units from data transmitted from a transmit apparatus through a network, including a first data containing video or audio data and a second data containing quality influence information of the first data, a determination section configured to determine whether the first data has been lost during transmission, a detection section configured to detect, when the first data has been lost, the second data transmitted before the lost first data and the second data transmitted after the lost first data, from the obtained data units, and an extraction section configured to extract the quality influence information from the detected second data. And, an information acquisition system including the data obtaining apparatus and the transmit apparatus is provided. | 09-23-2010 |
20100238793 | Methods And Apparatus For Re-Establishing Communication For Wireless Communication For A Wireless Communication Device After A Communication Loss In A Wireless Communication Network - In one illustrative example, a technique in a server to facilitate a re-establishing of communication over a data connection between an application server and a wireless communication device which communicates via a base station of a wireless communication network is described. In response to a communication loss between the wireless device and the wireless network which causes the data connection to be terminated, the server receives from the application server a plurality of connection requests which are intended for receipt by the wireless device for re-establishing the data connection. The server operates to limit the number or a rate of the connection requests allowed to pass from the server to the base station of the wireless network during the communication loss between the wireless device and the wireless network. | 09-23-2010 |
20100246380 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE AND INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS - A communication control device includes: a first processing unit that converts an electrical signal received by a communication channel into digital data and outputs the digital data, and in a second operation mode in which an amount of power supplied to the communication control device is lower than in a first operation mode, outputs a notification signal upon receiving an electrical signal indicating an arrival of packet data; a clock controller that, in the second operation mode, initiates supplying a clock signal upon receiving the notification signal; and a second processing unit that (i) has a receiving unit that extracts packet data from the digital data and outputs the extracted packet data, and (ii) in the second operation mode, stops receiving packet data during a time that the clock signal is not supplied, and upon reception of the clock signal, starts receiving packet data using the received clock signal. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246381 | METHOD FOR PREVENTING OVERLOAD IN MOBILE TELEPHONE NETWORKS BY USING 'ALWAYS-ON' IN THE CASE OF A CALL FROM A MOBILE TELEPHONE - The invention relates to a method for preventing overload in telecommunications networks with IMS by always-on for a call generated by a user, in which process said user makes a PDP Context request and a GGSN of said network provides a free IP address to him or her and the PDP Context becomes active; and wherein an S-CSCF of the network creates a record in which an association between said IP address and a characteristic identity of the IMS network is included. | 09-30-2010 |
20100246382 | METHOD FOR REPARING AN ERROR DEPENDING ON A RADIO BEARER TYPE - A method of re-establishing a radio bearer in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of re-establishing a radio bearer of a user equipment in a wireless communication system comprises establishing a radio bearer; identifying whether an error has occurred in the radio bearer; and selectively re-establishing the radio bearer or all radio bearers of the user equipment in accordance with a type of the radio bearer if the error has occurred in the radio bearer. | 09-30-2010 |
20100254254 | PROCESS ACTIVENESS CHECK - Described herein are techniques for dynamically monitoring process activeness of processes running on a computing node. Problems affecting processes to serve their designated functions on the computing node can be relatively quickly detected and dealt with, thereby making restoring process activeness on the computing node much more quickly than otherwise. | 10-07-2010 |
20100254255 | REDUNDANCY SUPPORT FOR NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION (NAT) - Stateful failover redundancy support is provided for network address translation (NAT). A master NAT device is backed-up with at least one back-up NAT device. Existing sessions are synchronized between the two NAT devices, such as via a dedicated link between them. In the event of a failover where the master NAT device is unable to perform its NAT functions, ownership of Internet protocol (IP) addresses is transferred from the master NAT device to the back-up NAT device. The back-up NAT device, which is now owner of the IP addresses, assumes the NAT functionality associated with these IP addresses and continues the existing sessions, as well as processing new sessions. | 10-07-2010 |
20100260037 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GUIDING PACKET DATA PROTOCOL ACTIVATION - The invention discloses a method and system for guiding a packet data protocol activation. The method includes determining whether a packet data protocol is activated and if the determination result indicates that the packet data protocol is not activated because of including a wrong service access point name, analyzing service access point name information causing the packet data protocol not activated; introducing in an associating database for associating service access point name reason information causing the packet data protocol not activated and a guide information for properly setting the service access point name; inquiring the associating database based on the service access point name reason information obtained by the analyzing and obtaining the guide information for guiding a user to properly set the service access point name; and transmitting the guide information for guiding the user to properly set the service access point name to the user side. According to the method and system of the invention, the guide information may be generated automatically before the activation of the protocol to thereby reduce the maintenance workload for these functions and to thereby properly guide the user to have the related services provisioned and accessed. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260038 | METHODS AND DEVICES FOR RESTORING SESSION STATE - Methods, systems and devices are provided for restoring a multiple call session. A communication terminal can restore a multiple call session after a fault. A network interface can couple the terminal to a network including multiple access terminals associated with the multiple call session. A request for a state of the multiple call session can be transmitted and received by a server in the network. A response including the state can be received. The multiple call session can be restored based on the state of the multiple call session and other information. | 10-14-2010 |
20100260039 | NETWORK CONNECTOR - A network connector includes an electronically insulative housing having first and second connection ports arranged in the front side thereof, an adapter circuit board mounted in the electrically insulative housing and having first and second conducting terminals respectively connected to the first and second connection ports, a filter module installed in the adapter circuit board and electrically connected to the adapter circuit board, and an automatic diversion device installed in the adapter circuit board and having a signal diversion component electrically connected to the first and second conducting terminals, the filter module and an external power input device in such a manner that when the external power input device fails, the automatic diversion device is turned into a close-circuit status, for enabling inputted WAN signals to be directly transmitted from the first connection port to the second connection port for output to avoid signal interruption. | 10-14-2010 |
20100265815 | Method for Transferring Data - In one embodiment of the present invention, a method is disclosed for transferring data, in particular between a rail vehicle and a control centre. According to one embodiment of the invention, a broadband transfer path is automatically activated for the period of time that the transfer path is available and the previous transfer path is deactivated. According to another example embodiment specific to the present invention, another transfer path is automatically activated if the other transfer path malfunctions. | 10-21-2010 |
20100271932 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR COMPENSATING FOR PHASE ERROR IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for compensating for a phase error in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a reception modem, a transmission modem, a Common Phase Error (CPE) compensator, a first channel estimator, a phase compensator, and a second channel estimator. The reception modem demodulates and decodes a signal received. The transmission modem encodes and modulates a signal for transmission. The CPE compensator compensates for phase errors of at least two symbols constituting a signal. The first channel estimator estimates channels for respective bursts. The phase compensator compares phases for the channels for the respective bursts with each other and compensates for a phase difference between at least two bursts. The second channel estimator estimates an interference channel. | 10-28-2010 |
20100278036 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR USER COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION - A wireless network system and corresponding methodologiesthat operates in a user cooperative communication system is provided. In operation, the system either combines packets transmitted from a direct channel with packets transmitted from and a relay channel, or uses erroneously relayed packets to assist decoding a direct packet. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278037 | Method of Handling Identity Confusion and Related Communication Device - A method of handling identity confusion for a network in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes receiving from a first mobile device a radio resource control (RRC) connection reestablishment request message including a physical cell identity corresponding to a source cell of the first mobile device, and sending a RRC connection reestablishment reject message in response to the RRC connection reestablishment request message and a RRC connection release message according to a cell-level identity of the mobile device corresponding to the source cell. | 11-04-2010 |
20100278038 | Method and Apparatus for Mitigating Cell Outage - Cell outage within a wireless communication network is automatically mitigated. This way, neither manual operator intervention nor manual base station reconfiguration is needed to cover problematic cells. Quality of wireless services provided by the network improves when cell outage is automatically mitigated. In one embodiment, cell outage is mitigated in a wireless communication network by automatically communicating cell status messages between radio base stations or within a node that controls the radio base stations ( | 11-04-2010 |
20100284267 | CALL SET-UP IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A call set-up method is described for use in a communication network, in particular a third generation mobile communication network. First, it is attempted to set-up a call between a call originator and a call destination using a communication connection of a first type, for example Voice over IP. In case that it is determined that the call cannot be set-up using the communication connection of the first type, a node in the communication network sets up the call to both the call originator and the call destination using a communication connection of a second type, for example Circuit Switched Adaptive Multi Rate voice call. | 11-11-2010 |
20100290335 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCALLY IMPLEMENTING PORT SELECTION VIA SYNCHRONIZED PORT STATE DATABASES MAINTAINED BY THE FORWARDING PLANE OF A NETWORK ELEMENT - A method, apparatus and computer program product for implementing port selection via synchronized port state databases maintained by the forwarding plane of a network element is presented. Each Forwarding Data Unit (FDU) within the forwarding plane of the network element maintains a respective port state database, each port state database containing a synchronized view of the port state for all ports within the network element. A port selection process is performed by each port state database upon request of its associated FDU, to identify an available port in an UP state associated with a Multi-Link Trunk (MLT) to enable fast reroute between ports associated with the MLT in the event of port failure. The process returns an identified port to the FDU for use by the FDU to forward the packet. | 11-18-2010 |
20100296387 | SECURITY SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION WITHIN A VEHICLE - A method for providing wireless communications between nodes of a vehicle includes providing a plurality of frequency channels on which the nodes of a first vehicle may wirelessly communicate. Wireless communication with a second vehicle adjacent to the first vehicle includes assigning a first of the frequency channels to the first vehicle for intra-vehicle transmissions within the first vehicle, and a second of the frequency channels to the second vehicle for intra-vehicle transmissions within the second vehicle. The first vehicle is prohibited from using the second frequency channel and the second vehicle is prohibited from using the first frequency channel. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296388 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system includes: a base station; and a mobile terminal for sequentially sending a plurality of data packets at a designated data transfer rate and information of velocity of the mobile terminal to the base station; the base station including: a receiver for receiving the data packet and the velocity information; a transmitter for transmitting a request to the mobile terminal to resend a data packet upon detection of an error in the data packet previously received; and a reply controller for setting number of requests to be repetitively sent in accordance with the velocity information and, after the number of requests have been sent, sending command to change the designated data transfer rate to the mobile terminal. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296389 | FAILURE INDICATION FOR ONE OR MORE CARRIERS IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating a loss of channel quality on a component carrier of a plurality of component carriers. A UE can monitor configured component carriers to determine channel qualities associated therewith. The UE can transmit carrier quality information that includes the channel qualities of the plurality of component carriers. In addition, the UE can identify a component carrier experiencing a loss of channel quality and notify a base station of the component carrier with poor channel conditions. In one aspect, the UE can incorporate additional information into a scheduling request. In addition, the UE can generate a CQI report that contains the carrier quality information. Further, the base station, when a loss of channel quality occurs, can retry transmission on different carriers. Moreover, the base station can employ information provided by the UE when selecting a component carrier for a transmission. | 11-25-2010 |
20100296390 | FAULT TOLERANCE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A network includes a plurality of logical access entities. Each access entity includes two or more communication interfaces. The network further includes a plurality of logical node entities. Each logical node entity includes two or more communication interfaces that are configured to wirelessly communicate in a redundant manner with any of the logical access entities. In an embodiment, a communication degradation in the network is assessed, and the network is configured as a function of that assessment to provide fault tolerance within the network. | 11-25-2010 |
20100302932 | LAC DEVICE AND FAILOVER METHOD - In an LAC device, if switching occurs to an active system of redundant control section, the failover is implemented by learning Ns (sequence number) and Nr (receive acknowledgement response number) included in a control message received from an LNS device after switching, and sending a ZLB-ACK message using this Ns and Nr. | 12-02-2010 |
20100309776 | Allocating Bandwidth in a Resilient Packet Ring Network by P Controller - Implementations and techniques for allocating bandwidth in a resilient packet ring network by a P-type controller are generally disclosed. | 12-09-2010 |
20100315941 | MAINTAINING TIME-DIVISION MULTIPLEXING OVER PSEUDOWIRE CONNECTIONS DURING NETWORK OUTAGES - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a provider edge node and a related method. The provider edge node may include a receiver that receives at least one packet transmitted over a TDM pseudowire using a structure-agnostic transmission mechanism. The provider edge node may also include a physical interface configured to output frames to a corresponding customer edge (CE) device and a machine-readable storage medium that stores a TDM framing type corresponding to the physical interface. Finally, the provider edge node may include a circuit emulation engine that, during periods in which a network error has occurred, transmits a plurality of frames to the CE device over the physical interface. A TDM data payload of each frame may include an idle pattern, while a group of framing bits of the plurality of frames may define a framing pattern corresponding to the TDM framing type stored for the physical interface. | 12-16-2010 |
20100315942 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR MONITORING A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Disclosed herein is a condition responsive device for connection with a communication system. The device includes a receiver configured to receive a physical parameter status signal from a connector of the communication system, the physical parameter status signal containing data pertaining to a condition of the connector connection. The device further includes a processing circuit configured to analyze the data to determine whether a communications signal adjustment is appropriate, wherein the processing circuit is configured to initiate a communications signal adjustment in the communication system if the processing circuit determines that adjustment is appropriate, based on a predetermined set of parameters. | 12-16-2010 |
20100322067 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO FACILIATE REESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Methods, apparatuses, and computer program products are disclosed that facilitate reestablishing a communication between a wireless terminal and a network. These embodiments include transmitting a reestablishment request from a wireless terminal to a network node via a source carrier. A reestablishment command is then received by the wireless terminal, which includes configuration data associated with at least one target carrier. A radio resource connection between the wireless terminal and the network is then reestablished via the at least one target carrier. | 12-23-2010 |
20100329108 | Method And System For Jitter And Frame Balance And/Or Rebalance For EEE Refresh Cycles - Ethernet network link partners may be configured for operation in a low power mode. The link partners may generate new frames and/or signals and/or may modify characteristics of existing frames and/or signals to be communicated via one or more channels of an Ethernet link during the low power mode. The new and/or modified frames and/or signals may be utilized as refresh frames and/or signals to control communication during low power mode and/or to enable refresh and/or synchronization of the link partners. The new and/or modified frames and/or signals may be generated and/or modified based on a desired frequency distribution and/or spectral density. New and/or modified frames and/or signals may comprise jitter, random and/or pseudo random bit patterns and/or varied bit patterns and/or energy levels. Data packets and/or active idle symbols may be forced during low power mode to mitigate undesired periodic energy. | 12-30-2010 |
20100329109 | REDUNDANT PSEUDOWIRES FOR BORDER GATEWAY PATROL-BASED VIRTUAL PRIVATE LOCAL AREA NETWORK SERVICE MULTI-HOMING ENVIRONMENTS - A method performed by a provider edge device includes generating pseudo-wire tables based on virtual private local area network service advertisements from other provider edge devices, where the provider edge device services customer edge devices, and establishing pseudo-wires with respect to the other provider edge devices, based on the pseudo-wire tables, where the pseudo-wires include an active pseudo-wire and at least one standby pseudo-wire with respect to each of the other provider edge devices. The method also includes generating and advertising VPLS advertisement to the other provider edge devices, detecting a communication link failure associated with one of the customer edge devices in which the provider edge device services, and determining whether the at least one standby pseudo-wire needs to be utilized because of the communication link failure. | 12-30-2010 |
20110013507 | Smart Protection Escalation Mechanism Prevention - Techniques are provided for detecting at a controller associated with a physical layer of a network an occurrence of a failure within the physical layer of the network. In response to detecting the failure, the controller sends messages to at least first and second nodes in a transport layer of the network, where the messages are configured to indicate normal operations in the physical layer so as to prevent execution of transport layer protection processes for a period of time. | 01-20-2011 |
20110019530 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS UTILIZING SHARED SCALABLE RESOURCES - Aspects of a method and system for network communications utilizing shared scalable resources are provided. In this regard, networking state information for one or more of a plurality of communication devices may be communicated to a network management device. The network management device may be operable to aggregate the networking state information. The plurality of communication devices may receive aggregated networking state information from the network management device. The plurality of communication devices may route packets based on the received aggregated networking state information. The network management device may be dynamically or manually selected from the plurality of communication devices. The plurality of communication devices may be associated with a sharing domain, and one or more communication devices may be dynamically added to and/or removed from the sharing domain. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019531 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAULT TOLERANCE AND RESILIENCE FOR VIRTUALIZED MACHINES IN A NETWORK - Hypervisor functions, which may control operations of one or more virtual machines, may be distributed across a plurality of network devices. State information may be stored for the virtual machines on network devices for fault tolerance and resilience. The virtual machines may retrieve stored state information to recover from a fault. The hypervisor may control the storage of the state information. Resources of the network devices may be allocated for fault tolerance and resilience of the virtual machines based on network device parameters, which may include storage capacity, processor usage, access time, communication bandwidth, and/or latency. The state information may include program content, cache content, memory content, and/or register content information, may be stored on a continuous, periodic, or an aperiodic basis, and may be shared among the network devices to enable the processing of data by the virtual machines when a fault occurs, and may be incrementally updated. | 01-27-2011 |
20110019532 | Apparatus and Method for Handling Radio Link Failure in Wireless Communication System - A method and apparatus of handling a radio link failure in a wireless communication system is provided. Upon detecting a radio link failure in a Radio Resource Control (RRC) connected state, a user equipment starts a radio link failure timer of which timer value is selected among at least one timer value for at least one RB. The user equipment attempts a RRC connection re-establishment while the radio link failure timer is running, and transitions to a RRC idle state when the radio link failure timer is expired. | 01-27-2011 |
20110038251 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESTORATION IN A MULTIMEDIA IP NETWORK - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and computer readable media for modifying IP backbone link weights such that multicast traffic and unicast traffic will not travel on a same path between nodes. The method comprises assigning link weights to nodes within an IP backbone such that multicast forwarding paths and unicast forwarding paths are failure disjoint, and delivering undelivered multicast packets using IP unicast encapsulation to the loopback address of next hop router on a multicast tree upon link/interface failure. | 02-17-2011 |
20110038252 | DOUBLE LINKED WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK BEING CAPABLE OF BIDIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATION AND METHOD THEREOF - Provided are a double linked wireless sensor network capable of performing bidirectional communication and a method of transmitting and receiving data. In each of nodes constituting the wireless sensor network, an active duration and an inactive duration are alternately repeated, and the active duration is configured to include an upstream duration, an intermission duration, and a downstream duration. Each of the downstream duration and the upstream duration is configured to sequentially include a second receive slot, a second receive processing slot, a first receive slot, a first receive processing slot, a transmit slot, a transmit processing slot, a first acknowledge slot, a first acknowledge processing slot, a second acknowledge slot, and a second acknowledge processing slot, and wherein bidirectional communication can be performed between the sink node and the terminal node in a single period of the active duration. In the wireless sensor network, a transmit processing duration TXP is maintained in a receiving mode capable of receiving data from other nodes, so that a new node can be easily joined as a terminal node or an intermediate node. In addition, in the wireless sensor network, each of the upstream duration and the downstream duration is provided with consecutive two receiving durations, so that, although links to consecutive two nodes are disconnected, it is possible to simply recover the links. | 02-17-2011 |
20110044162 | METHOD OF FLUSHING FILTERING DATABASE IN ETHERNET RING NETWORK - A method in which a node of an Ethernet ring network flushes a filtering database includes operating a timer for delaying flushing of the filtering database when a topology of the ring network is changed, and flushing the filtering database when the timer is terminated. A method in which a node of an Ethernet ring network flushes a filtering database includes flushing the filtering database after receiving a protection switching frame that requests flushing of the filtering database, and forwarding a data frame in a queue state at a node and then forwarding the protection switching frame to an adjacent node. A method in which a node of an Ethernet ring network flushes a filtering database includes flushing the filtering database after receiving a protection switching frame that requests flushing of the filtering database, and deleting a data frame in a queue state at the node. | 02-24-2011 |
20110051594 | System and Method for Providing Network Resiliency - The invention is directed toward an automated system and process to provide resiliency to a network infrastructure where traditional established methods tend to fail. The system analyzes the underlying physical characteristics of the network topology to identify physically diverse backup routing paths among nodes in the network. The system takes as input the number of diverse paths desired and a characteristic(s) used to choose the most desirable paths, such as delay, flow, or cost. The invention searches for multiple solutions for the selected number of diverse paths within the network. | 03-03-2011 |
20110069606 | COMMUNICATION NODE AND METHOD OF PROCESSING COMMUNICATION FAULT THEREOF - A communication node detects a communication fault thereof, and when a communication fault is detected, the communication node determines whether the communication node is included in a transmission path of a data packet with reference to a routing table and transmits the stored communication fault notification message to peripheral communication nodes. | 03-24-2011 |
20110075549 | FAST PROTECTION PATH ACTIVATION USING CONTROL PLANE MESSAGES - A method, performed in a network that includes a group of nodes, includes identifying a path through a set of the nodes, where each node, in the set of nodes, has a data plane and a control plane; establishing a control plane tunnel, associated with the path, within the control plane of the nodes in the set of nodes; establishing a data plane tunnel, associated with the path, within the data plane of the nodes in the set of nodes, where the data plane tunnel is associated with the control plane tunnel and established through the same set of nodes; and transmitting a control message through the control plane tunnel to change a state of the data plane tunnel. | 03-31-2011 |
20110080825 | Method and Apparatus for Radio Link Failure Recovery in a Telecommunication System - The teachings presented herein enable a user terminal to perform a fast recovery from a radio link failure. In one aspect, the improvement in recovery time is achieved by commanding or otherwise causing the user terminal to perform radio link failure (RLF) recovery at a cell that is known to possess the user context, while considering that this cell should yield good radio conditions (if not the best) to the user terminal. A cell may be predefined for use by the user terminal in recovering its radio connection. Based on providing signal strength thresholds to the user terminal, for use in determining whether to use a predefined cell for reconnecting to the network, the user terminal attempts RLF recovery first in the predefined cell. By providing user context to the predefined cell in advance of a recovery attempt by the user terminal, the time for recovery is lessened. Note that the user terminal also may infer which cells are preferred. | 04-07-2011 |
20110085438 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATING MULTIPLE DATA SIGNALS OVER A SINGLE UNIDIRECTIONAL ISOLATION COMPONENT - Method and system for serially sending data signals captured from multiple sources through a single unidirectional isolation component. Data signals from respective multiple sources are captured in parallel. Such captured data signals are stored in respective storages. The stored data signals are transferred, in serial, from the storages to a single unidirectional isolation component. Multiple concurrent processes for parallel data signal capture and serial data signal transfer via a single unidirectional isolation component are implemented so that the sampling effect on a first of the multiple processes is minimized. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085439 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SWITCHING COMMUNICATIONS TRAFFIC IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In current hardware forwarding architectures, in which subscriber profiles are distributed across multiple cards in the network, lack of subscriber knowledge leads to loss of bandwidth on fabric links connecting multiple cards in a chassis, loss of device processing cycles, and loss of quality of service knowledge because the traffic is not classified. An example embodiment of the present invention employs a subscriber-aware switch programmed with a subscriber table that maps subscriber traffic to an “anchor” line card with the subscriber's profile. The subscriber table allows for traffic to reach the anchor line card directly, avoiding unnecessary hops and loss of traffic information. As a result, line card, fabric, and other resources are used efficiently, thereby enabling a gateway or other network node to support high traffic rate (e.g., 100 Gbps) network models. | 04-14-2011 |
20110085440 | Reverse Notification Tree for Data Networks - Recovery time upon the failure of a link or switching system in an asynchronous data network can be minimized if downstream data switches provide upstream messages indicating to upstream switching system that the downstream traffic arrived in tact and was properly handled. Upon this loss or failure of the upstream status message to an upstream switching system, an upstream switching system can reroute data traffic around a failed link or failed switch with a minimal amount of lost data. The upstream status message is conveyed from a downstream switching system to an upstream switching system via a reverse notification tree data pathway. | 04-14-2011 |
20110103220 | HIGH CAPACITY ROUTER HAVING REDUNDANT COMPONENTS - A router includes multiple routing engines. If the active routing engine fails, a backup one of the routing engines detects the failure and assumes the role of active routing engine. A redundancy controller circuit, connected to the multiple routing engines, facilitates the selection and switching of the routing engines. Portions of the packet forwarding engine, in addition to the routing engine, may be redundantly implemented. The active routing engine controls the selection of the redundant portion of the packet forwarding engine. | 05-05-2011 |
20110103221 | METHOD FOR HANDLING RADIO LINK FAILURE IN MUTIPLE CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of handling a radio link failure in a multiple-carrier system performed by a user equipment (UE) is provided. The method includes transmitting, to a base station (BS), a first message indicating a first radio link problem (RLP) in a first carrier when the first RLP is detected, transmitting, to the BS, a second message indicating a second RLP in a second carrier when the second RLP is detected, and transmitting, to the BS, a final message requesting a connection re-establishment with the BS. By using a plurality of different timers on CCs configured for one UE, the meaning of RLF in a multiple-carrier system for triggering radio connection re-establishment procedure is clarified and defined in detail. | 05-05-2011 |
20110110220 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REMOVING UNWANTED INFORMATION FROM CAPTURED DATA PACKETS - Data packets received at network traffic distribution device are analyzed to determine whether they include unwanted information, and, if so, the network traffic distribution device removes the unwanted information and then transmits the data packets, absent the unwanted information, to an assigned egress port (e.g., a monitor port communicatively coupled to a monitoring device). The flow of data packets may be received at the network traffic distribution device from a mirror port resident on a source of the captured data packets and/or a traffic capture point located along a communication link between two communicating devices within a network. In addition to analyzing the data packets and removing unwanted information therefrom, the network traffic distribution device may perform additional operations on the data packets as well. | 05-12-2011 |
20110116362 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HITLESS FAILOVER IN NETWORKING SYSTEMS USING SINGLE DATABASE - A device includes a master control card that performs control plane processing, a backup control card, where the backup control card takes over control plane processing if the master control card goes out of service, and a database card that connects to the master control card and the backup control card, where the database control card stores information relating to control plane processing. A method of achieving hitless failover in a network element includes detecting that a master control card of the network element has gone out of service, designating the backup control card as a new master control card of the network element, establishing communication with a database card of the network element, and retrieving protocol states information from the database card. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116363 | ALARM INDICATION AND SUPPRESSION (AIS) MECHANISM IN AN ETHERNET OAM NETWORK - A system and method for propagating fault information in an Ethernet OAM network having multiple levels of OAM domains. An Alarm Indication and Suppression (AIS) frame is generated by a Maintenance Intermediate Point (MIP) node upon detecting a fault condition in a first OAM domain, which is transmitted to one or more Maintenance End Points (MEPs) of the first OAM domain. Upon receiving the AIS frames, the MEP nodes are operable generate another AIS frame for propagating to an adjacent higher level second OAM domain. Responsive to the AIS frame from the lower level first OAM domain, any alarms caused in the second OAM domain due to the fault condition in the first OAM domain are suppressed. | 05-19-2011 |
20110116364 | Method for processing collision between random access procedure and measurement gap - A method for processing a collision between a random access procedure and a measurement gap, which involves a terminal and a base station, and the terminal is configured with a measurement gap; the method includes: when the random access procedure is a contention-based random access procedure, the terminal cancels the measurement gap if a random access response window or the operating time of a contention resolution timer has an overlap with the measurement gap. The concrete solution, that the priority of the random access procedure is higher than that of the measurement gap in the method provided by the present invention, improves the reliability of the random access procedure, reduces failure probability of the random access procedure, reduces the delay of the random access procedure, and effectively utilizes a measurement gap. | 05-19-2011 |
20110122761 | KPI Driven High Availability Method and apparatus for UMTS radio access networks - An apparatus in one example, comprising a network node that receives telecommunications network measurements where the network node calculates key performance indicator (KPI) measurements from the network measurements, and the network node performs system recovery actions based on the calculated KPI measurements. | 05-26-2011 |
20110128843 | FAILURE RECOVERY IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORK - A method is provided for facilitating recovery from the failure of a P-CSCF within an IP multimedia Subsystem network. A gateway, such as a GGSN, monitors signals arriving at the gateway from the P-CSCF and provides an indication if the monitored signals become unacceptable, for example because of an interruption in the signals. The gateway responds by signalling the unavailability of the P-CSCF to user equipment, which was associated with the P-CSCF during a previous registration with the IMS network. In response, for example, the user equipment affected by the failure may request re-registration with the IMS network using a different available P-CSCF. | 06-02-2011 |
20110134748 | Bulk Data Transport in a Network - A network is configured to utilize available bandwidth to conduct bulk data transfers without substantially affecting the successful transmission of time-sensitive traffic in the network. In order to avoid this interference, the packets carrying data for bulk data transfers are associated with a low priority class such that the routers of the network will preferentially drop these packets over packets associated with the normal traffic of the network. As such, when the normal traffic peaks or there are link failures or equipment failures, the normal traffic is preferentially transmitted over the bulk-transfer traffic and thus the bulk-transfer traffic dynamically adapts to changes in the available bandwidth of the network. Further, to reduce the impact of dropped packets for the bulk-transfer traffic, the packets of the bulk-transfer traffic are encoded at or near the source component using a loss-resistant transport protocol so that the dropped packets can be reproduced at a downstream link. | 06-09-2011 |
20110141877 | Method of simple and efficient failure resilient load balancing - A resilient load balancing method uses fixed paths and a fixed path-splitting strategy to enable ingress routers to efficiently reroute traffic after a failure. An off-line management system computes a set of fixed paths and a set of splitting ratios for routing demand from ingress routers to egress routers, with sufficient capacity to meet demands under each failure scenario. That data is then used by the ingress router to reroute demand after observing a failure. | 06-16-2011 |
20110141878 | ACK/NACK TRANSMISSION ON PUCCH IN LTE-ATDD WITH NXPDCCH STRUCTURE - Systems and methods are provided for enabling different “bundling” methods for downlink transmissions and provide different interpretations of the acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement bit. A user equipment is configured so that it commonly acknowledges all downlink transmission time intervals within a bundle so that if one packet is determined to be erroneous, all packets in that bundle will be retransmitted. Additionally, the systems and methods are implemented by allowing an interpretation to be applied to the uplink acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement field such that the user equipment is able to divide bundled downlink packets into smaller windows in Long Term Evolution (LTE) Release 8 time division duplex (TDD) mode. In LTE Advanced (LTE-A) TDD mode, various embodiments provide bundling within the time domain, within the frequency domain, and within a hybrid time-frequency domain. Furthermore, enhanced channel selection methods are also provided in support of the above-mentioned bundling methods in accordance with various embodiments. | 06-16-2011 |
20110149720 | SYSTEM FOR AND METHOD OF PERFORMING RESIDENTIAL GATEWAY DIAGNOSTICS AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS - A system for and method of system for performing residential gateway diagnostics and corrective actions is presented. In one exemplary embodiment, the method may comprise running one or more diagnostic tests on a residential gateway using a module of the residential gateway, storing a diagnostic test result, analyzing the diagnostic test result, and performing one or more corrective actions in response to the diagnostic test result. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149721 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO DETECT AND RESTORE FLAPPING CIRCUITS IN IP AGGREGATION NETWORK ENVIRONMENTS - Methods and apparatus to detect and restore flapping circuits in IP aggregation network environments are disclosed herein. An example method for use in maintaining a communication network includes retrieving information related to an operating state of a device associated with a network disturbance; determining whether the information related to the operating state of the device is indicative of a flapping condition; when the operating state information indicates that the flapping condition is present in the network, determining a cause of the flapping condition; when the cause of the flapping condition is a physical cause, selecting a first recovery procedure; and when the cause of the flapping condition is a logical cause, selecting a second recovery procedure different from the first recovery procedure. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149722 | TIME REDUCTION FOR MULTIPLE LINK RECOVERY - Apparatuses, systems, and methods that reduce the amount of time for recovering multiple beam-formed links in a wireless network are disclosed. An embodiment may, e.g., be a mobile computing device with wireless beamforming communications capabilities. Upon establishing links with multiple stations, the mobile computing device may sense that the link quality or strength is degrading for several of the links. The laptop may transmit a single forward-transmission sector sweep (FWD-TXSS) to initiate recovery of the links. The other stations previously linked to the laptop may detect the degradation the links and start monitoring for the single FWD-TXSS. The receiving devices may each perform reverse-transmission sector sweeps (REV-TXSS), in sequence, to reestablish beam-formed links with the laptop without requiring multiple forward-transmission sector sweeps. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149723 | Packet-loss handling for downlink multi-user multiple- input and multiple-output wireless network - Techniques for packet-loss handling for downlink Multi-User Multiple-input and Multiple-Output (DL MU-MIMO) wireless networking environment are described herein. The techniques described herein help define how a wireless access point should behave when faced with a packet-loss situation of a DL transmission burst in a MU-MIMO wireless network. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149724 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is an apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving data. The method includes respectively estimating a carrier frequency offset (CFO) of data packets transmitted during a transmit opportunity (TXOP) period by a unit of a packet; calculating an average CFO of the estimated CFOs estimated during a window period for the data packets; and compensating an estimated CFO of a predetermined data packet to one of the estimated CFO of the predetermined data packet and the average CFO, and restoring the predetermined data packet. | 06-23-2011 |
20110149725 | OPTIMIZED DATA RETRY MECHANISMS FOR EVOLVED HIGH RATE PACKET DATA (EHRPD) - A method for optimizing data retry mechanisms is described. The method includes attempting to originate a data call on an evolved high rate packet data system. The method also includes determining that originating the data call has failed. A type of failure that caused the data call to fail is determined. The frequency of data call origination attempts is reduced based on the type of failure. | 06-23-2011 |
20110158082 | GRID ROUTING APPARATUS AND METHOD - A grid router for routing packets and a network containing the same. The router comprises ingress units (IE), mailbox units (MU), and egress units (EU) connected in a structure of succeeding layers, said layered structure being segregated such that units in a given layer are connected only to a subset of units in a succeeding layer, wherein said grid router comprises a hashing unit for using a hashing function to direct incoming packets through said layers, and wherein said hashing function is configured to reinforce said segregation by directing packets arriving at a given unit in one layer only to units of a corresponding subset in said succeeding layer. | 06-30-2011 |
20110170402 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GENERATING TOPOLOGY TREE - From an observed packet, the hop number, which is the number of nodes that the packet has passed through, and a bottleneck bandwidth, which is a bottleneck for transmitting the packet, are determined so as to detect loss failures. Thereby, the subnet that transmitted the observed packet is located as a node in a topology tree on the basis of the determined hop count and bottleneck bandwidth. When a loss failure, by which the packet is lost, is detected, subnets that are inappropriately arranged are extracted from the arrangement in the topology tree of the loss-failure-detected subnet, and the arrangement of the extracted subnets is modified in order to resolve the inappropriateness. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170403 | Service Movement in Link State Controlled Layer Two Networks - An apparatus comprising a first edge node configured to populate a learned table using a first frame received from a remote node via a second edge node, wherein the learned table comprises a remote node address and a first forwarding address associated with the remote node address, and wherein the first forwarding address is for the second edge node, receive a second frame destined for the remote node, and determine that the second frame should be sent to the second edge node using the learned table, wherein the first edge node is further configured to replace the first forwarding address in the learned table with a second forwarding address when the second edge node fails, and wherein the second forwarding address is for a third edge node. | 07-14-2011 |
20110170404 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention provides a method of operating a first node in a radio communication network to reduce un-expected or undesirable operation of user equipments, the method comprising detecting a fault occurring in the operation of a user equipment that is in communication with said first node; and sending a message to the user equipment indicating an action to be performed to stop or mitigate the fault in said user equipment. | 07-14-2011 |
20110176407 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF RELEASING RESOURCES IN A TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system, method, and node for releasing resources in a telecommunications network. The method begins by a node assigning a resource-Identification (ID) to an internal resource within the node. At least one internal resource is allocated by the node for a specific Packet Data Network (PDN) connection. Next, a first message containing a resource-ID of the allocated internal resource is sent to one or more peer nodes. The peer nodes store the received resource-ID from the first message. When a node determines that a malfunction of the allocated internal resource of the node occurs, the node sends a second message containing the resource-ID of the malfunctioning internal resource to the peer nodes. The peer nodes then tear down the PDN connection. | 07-21-2011 |
20110176408 | NETWORK CODING ENHANCEMENTS - A method performed by a base station is provided. The method includes receiving, at the base station, a signal containing a transmitted first signal including a network coded message and a transmitted second signal including a non-network coded message, where the second signal is transmitted according to at least one transmission parameter. The method further includes receiving, at the base station, the at least one transmission parameter and determining, by the base station, an interference to the transmitted first signal caused by the transmitted second signal, where the interference is determined using the at least one transmission parameter. The method further includes removing the determined interference from the signal to recover the transmitted first signal. | 07-21-2011 |
20110182171 | ADAPTIVE CONTENTION WINDOW IN DISCONTINUOUS WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - A system and method for discontinuous wireless communication. The system and method include estimating a first likelihood of channel collisions at start of a discontinuous channel interval, wherein the estimated likelihood of collision is increased when a transmission failure is detected during a portion of one or more previous channel intervals; setting a size of a contention transmission window at start of a current channel interval, according to the first estimated likelihood of channel collisions; estimating a second likelihood of channel collisions for a next channel interval; and dynamically changing the size of the contention transmission window for the next channel interval, according to the second estimated likelihood of channel collisions. | 07-28-2011 |
20110188370 | Power supply controlling apparatus, power supply controlling system, and non-transitory computer readable recording medium - A power supply controlling apparatus including: plural communication ports that connect to an information processing apparatus via plural communication devices, respectively; a switching portion that switches a setting of at least one of the communication ports so as to connect the at least one of the communication ports to any one of a data input and output device and one of the communication devices; and a transmission portion that, when the switching portion switches the setting of the at least one of the communication ports so as to connect the at least one of the communication ports to the one of the communication devices, and the communication devices are connected to the communication ports, respectively, transmits an e-mail in which an address of each of the communication ports has been described, to the information processing apparatus via the corresponding communication device connected to each of the communication ports. | 08-04-2011 |
20110188371 | METHOD FOR DETECTING A DEFECTIVE NODE - Method for detecting a defective node which is connected to a bus, the node incrementing an internal error counter in a normal operating state when an error is detected, and the node switching to an isolated operating state, in which the node does not exchange any messages via the bus if the internal error counter of the node exceeds a predetermined error threshold value, and the node switching from the isolated operating state to the normal operating state when a condition is fulfilled and that change in state being detected, and the node being detected as being defective if a rate of the detected state changes exceeds an adjustable change rate or a number of detected state changes exceeds an adjustable state change threshold value. | 08-04-2011 |
20110199890 | BROADBAND DATA AND VOICE COMMUNICATIONS OVER WIRELESS AND POWERLINE HYBRID NETWORKS - The present invention provides hybrid access network architecture to provide broadband data, voice and video services over Internet Protocol. The hybrid access network comprises a wireless distribution system which has wireless mesh network nodes acting as wireless repeaters. Each of these wireless repeaters comprises of at least 3 wireless radios. The hybrid access network comprises of plurality of Broadband over Power Line (BPL) nodes, each node consisting of 2 modems and 4 wireless radios. Each of the BPL nodes acts as a repeater. The hybrid access network terminates the wireless traffic with fewer hops and has a very fast low latency BPL backbone of 1-3 milliseconds latency. | 08-18-2011 |
20110205884 | Method and Arrangement for Failure Handling in a Network - A method and arrangement for failure handling in a tree-structured communications network having interconnected edge nodes and switching nodes. VLANs may be established by using spanning trees to provide connectivity in case of a failure in the network. Emitters in the edge nodes periodically broadcast alive messages on the VLANs, and notifiers note the alive messages. A missing alive message indicates a failure on one of the VLANs, and the notifier broadcasts corresponding failure messages on the VLANs. When the alive messages are restored, the notifier broadcasts corresponding repair messages. If a notifier fails to note a failure, one of the edge nodes performs a similar function although somewhat slower. | 08-25-2011 |
20110211439 | QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) ACQUISITION AND PROVISIONING WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, an access network (AN) receives a message configured to prompt a conditional allocation of Quality of Service (QoS) resources to an access terminal (AT). The message can be received from the AT or from an application server (AS) that arbitrates a communication session for the AT. In another embodiment, if the AT determines that a QoS resource request has not yet been granted, the AT waits until the traffic channel (TCH) has been obtained for a communication session before resending the QoS resource request. In another embodiment, if the AT determines to initiate or join a second communication session before a confirmation that QoS resources for a first communication session are relinquished, the AT waits until the confirmation is received before a request for QoS resources for the second communication session is sent. | 09-01-2011 |
20110216645 | CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK PROCEDURE - A CS fallback procedure handles conflict that may arise when handover operations occur during CS fallback. If CS fallback is initiated for an access terminal and handover of that access terminal is then initiated before the CS fallback completes, the target for the handover is informed of the CS fallback so that the target may perform the appropriate CS fallback operations. | 09-08-2011 |
20110228665 | Locally Diagnosing and Troubleshooting Service Issues - A method includes detecting, at a customer premises equipment (CPE) device, a problem associated with a network device. The network device is communicatively coupled to the CPE device via a local area network. For example, the CPE device may include a residential gateway (RG). The method includes determining, at the CPE device, whether the problem associated with the network device is locally correctable. When the CPE device determines that the problem is locally correctable, the method includes initiating a corrective action to resolve the problem. When the CPE device determines that the problem is not locally correctable, the method includes sending data associated with the problem from the CPE device to a network system via a wide area network. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228666 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) COMMUNICATION ON UNLICENSED SPECTRUM - Techniques for establishing and maintaining peer-to-peer (P2P) communication are described. In an aspect, P2P communication on an unlicensed spectrum may be established and maintained with network assistance. In one design, a user equipment (UE) may communicate with a wide area network (WAN) to establish P2P communication with at least one other UE on a first frequency band that is not licensed to the WAN. For example, the UE may receive an assignment of at least one frequency channel in the first frequency band for P2P communication. The UE may then communicate peer-to-peer with the other UE(s) on the at least one frequency channel. The UE may also communicate with the WAN to maintain P2P communication with the other UE(s), e.g., to switch to another frequency channel if necessary. | 09-22-2011 |
20110228667 | ADDRESS REFRESHING METHOD AND DEVICE OF ETHERNET RING NETWORK - The present invention provides an address refreshing method and device of the Ethernet ring network, and the method comprises: when a current node state of each node in the Ethernet ring network is a protection state, if a failure of a first link in the Ethernet ring network disappears, transmitting a No Request (NR) protocol message indicating that the link failure disappears through node(s) connected with the first link; a node in the Ethernet ring network which receives the NR protocol message switching the node state of the node into a pending state; and when the current node state of each node in the Ethernet ring network is the pending state, if a link failure appears in the Ethernet ring network, transmitting a link failure notification (SF) protocol message through node(s) connected with the failed link; a node in the Ethernet ring network which receives the SF protocol message switching the node state of the node into the protection state, and refreshing an address forwarding table according to address refreshing information carried in the SF protocol message. | 09-22-2011 |
20110242965 | Automatic connection re-establishment using escape carrier - In one exemplary aspect of this invention a method includes receiving at a user equipment from a wide area network access node information identifying at least one predetermined radio frequency carrier; initiating, in response to a presence of an interferer on a radio frequency carrier that is being used for a current connection between the user equipment and the network access node, a connection re-establishment procedure, where the interferer has the potential to cause a radio link failure of the current connection on the radio frequency carrier; and transmitting a connection re-establishment request to the network access node on the predetermined radio frequency carrier. The interferer can be a closed subscriber group network access node that the user equipment is not authorized to gain access to. | 10-06-2011 |
20110242966 | Method And Apparatus For Delivering Error-Critical Traffic Through A Packet-Switched Network - The present invention relates to a method for delivering error-critical traffic through a packet-switched network, and comprising the steps of:
| 10-06-2011 |
20110249550 | UPLINK TIME SYNCHRONIZATION IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for uplink time synchronization in a communication system includes a first step | 10-13-2011 |
20110255396 | SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATICALLY RESETTING AN ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR NETWORK ENABLED EQUIPMENT - A system for automatically resetting an electrical connection for selected equipment for a specific period of time and a specific number of attempts using electrical inputs and outputs connected to one or more than one controllable circuit breaker and at least one microprocessor that monitors the network connection. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255397 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF IMPROVING THE QUALITY OF VOIP COMMUNICATIONS - Methods of addressing problems in a voice over Internet protocol (VOIP) telephony system include collecting data on network events, analyzing the data, and taking corrective action when possible. If an IP telephony device is registering with the VOIP telephony system more frequently than necessary, which can indicate the IP telephony device is unnecessarily jumping between proxy services, the IP telephony device is instructed to re-initialize itself. If an IP telephony device sends two successive stay alive registration messages to a proxy server from different ports of a router, which can indicate that a router pinhole is closing between stay alive messages, then the IP telephony device is instructed to send stay alive registration messages more frequently. If data packet statistics indicate that an IP telephony device is experiencing a jitter problem, the IP telephony device is instructed to increase the size of a data buffer for incoming data packets. If data packet statistics indicate that an IP telephony device is experiencing an enduring bandwidth problem or an enduring data packet loss problem, the IP telephony device is instructed to adopt a new encoding algorithm with greater data compression. | 10-20-2011 |
20110255398 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus (receiving apparatus) configured to receive a communication parameter selects, when an access point itself is active as a providing apparatus or the communication apparatus detects an access point (active access point) that is communicatable with an active providing apparatus, the access point as the access point to be connected using wireless connection. If the communication apparatus does not detect an active access point, the communication apparatus selects an access point (setup-completed access point) which is configured with a communication parameter that is different from the one that is set at the time of initialization, as the access point to be connected using wireless connection. | 10-20-2011 |
20110261678 | Establishing a Call Between A First User And A Second User - Method, device and computer program product for establishing a call between a first user and a second user, where the first and second users are associated with respective first and second devices which are configured to execute respective first and second communication clients for communicating over a first network. The first communication client attempts to establish a call to the second communication client over the first network using a first identifier associated with the second user in the first network. The first communication client determines that the attempt has failed, and in response displays actuatable secondary call means to the first user on the first device for calling a second identifier associated with the second user in a second network, where the second network is distinct from the first network. In response to the first user actuating the secondary call means, the first communication client establishes a call from the first device over the second network to the second identifier associated with the second user. | 10-27-2011 |
20110261679 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING HARQ-ACK - A method for transmitting HARQ-ACK, for N downlink component carriers and 1 uplink component carrier, transmitting HARQ-ACK information of N downlink component carriers in HARQ-ACK channel of an uplink component carrier, one of N downlink component carrier being a reference downlink component carrier, comprising steps of: on consecutive HARQ-ACK channels beginning with the first of N downlink component carrier, transmitting HARQ-ACK for CCE in the reference downlink component carrier; and on consecutive HARQ-ACK channels beginning with N(I)PUCCH, N(I)PUCCH+f(k) transmitting HARQ-ACK for CCE in other downlink component carriers, wherein k is information related to downlink component carrier. The method of this invention can reduce the HARQ-ACK channel overhead of uplink component carrier and the limitations on the flexibility of the scheduler in the base station. | 10-27-2011 |
20110267938 | FREQUENCY DEVIATION ERROR COMPENSATION IN AN MLSE RECEIVER - A method is described to compensate for deviation error in a H-CPM sync or data burst received by a MLSE receiver in a communication device. The deviation error is estimated and matched filter coefficients are adjusted using the estimated deviation error. Metrics are determined for the current state using the adjusted matched filter coefficients. The state having the minimum metric is determined to be the most likely current state. The most likely previous state is similarly determined The burst is reconstructed backward from the last state to the initial state. The metric is the squared magnitude of the difference between the channel estimate multiplied by the matched filter coefficient associated with one of the possible states and the current state. Timing and frequency errors are compensated for before estimation and correction of the deviation error. Pilot or sync symbols are used in estimating the deviation error. | 11-03-2011 |
20110267939 | METHODS FOR FADE DETECTION AND FADE RECOVERY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods are provided for fade protection at infrastructure equipment in a wireless communication network. The disclosed fade protection methods quantify signal quality, and based on the signal quality can detect fade conditions and/or recovery from such fade conditions. In one implementation, the disclosed fade protection methods can be implemented at Fixed Network Equipment (FNE) in an Association of Public-Safety Communications Officials (APCO) Project 25 (P25) compliant system. | 11-03-2011 |
20110273978 | DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE - A data transmission device is provided including a monitoring unit | 11-10-2011 |
20110280118 | MANAGING WIRELESS WIDE AREA NETWORK BANDWIDTH CONSTRAINTS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A technique to manage wireless wide area network bandwidth constraints in a communication network includes; prioritizing client activities in a serving access point; detecting that wired domain access is inactive while wireless wide area domain access is active; and utilizing an available bandwidth of the wireless aide area domain access for the highest priority client activities. The lower priority client activities can be address in various different ways including transferring to other available wired access. | 11-17-2011 |
20110286321 | TIME-SLICED SEARCH OF RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES DURING CONNECTED-MODE RADIO LINK FAILURE - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate apportioning a radio link failure (RLF) recovery timer among a plurality of radio access technologies (RAT). Once RLF is determined, a RLF recovery timer can be obtained and split according to a timer allocation. The timer allocation can include equal or weighted percentages related to the plurality of RATs, and a timer can be split according to the percentages to attempt connection using a RAT during a corresponding portion of the timer. In addition, the timer allocation can be defined according to a type of communication. In this regard, for voice calls, the timer can be split among circuit-switched networks regardless of a network from which connection is lost, and/or the like. Moreover, the timer allocation can be defined based on RAT deployment characteristics. | 11-24-2011 |
20110286322 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEAMLESS TRANSITIONS OF DATA TRANSMISSION TRANSFER BETWEEN RADIO LINKS - A method for wireless communications is provided that includes generating an index for a plurality of packets for use in a first radio link for transmission to an apparatus; transmitting the plurality of packets using a second radio link to the apparatus; determining transmission state information indicating whether each packet in the plurality of packets have been received by the apparatus; and transmitting additional packets based on the index and the transmission state information. Apparatuses for performing the methods are also disclosed. | 11-24-2011 |
20110292786 | METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING A TERMINAL WITH A FREQUENCY OF A RADIO-COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, CORRESPONDING COMPUTER SOFTWARE PRODUCT, STORAGE MEANS AND TERMINAL - A method and apparatus are provided for synchronizing a terminal with a frequency from an ordered initial sequence of frequencies of a radio-communications network. An available power spectrum associates to each frequency of the initial sequence a power value representing the power with which the frequency is received by the terminal. At least one first range of consecutive frequencies is determined within the initial sequence, having a power variation below a first predetermined threshold. The terminal attempts at least one first synchronization with a frequency of the first range. If each first synchronization fails, the terminal obtains a modified sequence by modifying the position of the frequency or frequencies of the at least one first range of the initial sequence or by eliminating the at least one first range. The terminal then attempts a second synchronization with at least one of the frequencies of the modified sequence. | 12-01-2011 |
20110292787 | DISABLED STATE AND STATE SIGNALING FOR LINK AGGREGATION - A device enables a disabled timer state for a link aggregation group (LAG) link if a disabled timer condition is determined for the LAG link, and enables a disabled state for the LAG link if a disabled condition is determined for the LAG link in the disabled timer state. | 12-01-2011 |
20110305134 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING A HARQ OPERATION IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of performing hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) of a user equipment (UE) in a multiple-carrier system is provided. The UE transmits uplink data on an uplink carrier. The UE receives acknowledgement (ACK)/not-acknowledgement (NACK) for the uplink data on a downlink carrier associated with the uplink carrier. Accordingly, HARQ can be supported in a multiple-carrier system. | 12-15-2011 |
20110305135 | METHOD, A BASE STATION AND A RELAY STATION FOR PERFORMING ARQ PROCESS IN A RELAY BASED SYSTEM - A method, in a relay-based wireless communication system, for performing downlink ARQ process, is proposed according to the invention. The method comprises: the BS sends first data to the RS, the first data multiplexing second data for one or more terminal equipments; if the transmission of the first data fails, unsolicited ARQ process to the RS is triggered by the BS, so as to perform the retransmission of the first data; the RS demultiplexs the first data transmitted from the BS to generate the second data, and sends the demultiplexed second data to the terminal equipment; if the transmission of the second data fails, the unsolicited ARQ process to the terminal equipment is triggered by the RS, so as to perform the retransmission for the second data; and the terminal equipment receives the second data and triggers a passive ARQ process for the reception of the second data. | 12-15-2011 |
20110310726 | METHOD FOR PROCESSING CHANNEL SWITCHING FAILURE CASE, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND CHANNEL SWITCHING SERVER - A method for processing a channel switching failure case is disclosed. The method for processing a channel switching failure case is used to provide media services for receiver in unicast and multicast modes and includes: detecting whether a data stream is of failure case after sending a channel switching request; and sending a failure case message and/or a failure case processing message to a channel switching server when a failure case occurs so that the channel switching server may process the failure case. A terminal device and channel switching server are provided so that the channel switching server may recover channel switching services provided for receiver and provide correct services for a user. | 12-22-2011 |
20110310727 | TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD AND APPARATUS - A troubleshooting method and a troubleshooting apparatus are disclosed. The troubleshooting method includes: sending a forward detection message to at least one node on a path to be detected, where the forward detection message carries information about a forward path to be detected and information about a backward path to be detected; and detecting faults according to a backward detection message returned by the at least one node. With the troubleshooting method and the troubleshooting apparatus disclosed herein, troubleshooting operations such as fault detection and fault location can be performed for the forward path and the backward path that require bidirectional path detection. | 12-22-2011 |
20110317543 | SCALING CONTENT COMMUNICATED OVER A NETWORK - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can scale content resolution in order to mitigate errors in a provisioned service of a communication network, such as a wireless service or a femtocell service that integrates with DSL or other broadband carriers. The architecture can identify fault conditions relating to e.g., bandwidth oversubscription or symbolization integrity. Based upon such identification, the architecture can alter encoding format codecs of certain types of content in order to reduce their resolution/quality, thereby mitigating bandwidth oversubscription fault conditions or freeing up space (without necessarily increasing bandwidth) to insert additional FEC code. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317544 | FEMTO BACKHAUL FAULT DETECTION AND RECOVERY - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for monitoring a backhaul channel associated with a femto access point (FAP) are disclosed. There is disclosed a method comprising: transmitting, by an FAP over a backhaul channel to a gateway associated with a first network, a plurality of requests, wherein individual requests of the plurality of requests are transmitted periodically and the backhaul channel comprises a second network that is different from the first network; and receiving, by the FAP from the gateway over the backhaul channel, one or more responses indicating an operational state of the backhaul channel, wherein the one or more responses are received in response to a corresponding one or more requests of the plurality of requests. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317545 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT HANDLING FOR EMERGENCY BEARER SERVICES - A Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context handling method for a Mobile Station (MS) with a PDP context for an emergency bearer service is provided, wherein a radio access bearer (RAB) associated with the PDP context is released by a network. The method comprises the steps of: downgrading the maximum uplink bit rate and the maximum downlink bit rate associated with the PDP context from original non-zero positive values to a zero value; sending a request signal associated with a modification of the maximum uplink bit rate and the maximum downlink bit rate; and re-establishing the RAB for the PDP context with the maximum uplink bit rate and the maximum downlink bit rate reconfigured as the original non-zero values after the request signal has been sent. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317546 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING NON-CONSECUTIVE DATA BLOCKS IN ENHANCED UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS - A method and apparatus for forwarding non-consecutive data blocks in enhanced uplink (EU) transmissions. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and one or more Node-Bs include one or more automatic repeat request (ARQ)/hybrid-ARQ (H-ARQ) processes for supporting an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH). Data blocks transmitted by the WTRU are re-ordered in a re-ordering entity located in the Node-B(s) or a radio network controller (RNC). Once a missing data block is identified, a data forwarding timer in the Node-B(s) or RNC is initiated and subsequent WTRU transmissions are monitored to determine whether the missing data block has been discarded by the WTRU. Upon recognition of the discard of the missing data block, the non-consecutive data blocks are forwarded to higher layers. | 12-29-2011 |
20110317547 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE RELIABLE TRANSMISSION OF DATA PACKET FLOWS WITH COMPRESSED HEADERS WITHOUT INCREASING THE FLOW RATE - A method for robustly transmitting a data flow in the form of packets Pi including at least one header Hi, said header being compressed via a first header compression step, said packets being fragmented into a succession of cells, said cells having an identical fixed size, said fragmentation resulting in the appearance of a padding section in the last of said cells, where the space occupied by said padding section is used, at least partially, to insert redundancy data, the function of said redundancy data being to increase the robustness to transmission errors of said compressed header. | 12-29-2011 |
20120002534 | ROUTED SPLIT MULTILINK TRUNKING FOR IPv6 - A method, apparatus and computer program product for performing routed split multilink trunking for IPv6 is presented. A first aggregation device is interconnected with a second aggregation device using an Inter Switch Trunk (IST). The first aggregation device learns a Media Access control (MAC) address of the second aggregation device and the second aggregation device learns a MAC address of the first aggregation device. Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) addresses are synchronized between the first aggregation device and the second aggregation device. When the first or second aggregation device receives an IPv6 packet destined to the other aggregation device, the first or second aggregation device performs an IPv6 route lookup on a destination address of the IPv6 packet and forwards the packet to a next hop for the IPv6 packet. | 01-05-2012 |
20120002535 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISTRIBUTING NETWORK TRAFFIC AMONG MULTIPLE DIRECT HARDWARE ACCESS DATAPATHS - A system for distributing network traffic among direct hardware access datapaths, comprising: a processor; one or more activated PNICs; a host operating system; and a virtual machine (VM). Each activated PNIC sends and receives data packets over a network. Each activated PNIC is configured with a virtual function. The VM includes a VNIC and a virtual link aggregator configured to maintain a list identifying each activated PNIC. Virtual function mappings for the VM associate the VM with virtual functions for the activated PNICs. The virtual link aggregator selects the first activated PNIC for servicing a network connection and determines a virtual function for the first activated PNIC. The VNIC for the first activated PNIC uses the virtual function to directly transfer network traffic for the network connection between the VM and the first activated PNIC. | 01-05-2012 |
20120008490 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION IN MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT WIRELESS NETWORKS - Wireless communication in a wireless system using a multiple user transmission opportunity is provided. The data blocks are organized in order of transmission priority based on access categories. Contention for access to the communication medium during a transmission opportunity period is based on a backoff timer of each access category and the transmission priority. Upon successful contention for a transmission opportunity period, during the transmission opportunity period, a data block of a primary access category is wirelessly transmitted from the wireless station to one or more primary destination wireless receivers. Simultaneously, a data block of a secondary access category is wirelessly transmitted from the wireless station to one or more secondary destination wireless receivers. Contending for the transmission opportunity period includes each access category contending for access to the wireless communication medium and a secondary access category selectively invoking communication medium access backoff based on one or more backoff events. | 01-12-2012 |
20120014245 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING MESSAGE RELIABLY IN POWER SAVING CLASS MODE - Various methods and apparatuses for reliably transmitting or receiving messages and data in a Power Saving Class (PSC) mode, which are applicable to a wireless access system, are disclosed. In addition, various methods and apparatuses for retransmitting a management message (e.g., a control message) in the PSC mode are disclosed. Accordingly, the messages and data can be transmitted using a Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest (HARQ) scheme. | 01-19-2012 |
20120020202 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SYNCHRONIZING WIRELESS DEVICES WITH A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of operating a communication system comprises performing a plurality of ranging processes to establish a network connection over a wireless link. A time interval is established for a wireless device timer at the wireless device upon establishing the network connection and a time interval is established for an access node timer at the access node upon establishing the network connection. The method also comprises establishing a communication session over the wireless link and network connection. When a repeat request acknowledgement message is received during the communication session, the time interval for the wireless device timer and the time interval for the access node timer is restarted. | 01-26-2012 |
20120020203 | Clock and data recovery system - This invention provides a clock and data recovery system, which comprises a plurality of gm cells, control device, resistor and capacitor. The gm cells respectively have an input end and an output end. The control devices are connected to these output ends. According to a time value, the control device controls a part of the plurality of gm cells to form a first gm cell, and the control device controls another part of the plurality of gm cells to form a second gm cell. The resistor is connected between the first gm cell and the second gm cell. The capacitor is connected to the second gm cell. Wherein, the control device controls the ratio of the first gm cell and the second gm cell in accordance with a time-division multiplexed manner. | 01-26-2012 |
20120026864 | PACKET DATA NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND METHOD - The invention provides for a mobile radio communications device for communication within a packet data network and arranged for transmitting dedicated bearer set-up signalling to the network as part of a network attachment procedure, the device further being arranged to store the said dedicated bearer set-up signalling and to transmit or retransmit the same responsive to the success of attach complete signalling. | 02-02-2012 |
20120039161 | AUTOMATED TRAFFIC ENGINEERING FOR FAT TREE NETWORKS - Embodiments of a method implemented in at least one fat tree network node for improved load distribution, wherein the node is one of a plurality of fat tree network nodes in a fat tree network each of which implement a tie-breaking process to produce minimum cost trees, is described. In some embodiments, a spanning tree computation for each root node of the fat tree network in order from a lowest ranked root node to a highest ranked node is performed, a filtering database for each root node of the fat tree network, wherein the filtering database includes a set of media access control (MAC) addresses of the leaf nodes of the fat tree network generated, and link utilization for each computed tree to use as a prefix to link identifiers used for at least one tie-breaking algorithm added. | 02-16-2012 |
20120039162 | Synchronous Data Communication - A data packet is provided that includes a synchronization field and an acknowledgement field indicative of an acknowledgement of receipt of a prior data packet. The data packet also includes a response field that includes information indicative of a system fault, a header field, and a sequence number field that includes a number assigned to the data packet. The data packet further includes a data field, an end of packet field, and an error-checking field. Methods and computer program products are provided that, in some implementations, include retransmitting packets if the acknowledgement field in a received data packet is a no acknowledgement (NAK) and/or placing a node into a safe state in response to a fault signal that is included in the received data packet. | 02-16-2012 |
20120044797 | Method and Equipment for Sending Radio Link Layer Status Package - The present invention discloses a method and a device for sending a radio link layer status package, and the sending method comprises: when the universal terrestrial radio access network detects that there is data to be sent which has been sent but has not been acknowledged, if a response from a receiving side is not received after a radio link layer status package is sent to the receiving side, a reset operation of the radio link layer is executed. The present invention resets the radio link control layer in time when the path between the universal terrestrial radio access network and the receiving side is failed or invalid, therefore it is advantageous to maintain the stability and self-recovery of system. | 02-23-2012 |
20120044798 | Data Retransmission Method and User Equipment - Embodiments of the present invention provide a data retransmission method and user equipment, where the method includes: if a network indicates switching from a dual stream transmission mode to a single stream transmission mode, stopping data transmission of one data stream and clearing data in an HARQ process of the stopped data stream; or if a network indicates switching from a single stream transmission mode to a dual stream transmission mode, transmitting retransmission data in an HARQ process of the original data stream without changing the HARQ process number, and transmitting new data in the HARQ process of a new data stream; or using the retransmission data of the original data stream as new data to transmit in the HARQ process of either the original data stream or new data stream. | 02-23-2012 |
20120057450 | METHOD OF TRANSMITTING TRAFFIC IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK APPARATUS | 03-08-2012 |
20120057451 | METHOD OF RETRANSMISSION FOR SUPPORTING MIMO IN SYNCHRONOUS HARQ - A method for retransmitting data in synchronous Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest (HARQ) to support Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a plurality of unit data blocks to a receiver, receiving from the receiver a control channel signal including first feedback information indicating whether the transmission of the plurality of unit data blocks is successful, and retransmitting at least one of the plurality of unit data blocks according to a predetermined order, each unit data block in one Transmission Time Interval (TTI), if a rank is 1 and the first feedback information indicates that the transmission of the plurality of unit data blocks is failed. | 03-08-2012 |
20120063295 | PHY Retraining - Embodiments enable quick PHY re-training when the link is restarted due an event such as EMI, for example. In particular, embodiments recognize that, in the case of such events as EMI, a substantial portion of the training process as prescribed in the standard can be bypassed during the link restart without affecting subsequent link performance. In particular, embodiments recognize that a substantial amount of previously learned link parameters may still be used after link restart, and thus eliminate the need to re-learn them thereby speeding up the link restart process. Further, embodiments recognize that the standard prescribed link start up procedure can be accelerated in the case of link restart by reducing standard prescribed periods for transitioning between states of the link start up process. Additionally, embodiments provide a mechanism that relies on the auxiliary bit (AUX) of LDPC coded user data frames to pre-emptively and dynamically notch out troublesome EMIs before they cause the link to fail. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063296 | Systems and Methods for Providing a Dual-Master Mode in a Synchronous Ethernet Environment - Embodiments of a dual-master mode Ethernet node are provided herein. The dual-master mode Ethernet node includes a first multiplexer configured to select between a local oscillator signal and a primary reference source (PRS) signal to provide a reference clock signal, a digital phase-locked loop (DPLL) configured to generate a master clock signal based on the reference clock signal, a phase rotator configured to rotate a phase of the master clock signal based on a frequency error between the master clock signal and an extracted clock signal to generate a slave clock signal, and a second multiplexer configured to select between the master clock signal and the slave clock signal to provide a transmit clock signal. The dual-master mode Ethernet node can dynamically generate the transmit clock based on either the extracted clock or the PRS without re-performing the auto-negotiation process. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063297 | USER TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR RADIO RESOURCE CONNECTION THEREOF - In a user terminal and a method for a radio resource connection thereof, the user terminal includes a communication unit to transmit a request signal to request a radio resource connection and to receive a response signal in response to the request signal, a control unit to generate the request signal, to select a first cell based on the response signal and to determine whether to retransmit a request signal to the first cell based on a timer; and a timer management unit to start the timer. | 03-15-2012 |
20120063298 | SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - Disclosed herein is a method for processing signals by a wireless node in a wireless communication system. The method for processing the signal includes configuring a specific subframe for communicating with a network node, starting a timer if a problem of a connection with the network node is detected, and releasing the configured specific subframe if the timer expires. | 03-15-2012 |
20120069728 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING FAILURE OF COMPONENT CARRIER IN MULTIPLE CARRIER SYSTEM - A method and apparatus of processing a failure of a component carrier (CC) in a multiple carrier system is provided. A user equipment detects a failed CC in which a failure occurs among a plurality of CCs and determines whether to declare a radio link failure based on the failed CC. If it is not the radio link failure, the user equipment reports information on the failed CC to a base station. | 03-22-2012 |
20120075986 | Fast Flooding Based Fast Convergence Architecture - Fast flooding based fast convergence to recover from a network failure. A router detects a network failure, and responsive to that failure, transmits a fast failure notification message to a set of one or more routers. The fast failure notification message includes information that identifies the network failure and also indicates that the fast failure notification message is to be flooded by the set of routers independently of convergence. The router updates a routing table to reflect the network failure. The transmission of the fast failure notification message is performed prior to completion of the routing table update to reflect the network failure. | 03-29-2012 |
20120075987 | RADIO APPARATUS, METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION DISTURBANCE REMEDIAL ACTION AND PROGRAM FOR COMMUNICATION DISTURBANCE REMEDIAL ACTION - A radio apparatus configured to identify a fault of a radio link with a radio station and to execute a remedial action has a statistical information acquisition part configured to acquire a characteristic value of statistical information expressing a status of the radio link, a fault detector configured to detect a plurality of faults preliminarily associated with the statistical information in a predetermined order based on the characteristic value, and a remedial action execution part configured to execute a remedial action preliminarily associated with the fault detected by the fault detector, wherein the plurality of faults comprises a shadowing and a radio noise, and the predetermined order is set so that a detection of the shadowing has priority over a detection of the radio noise. | 03-29-2012 |
20120087231 | Packet Loss Recovery Method and Device for Voice Over Internet Protocol - A method and device for method of doing packet loss recovery in VoIP system is disclosed. By employing the information in LPC parameters of CELP codec, the speech packets/frames which belong to the beginning segment of each speech phoneme are located, and packet repetition is adopted to protect these packets before they are transmitted in the network. | 04-12-2012 |
20120092981 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR WATER TREATMENT - A communications network is provided for a water treatment system. A controller is in communication with a plurality of network elements using digital communications. The network elements have a connection configured to connect the network element to the controller or another network element. The controller sends a message to the network elements to configure the network elements for communication with the controller. The controller receives a response from the network elements including a network address and a header. If the network address is a default address, configuration information is sent to the network element for communication on the network. If the network address is not a default address, communication is established with the network element. Messages sent from the controller to a network element having a network address not matching the network address of the network element are sent over the network to a next network element. | 04-19-2012 |
20120092982 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a terminal device and a retransmission control method which enable the avoidance of the degradation of transmission characteristics of a response signal and the minimization of the increase of the overhead of an uplink control channel when ARQ is applied in communication using an uplink unit band and a plurality of downlink unit bands associated with the uplink unit band. In a terminal ( | 04-19-2012 |
20120099416 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING VIDEO PACKETS OVER MULTIPLE BEARERS FOR PROVIDING UNEQUAL PACKET LOSS PROTECTION - A method and apparatus distributes video packets over multiple bearers for providing unequal packet loss protection. The method includes a packet processing function receiving a plurality of packets that collectively includes video data from a group of pictures comprising a sequence of video frames, wherein the sequence includes one Intra frame at the beginning of the group of pictures followed by a plurality of Predictive frames. For each packet, the packet processing function: determines the corresponding frame that includes the video data; applies a bearer selection process to select one of multiple bearers for transporting the packet over an access network, wherein each bearer has a different quality of service level which influences the probability of the transported packets being dropped, wherein the bearer selection process is based on the position of the frame within the sequence of frames; and provides, to an access network entity, an indication of the selected bearer. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099417 | Method, apparatus and system for processing configuration update failure - The present disclosure relates to a method, apparatus and system for processing a configuration update failure, belonging to the field of communications. The method includes: setting a times threshold for receiving an eNB configuration update failure message; sending an eNB configuration update message to an MME or a neighboring eNB after configuration information is updated; receiving, from the MME or the neighboring eNB, an eNB configuration update failure message including a Time-To-Wait IE; calculating the times for receiving the eNB configuration update failure message; comparing the calculated times for receiving the eNB configuration update failure message with the set times threshold to determine whether the calculated times exceed the set times threshold; and stopping sending the eNB configuration update message if the calculated times exceed the set times threshold. The apparatus includes: a first sending module, a first receiving module, a first counting module, a first threshold setting module, a first comparing module and a first notifying module. The present disclosure can relieve the load of the system and improve the robustness and stability of the system. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099418 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDLING NETWORK LOSS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for handling network loss in a wireless access system includes determining whether network loss has occurred or not and, if a Mobile Station (MS) attempts an entry in which the network loss has occurred, transmitting one of a first message including information associated with prohibiting new entry and a second message including information associated with informing that a supported service is restricted. | 04-26-2012 |
20120099419 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING RETRANSMISSION REQUEST INFORMATION FOR AN ERROR PACKET IN A MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST/MULTICAST SERVICE, AND METHOD FOR RETRANSMITTING A PACKET IN RESPONSE TO THE RETRANSMISSION REQUEST - Disclosed is a method in which a terminal transmits retransmission request information for an error packet of a multimedia broadcast/multicast service (MBMS), and a base station retransmits a packet in the multimedia broadcast/multicast service. The method in which the terminal transmits retransmission request information for an error packet comprises: a step of receiving an MBMS packet from the base station; a step of checking whether or not an error exists in the received MBMS packet; and a step of transmitting retransmission request information for the error packet using at least one of PUSCH, PUCCH and a random access preamble for a random access process if an error exists in the received MBMS packet. The present invention achieves improved service satisfaction among terminals located on an intercell boundary, an MBSFN boundary, and regions with a poor wireless environment. | 04-26-2012 |
20120106318 | METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING DUAL-HOMING - The invention discloses a method for implementing dual-homing, including: setting each one of any two core control equipment as a standby for each other, connecting a network entity belonging to one of the core control equipment with the two core control equipment through a primary link and a standby link respectively; setting the primary link connected with the core control equipment as activated, and setting the standby link connected with the core control equipment inactive; determining whether the core control equipment corresponding to the primary link is out of service, if the core control equipment corresponding to the primary link is out of service, activating the standby link; otherwise, continuously determining whether the core control equipment corresponding to the primary link is out of service. The invention also discloses another method for implementing dual-homing, by which the reliability of the network can be improved. | 05-03-2012 |
20120106319 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING DATA PACKETS - The invention proposes a method of encoding data packet by encoding type information and size information of said data packet into the same field. The invention also proposes a method of processing data packets received. The data packet comprises a header part and a message part. The header part comprises at least one bit for indicating the type of said data packet, said method comprising a step ( | 05-03-2012 |
20120113796 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH FAILOVER COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system may include, for example, an Interrogating Call Session Control Function (I-CSCF) device having a processor adapted to receive a request from a Serving CSCF (S-CSCF) device communicatively coupled to a first communication device to establish communications with a second communication device responsive to the first communication device initiating a call directed to the second communication device, and to identify a primary S-CSCF device to which the second communication device is registered. The processor can also be adapted to detect a communication fault when attempting to communicate with the primary S-CSCF device, and to identify a secondary S-CSCF device that provides backup communication services to the second communication device responsive to detecting the communication fault. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113797 | Method and Network Entity for Active Set Update in Wide Area Mobile Networks - The described method provides a Network Controller (e.g., RNC) with an active set update procedure for application when activating STTD in the 3G networks. To avoid any call drop due to misalignments between the respective transmission diversity mode configurations of cells and the presence/absence of support for transmission diversity in user terminals, STTD mode is deactivated, in cases where the terminal is rejecting the Active Set Update message due to ‘invalid configuration’. The misalignments between the respective transmission diversity mode configurations may arise in a number of scenarios: handover from a cell with STTD deactivated to a cell with STTD activated, handover from a cell with STTD activated to a cell with STTD deactivated, or handover between cells with STTD activated. In all cases the solution consists of indicating to the UE the STTD Off configuration to obtain a success active set update procedure irrespective of the true configuration status. | 05-10-2012 |
20120113798 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTEGRATING RING-PROTOCOL-COMPATIBLE DEVICES INTO NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS THAT ALSO INCLUDE NON-RING-PROTOCOL COMPATIBLE DEVICES - Various systems and methods for integrating ring-protocol-compatible devices into network configurations that also include non-ring-protocol-compatible devices are disclosed. One such method, which can be performed by a network node that supports a ring protocol, involves generating a ring protocol packet and sending that ring protocol packet to a neighboring node. The ring protocol packet includes information, and the presence of this information within the packet causes a network device that receives the ring protocol packet to drop the ring protocol packet unless the network device supports a ring protocol. The information can include a reserved address (e.g., in the destination address field of the packet) as well as a ring protocol identifier. | 05-10-2012 |
20120120788 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR RECOVERING INVALID DOWNLINK DATA TUNNEL BETWEEN NETWORKS - Described herein is a method for processing an invalidation of a downlink data tunnel between networks. The method includes the following steps: (1) a core network user plane anchor receives an error indication of data tunnel sent from an access network device, (2) after deciding that the user plane corresponding to the error indication uses a One Tunnel technology, the core network user plane anchor notifies a relevant core network control plane to request recovering the downlink data tunnel, (3) the core network control plane recovers the downlink data tunnel and notifies the core network user plane anchor to update information of the user plane. In addition, a communication system and a communication device are also provided. The method, system, and device can improve the speed of recovering data transmission after the downlink data tunnel becomes invalid. | 05-17-2012 |
20120127850 | BEST-PATH EVALUATION BASED ON RELIABILITY OF NETWORK INTERFACE LAYERS - A system and associated method for dynamic error dampening in a node in a network system. The node collects statistics of data traffic transferred through the node. The node has a link error MIB storing Error ratio and Reliability of interface of the node. When the Error ratio is too high, the node starts running a Layer 2 protocol for monitoring data traffic and calculates Penalty of the node. When Penalty is higher than predefined Suppress Threshold, the node deactivates Layer 3 link while the Layer 2 protocol still monitors the interface. Once the Penalty becomes lower than Reuse Threshold, the node reactivates the Layer 3 link that had been previously deactivated. When Penalty becomes zero (0), the node clears the Error ratio and stops the Layer 2 protocol for monitoring the data traffic. | 05-24-2012 |
20120127851 | Method and System for Managing Signalling in a Telecommunication Network - A signaling management method for managing signaling in a telecommunications network, in which, in normal operation, access equipment ( | 05-24-2012 |
20120127852 | RF TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM WITH ADJUSTABLE TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS AND METHODS FOR USE THEREWITH - A circuit includes a transceiver coupled to transmit an outbound signal in accordance with a plurality of transmit parameters to at least one remote station and receive an inbound signal from the at least one remote station. The transceiver detects a packet transmission failure, selects one of a plurality of transmission failure causes, and adjusts at least one of a plurality of transmit parameters, based on the selected one of the plurality of transmission failure causes. | 05-24-2012 |
20120140615 | METHOD, STATION AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM FOR DOWNLINK MULTI-USER MULTIPLE ACCESS CATEGORY MEDIUM ACCESS AND ERROR RECOVERY - A method, device and computer readable medium for downlink multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU MIMO) multiple access category (AC) medium access and error recovery. The method includes transmitting a plurality of aggregated MAC protocol data units (A-MDPUs) from the transmitting STA to respective ones a plurality of receiving STAs, the A-MDPUs being associated with respective access categories (ACs) and defining a primary AC. The method further includes doubling a contention window (CW) of at least one of the primary AC and a failed AC if an A-MPDU transmission failure occurs. | 06-07-2012 |
20120147731 | APPARATUS OF MULTIPLEXING DATA TRANSMISSION PATH FOR WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention is to provide a method and apparatus for multiplexing a sync node and a gateway of a wireless sensor network, which is capable of allowing communication of the wireless sensor network to be normally performed by multiplexing paths of the sync node and the gateway of the wireless sensor network even in the case where any one of the sync node and the gateway abnormally operates and by transmitting upstream data and downstream data through a path selected among the duplexed paths according to characteristics of the wireless sensor network. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147732 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HANDLING ERROR IN LPP MESSAGES EXCHANGE - A system and method for handling an error in a LTE Positioning Protocol (LPP) transaction is provided. The method includes the steps of: receiving, by a receiver, at least one of a plurality of LPP messages from a sender, wherein each of the LPP messages has a sequence number; returning, by the receiver, an acknowledgment to the sender for each of the at least one received LPP message; returning, by the receiver, an error indication to the sender when the receiver detects an error in the at least one received LPP message; and receiving, by the receiver, at least one of the at least one received LPP message retransmitted by the sender. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147733 | Processing Method after Configuration Update Failure and Network Element Device Thereof - The present invention provides a processing method after configuration update failure and a network element device. The method comprises: after a configuration of a first network element device changes, the first network element device sending a configuration update message to all its adjacent network element devices; if the first network element device receives a configuration update failure message returned by any of its adjacent network element devices, and the configuration update failure message does not contain information instructing the first network element device to perform subsequent processing, the first network element device rolling its configuration back to the one prior to configuration update; and the first network element device resending the configuration update message to all its adjacent network element devices in the rolled-back configuration. The method and network element device ensure continuous optimization of the network and enhancing robustness and stability of the system. | 06-14-2012 |
20120147734 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RETRANSMITTING DATA BASED ON HARQ SCHEME IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for retransmitting data using an HARQ method and a mobile station using the same in a wireless telecommunications system are disclosed herein. When all bits of a resource index field in an uplink basic assignment A-MAP received from a base station through a specific frame are set to 1, the mobile station may not retransmit an HARQ sub-packet from an uplink subframe within the specific frame. In this case, the mobile station may retransmit an HARQ sub-packet from an uplink subframe within a frame subsequent to the specific frame. At this point, the uplink subframe and resource index of the subsequent frame respectively correspond to the subframe and resource index having the same index and resource index of an uplink subframe predetermined in association with the retransmission of the mobile station in a previous frame. The resource index corresponds to information indicating where the assigned resource is positioned within the corresponding subframe and how large the size of the assigned resource is. Alternatively, the mobile station may receive once again the uplink basic assignment A-MAP, so as to retransmit the HARQ sub-packet from an uplink subframe designated by the uplink basic assignment A-MAP. | 06-14-2012 |
20120155245 | Method and System for Rebuilding Single Ring Network Topology - The invention provides a method and a system for rebuilding single ring network topology. In the method, each node in the single ring network detects, at a predetermined time interval, whether the link connected with the root port of the present node is failed (S | 06-21-2012 |
20120163160 | GROUPING SMALL BURST TRANSMISSIONS FOR DOWNLINK MACHINE-TO-MACHINE COMMUNICATIONS - Briefly, in accordance with one or more embodiments, a mechanism disclosed herein groups transmissions to machine-to-machine (M2M) devices in the downlink which can significantly reduce the overhead of transmission. One or more bursts to be transmitted in the downlink to one or more respective devices are aggregated and concatenated into a concatenated burst comprising one or more sub-bursts corresponding to the one or more bursts. The concatenated burst is encoded as a single payload to be transmitted, and the payload is transmitted to the one or more devices such that the devices are capable of decoding their respective sub-bursts in the concatenated burst. | 06-28-2012 |
20120163161 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-POINT HSDPA COMMUNICATION UTILIZING A MULTI-LINK RLC SUBLAYER - A method and apparatus for wireless communication may provide a multi-link RLC sublayer in an RNC capable of allocating RLC PDUs among a plurality of MAC entities for use in a Multi-Point HSDPA network. Some aspects of the disclosure address issues relating to out-of-order delivery of the RLC PDUs to a UE, such as unnecessary retransmissions. That is, the disclosed multi-link RLC may be capable of distinguishing between sequence number gaps that are caused by physical layer transmission failures and those caused merely by skew. | 06-28-2012 |
20120170445 | EFFICIENT APPLICATION-LAYER AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST RETRANSMISSION METHOD FOR RELIABLE REAL-TIME DATA STREAMING IN NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described including buffering data to be transmitted, transmitting data retrieved from a buffer via a datagram protocol, receiving a request for retransmission of data, determining if the requested data is in the buffer and retransmitting the requested data via a protocol that provides end-to-end acknowledgement of data and error recovery. | 07-05-2012 |
20120176887 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST OPERATION FOR UPLINK COORDINATED MULTI-POINT SIGNALING - A method and system for hybrid automatic repeat request operation for uplink coordinated multi-point signaling, the method in one embodiment sending a data packet from a user equipment to a plurality of network elements; waiting for a control indication from at least one of the plurality of network element; and retransmitting the data packet to the plurality of network elements if the control indication specifies retransmission is required. | 07-12-2012 |
20120176888 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR USER COOPERATIVE COMMUNICATION - A wireless network system and corresponding methodologies that operate in a user cooperative communication system are provided. In operation, the system either combines packets transmitted from a direct channel with packets transmitted from and a relay channel, or uses erroneously relayed packets to assist decoding a direct packet. | 07-12-2012 |
20120182858 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD - Provided are a terminal device and a retransmission control method that make it possible to minimize increases in overhead in an uplink control channel (PUCCH), even if channel selection is used as the method to transmit response signals during carrier-aggregation communication using a plurality of downlink unit bands. On the basis of the generation status of uplink data and error-detection results obtained by a CRC unit ( | 07-19-2012 |
20120182859 | PACKET RESTORATION METHOD, PACKET RESTORATION SYSTEM, AND MOBILE TERMINAL AND INTERMEDIATE DEVICE USED IN THE METHOD - The present invention discloses a technique for providing a packet recovery method, and the like, capable of starting packet recovery processing without waiting for a wasteful latency (time-out) at a mobile terminal by giving notice of information on a packet discard in a gateway device in real time, thereby enabling improvement in communication quality and communication efficiency. According to the technique, there is provided a packet recovery method for recovering a packet discarded by an intermediate device positioned on a communication path between a mobile terminal and a correspondent node of the mobile terminal among packets exchanged between the mobile terminal and correspondent node, the method including: a step of causing the intermediate device to transmit a discard notification message to the mobile terminal based on information on a communication flow for which transmission of the discard notification message indicating that the packet has been discarded is required; and a step of causing the mobile terminal to transmit the correspondent node a retransmission request message for requesting retransmission of the discarded packet based the discard notification message. | 07-19-2012 |
20120182860 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HOP-BY-HOP RELIABLE MULTICAST IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described including performing hop-by-hop multicasting including network coding of data packets of a portion of content, wherein network coding further includes encoding data packets of a portion of content, multicasting said network coded data packets to downstream receivers, determining if an acknowledgement message has been received from at least one of the downstream receivers, determining if acknowledgement messages have been received from all of the downstream receivers responsive to the first determination. | 07-19-2012 |
20120195185 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING AN UNRECOVERABLE ERROR DURING RE-ESTABLISHMENT OF AN RLC ENTITY IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system and method for processing an unrecoverable error of a terminal are provided. In the method a Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer receives a downlink reset message from a network, determines whether the RRC layer receives an unrecoverable error report from a Radio Link Control (RLC) layer during a downlink reset; transmits an uplink response message to the network, when the downlink reset is completed; determines whether an unrecoverable error ignore condition is met, when the RRC layer receives the unrecoverable error report; and ignores the unrecoverable error when the unrecoverable error ignore condition is met. The RLC layer then performs data transmission and reception. | 08-02-2012 |
20120201121 | HIGH SPEED UPLINK PACKET ACCESS ADAPTIVE RETRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - An embodiment of the present invention discloses a high speed uplink packet access adaptive retransmission method and apparatus. The method includes: obtaining a resource limitation state; performing adjustment decision according to the resource limitation state and a current target number of retransmissions of a UE; and adjusting the target number of retransmissions of the UE between a preset large target number of retransmissions and a preset small target number of retransmissions, where the large target number of retransmissions is greater than the small target number of retransmissions. The utilization rate of resources may be effectively improved. | 08-09-2012 |
20120207011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RESPONDING TO AN UNRECOVERABLE ERROR - A method, apparatus and computer product are provided that may respond to an unrecoverable error without initiating a cell update procedure. In an instance in which more than one connection is concurrently supported in either the circuit switched domain, the packet switched domain or both, the method, apparatus and computer program product may avoid interrupting or terminating the connection that did not experience the unrecoverable error. For example, in an instance in which the unrecoverable error occurred on a radio bearer for a data service connection, such as a packet switched data call, the method, apparatus and computer program product may address the unrecoverable error without disruption of a connection for a voice service, such as a circuit switched voice call. | 08-16-2012 |
20120207012 | LOAD BALANCING NETWORK TRAFFIC ON A LABEL SWITCHED PATH USING RESOURCE RESERVATION PROTOCOL WITH TRAFFIC ENGINEERING - Techniques are describe for establishing an overall label switched path (LSP) for load balancing network traffic being sent across a network using the a resource reservation protocol such as Resource Reservation Protocol with Traffic Engineering (RSVP-TE). The techniques include extensions to the RSVP-TE protocol that enable a router to send Path messages for establishing a tunnel that includes a plurality of sub-paths for the overall LSP. The tunnel may comprise a single RSVP-TE Label Switched Path (LSP) that is configured to load balance network traffic across different sub-paths of the RSVP-TE LSP over the network. | 08-16-2012 |
20120213055 | METHOD AND NODE FOR TRANSMITTING DATA OVER A COMMUNICATION NETWORK USING NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGMENT - A method of transmitting data over a communication network using negative acknowledgment is presented. In the method, a stream of data packets is transmitted from a first node of the network to a second node of the network. All but at least two of the stream of data packets is successfully received at the second node, wherein the data packets that are not successfully received are not located sequentially within the stream of data packets. A status packet is transmitted from the second node to the first node, wherein the status packet includes an indication of each of the data packets that were not successfully received. In response to receiving the status packet at the first node, the data packets that were not successfully received at the second node are retransmitted from the first node to the second node in response to receiving the status packet. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213056 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A TRANSMITTING ANTENNA SELECTION FAILURE RECOVERY MODE - Aspects of a method and system for a transmitting antenna selection failure recover mode are presented. Aspects of the system may include a transmitting mobile terminal that enables selection of a sequence of protocol data units (PDU), for example a sequence of sounding frames, which may be transmitted during an antenna selection procedure. During transmission of the selected PDU sequence, the transmitting mobile terminal may receive an antenna selection failure indication frame. The transmitting mobile terminal may enable retransmission of at least one previously transmitted PDU in the PDU sequence based on the failure indication. Transmission of subsequent PDUs in the PDU sequence may resume after the retransmission. Alternatively, upon receipt of the failure indication frame the transmitting mobile terminal may restart the selected frame sequence from the beginning, or may select a subsequent PDU frame sequence. | 08-23-2012 |
20120213057 | Coordination Processing Method and Device for Self Organizing Operation and Communication System - A coordination processing method for a self organizing operation includes obtaining a preset coordination relationship between a first self organizing operation and a second self organizing operation before performing the first self organizing operation. If the second self organizing operation exists, the first self organizing operation and the second self organizing operation are performed according to the coordination relationship. If the second self organizing operation does not exist, performing the first self organizing operation is performed. | 08-23-2012 |
20120218879 | POWER OVER ETHERNET MANAGEMENT DEVICES AND CONNECTION BETWEEN ETHERNET DEVICES - In one embodiment, a connection is maintained between a pair of ethernet ports that have circuitry connected in series with the ports and receiving power-over-ethernet (PoE) from one of the ports, by providing a controllable bypass circuit coupled to the pair of ethernet ports in parallel with the circuitry receiving power-over-ethernet, sensing a preselected condition, and opening and closing the bypass circuit in response to the presence or absence of the preselected condition. Power sourcing equipment (PSE) may supply the one of the ports with power over ethernet, and the circuitry may transports data between the pair of ethernet ports. The circuitry may also supply the switch with a control signal in response to the detection of the preselected condition. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218880 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELF-TERMINATING A MEDIA SERVICE DUE TO AN OUT-OF-COVERAGE CONDITION - A method and mobile device that self-terminates a media service if an out-of-coverage condition is detected. The media service operates on top of a connectionless peer-to-peer packet-based transport protocol. The out-of-coverage condition may relate to the mobile device itself or to a remote mobile device engaged in the media service. The loss of coverage by the remote mobile device may be detected by observing whether the remote mobile device has failed to send any data packets for more than a predetermined period of time. If an out-of-coverage situation is detected, then the method or device initiates service cancellation or release. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218881 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACKNOWLEDGMENT/NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGMENT FEEDBACK ON PHYSICAL UPLINK CONTROL CHANNEL - The present invention discloses a method and system for feeding back an acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement response message on a physical uplink control channel. The method includes: sending, by a user equipment, an acknowledgement/negative-acknowledgement response message by adopting a manner based on a channel selection or based on a DFT-s-OFDM in a multiplexing mode according to a feedback manner or a feedback rule in the multiplexing mode configured by a base station. In the present invention, the base station can configure for the user equipment and directly indicate to the user equipment through the higher layer signaling the feedback manner in the multiplexing mode, and can also configure the feedback rule in the multiplexing mode for the user equipment; and the user equipment determines the feedback manner in the multiplexing mode according to the feedback manner or feedback rule configured by the base station. | 08-30-2012 |
20120218882 | EFFICIENT CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTIPLE ANTENNA TRANSMISSION TECHNIQUE - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and provides an efficient control information transmission method and apparatus for supporting a multiple antenna transmission technique. According to one embodiment of the present invention, a method for transmitting downlink hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) information on a uplink multiple codeword transmission comprises the steps of: receiving the uplink multiple codeword transmission; generating HARQ information on each of multiple codewords, on the basis of the result of decoding each of the multiple codewords; modulating the HARQ information; and transmitting the modulated HARQ information through one or more physical HARQ indicator channels (PHICHs). | 08-30-2012 |
20120224468 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERSISTENT CONNECTIONS TO A DEVICE THROUGH THE USE OF MULTIPLE PHYSICAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS AND CONNECTION HAND-OFFS BETWEEN MULTIPLE BANDS, MODES AND NETWORKS - Embodiments communicate messages between mobile devices and destination devices. An exemplary embodiment includes a first border server operable to establish a first communication connection to the mobile device over a first network operating under a first protocol, a second border server operable to establish a second communication connection to the mobile device over a second network operating under a second protocol, and a transport management server communicatively coupled to the first border server and the second border server, and operable to establish a third communication connection to the destination device over a third network operating under a third protocol. The first protocol is configured to communicate a first encapsulated portion of the message. The second protocol is configured to communicate a second encapsulated portion of the message. The third protocol is configured to communicate the first encapsulated portion of the message and the second encapsulated portion of the message. | 09-06-2012 |
20120230178 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING BURSTY NETWORK ENTRY AND RE-ENTRY IN MACHINE TO MACHINE NETWORKS - A method and apparatus may be used for handling bursty network entry and re-entry in M2M networks. For example, a base station (BS) may receive a trigger from at least one device associated with the BS. The at least one device may be a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), or it may be a network device. The BS may determine whether a widespread exception is imminent based on the trigger. If a widespread exception is imminent, the BS may transmit an indication to the at least one device. The indication may indicate to the at least one device that the BS has received a widespread exception report. The WTRU may receive the indication, and terminate a network entry procedure in response to the indication. The WTRU may enter a power saving mode in response to the indication. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230179 | System, Device and Method for Distributing Link State Information in a Communication Network - A system, device, and method for distributing link state information in a communication network combines a link state routing protocol with a sliding window mechanism in order to efficiently distribute link state information. The sliding window mechanism permits a predetermined number of unacknowledged link state advertisement protocol messages to be outstanding at any given time. Unacknowledged link state advertisement protocol messages are retransmitted after a predetermined timeout period. | 09-13-2012 |
20120230180 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HANDLING VALID PROTOCOL DATA UNITS - An example apparatus is provided that receives a plurality of protocol data units (PDUs) formatted according to a standard that prescribes segmenting service data units (SDUs) into sequential PDUs. Each SDU is segmented into PDU(s), and each PDU includes data field element(s). The apparatus detects a current received PDU including data field element(s) that do not belong to a SDU, and handles the detected PDU. This handling includes one or more of (a) accepting the detected PDU but discarding the data field element(s) of the respective PDU; (b) discarding the detected PDU including the data field element(s) of the respective PDU; (c) processing the detected PDU and forming a SDU from the data field element(s) of the respective PDU; or (d) handling the error as a radio link failure. The apparatus then operates according to the standard with respect to the received PDUs after handling the detected PDU. | 09-13-2012 |
20120236705 | MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A management apparatus is communicable with a plurality of detection apparatuses for detecting a loss of a packet transmitted from a source apparatus to a destination apparatus. The plurality of detection apparatuses are disposed on a communication path of a connection between the source apparatus and the destination apparatus. The management apparatus includes a processor. The processor acquires, upon receiving a notice of the loss of a packet from a first detection apparatus, the lost packet from a second detection apparatus disposed on a communication path between the source apparatus and the first detection apparatus. The processor transmits the lost packet to a third detection apparatus disposed on a communication path between the first detection apparatus and the destination apparatus. | 09-20-2012 |
20120236706 | Communication Protocol For Networked Devices - A communication protocol in a wireless network of a transceiver and a plurality of devices, in which at least one device is a bidirectional device, and in which one or more other devices can be unidirectional devices. The unidirectional device communicates with the transceiver in a unidirectional mode from the device to the transceiver and the bidirectional device communicates with the transceiver either in a bidirectional mode or in an unidirectional mode from the device to the transceiver. The communication protocol is configured to determine which transmission mode is to be used for each device. Various techniques are provided in order to optimize the time and energy spent to transmit information from one peer to the other. | 09-20-2012 |
20120243400 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING DEADLOCK IN DIRECT TUNNEL RELEASE - A system and method for preventing the occurrence of a signaling deadlock between a SGSN and a GGSN during an overlap of the functionality of the direct tunnel normal release and the direct tunnel error indication procedures is provided. An indication that the error is caused by a normal release of tunnel resources instructs the GGSN to invoke an error handling procedure to mitigate deadlock by delaying the operation of its error indication procedure. | 09-27-2012 |
20120243401 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal device ( | 09-27-2012 |
20120243402 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS, AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - To provide a mobile terminal apparatus, radio base station apparatus and radio communication method for enabling data signals and control information for a plurality of component carriers to be transmitted efficiently, a radio communication method of the invention is characterized in that a mobile terminal apparatus maps a retransmission response signal and another signal to different resources in a first mode for transmitting a retransmission response signal for each downlink CC of a plurality of downlink CCs, while mapping the retransmission response signal and another signal to the same resources in a second mode for transmitting a single retransmission response signal for a plurality of downlink CCs, and that the radio base station apparatus receives the uplink signal, preforms resource-demapping on each of the retransmission response signal and another signal mapped to different resources in the first mode, while performing resource-demapping on the retransmission response signal and another signal mapped to the same resources in the second mode, and demodulates the retransmission response signal. | 09-27-2012 |
20120250494 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COOPERATIVE TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORKS - User cooperation in wireless networks implemented on the Network Protocol layer level attains a higher stable throughput and improved transmission delay. The cooperation is designed between a set of source user nodes transmitting to a common destination, where users with channels providing a higher successful delivery probability, in addition to their own traffic, relay packets of other source users whose transmissions to the destination fails. Each source user node is provided with an ample queue buffer having capacity to accumulate packets inadvertently received from other users in the system in addition to its own packets. Ranking mechanism facilitates in determining the “quality” of wireless channels, and the Acknowledgement mechanism facilitates in coordination of the transmissions in the system. The nodes exchange information on the queues status, and decision is made by a scheduling controller on the priority of transmission. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250495 | METHOD OF REDUCING RETRANSMISSION OF DATA FRAME AND RECEIVING NODE THEREFOR - A method of reducing a retransmission of a data frame and a receiving node therefor continuously receiving N data frames generated by encoding K source data packets by erasure coding. Errors in the received N data frames are checked, and an ACK message transmitted informing that the source data packets are capable of being restored, when the number (R) of data frames not containing errors is equal to or greater than the number (K) of source data packets. An ACK message including the number (X) of data frames for which retransmission is to be requested is transmitted when the number (R) of data frames not containing errors is less than the number (K) of source data packets, as a result of checking for errors in the received N data frames. Despite errors in some of the data frames, data may be restored without requesting the retransmission of data frames. | 10-04-2012 |
20120250496 | LOAD DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, LOAD DISTRIBUTION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A load distribution of controllers is made possible in a combination of a switch and a controller which do not have a load distribution function independently, and in a combination of the switch and the controller that do not have a compatibility in the load distribution function due to a difference of makers. Specifically, in a system which controls a data flow flowing through the network by dynamically setting a delivery route of a packet to switches in the network by the controllers such as a server, the master controller is determined to the switch while notifying a connection from the switch to the plurality of controllers, by a proxy provided between the switch and the controller, and an inquiry message from the switch is transferred only to the master controller. A route data registration message is transmitted to the proxy from the master controller in response to the inquiry message from the switch. The route data registration message is transferred to all the switches which are dealt with the notice from the proxy. | 10-04-2012 |
20120257491 | Access Point Configuration Propagation - A method of access point configuration propagation includes receiving, at a controller, a connectivity request from a number of access points; with a master controller, creating a configuration for the access points; and sending configuration data based on the created configuration to a number of slave controllers. A master controller for propagating access point configurations within a wireless network system includes a processor that creates a configuration for each of a number of access points requesting connectivity within the wireless network system, and a data storage device that stores configuration data based on the created configuration in an access point configuration table. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257492 | DIGITAL RECEIVER AND CORRESPONDING DIGITAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM SERVER - The present invention concerns a receiver and an error correction method at a receiver, comprising the steps of receiving data information from a broadcast network in a sequence of packets, detecting a first packet within the sequence of packets being a corrupted packet, identifying a packet identifier and a sequence number of the first packet, requesting, on a second network, to receive a transport packet identified with the sequence number and comprising the first packet and receiving the first packet embedded in the transport packet, from the second network. | 10-11-2012 |
20120257493 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus includes an error detection unit conducting error detection on N packet data units received in N transmission processes; a first transmission unit transmitting an affirmative response signal or a first retransmission request signal depending on a result of the error detection; a storage unit storing an affirmatively responding packet for forwarding to an upper layer; a second transmission unit, if affirmatively responding packets are not consecutive, determining whether a missing packet must be retransmitted and transmitting a second retransmission request signal; and a forwarding unit reordering the packet data units and forwarding the packets in the storage unit to the upper layer. | 10-11-2012 |
20120263032 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RESOLVING IDENTIFIER CONFLICTS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Apparatus and methods of allocating identifiers in a communication system include receiving, at a first access point, a set of physical layer identifiers used by a plurality of access points, with assistance from an access terminal. The apparatus and methods further include detecting, relative to one of the plurality of access points, a conflicting physical layer identifier. Additionally, the apparatus and methods include selecting, at the first access point, a first physical layer identifier distinct from the conflicting physical layer identifier. | 10-18-2012 |
20120269053 | Co-Scheduling of Network Resource Provisioning and Host-to-Host Bandwidth Reservation on High-Performance Network and Storage Systems - A cross-domain network resource reservation scheduler configured to schedule a path from at least one end-site includes a management plane device configured to monitor and provide information representing at least one of functionality, performance, faults, and fault recovery associated with a network resource; a control plane device configured to at least one of schedule the network resource, provision local area network quality of service, provision local area network bandwidth, and provision wide area network bandwidth; and a service plane device configured to interface with the control plane device to reserve the network resource based on a reservation request and the information from the management plane device. Corresponding methods and computer-readable medium are also disclosed. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269054 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - A data transmission apparatus including a receiving unit for receiving transmitted packets; a priority decision unit; a retransmission packet storage unit; a retransmission instruction receiving unit for receiving a retransmission request from a terminal at the receiving end; a retransmission decision unit; a transmission queue management unit; and a transmission unit. | 10-25-2012 |
20120269055 | METHOD FOR DETECTING SECURITY ERROR IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND DEVICE OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - According to one embodiment, a method of performing a re-establishment procedure in a mobile communication system includes: receiving, by a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) entity, at least one PDCP data unit; performing, by the PDCP entity, an integrity check on the received at least one PDCP data unit; indicating, by the PDCP entity, an integrity check failure to a radio resource control (RRC) entity if the integrity check fails with regard to the received at least one PDCP data unit; and performing, by the RRC entity, a re-establishment procedure upon the indication by the PDCP entity of the integrity check failure, wherein the at least one PDCP data unit is for a control plane. | 10-25-2012 |
20120275292 | WIRELESS EEG DATA RECOVERY - A system and method can have an electroencephalographic (EEG) recording module and a host device. The EEG recording can have a memory module configured to record EEG signals from a patient and a wireless transceiver configured to wirelessly transmit the EEG signals as packets. The host device can have a wireless transceiver configured to wirelessly receive at least some of the packets transmitted by the recording module wireless transceiver and a processor configured to identify one or more missing packets. Upon a completion of transmission of the packets, the host device is configured to wirelessly transmit an identity of missing packets to the recording module wireless transceiver. Upon receiving the identity of the missing packets, the recording module wireless transceiver is configured to wirelessly transmit packets including the EEG signals corresponding to the missing packets to the host device. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275293 | METRO ETHERNET CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT ACCELERATION - In an Ethernet network element comprising at least one line interface element and a central processing unit (CPU) to control forwarding of data packets at the network element, a method comprising receiving continuity check messages (CCMs) at the at least one line interface element, and processing the CCMs in the at least one line interface element to provide continuity checks for connections to the network element without requiring processing of CCMs by the CPU. | 11-01-2012 |
20120275294 | RECOVERING FROM FAILURES WITHOUT IMPACT ON DATA TRAFFIC IN A SHARED BUS ARCHITECTURE - Methods of detecting and recovering from communication failures within an operating network switching device that is switching packets in a communication network, and associated structures. The communication failures addressed involve communications between the packet processors and a host CPU over a shared communications bus, e.g., PCI bus. The affected packet processor(s)—which may be all or a subset of the packet processors of the network switch—may be recovered without affecting hardware packet forwarding through the affected packet processors. This maximizes the up time of the network switching device. Other packet processor(s), if any, of the network switching device, which are not affected by the communication failure, may continue their normal packet forwarding, i.e., hardware forwarding that does not involve communications with the host CPU as well as forwarding or other operations that do involve communications with the host CPU. | 11-01-2012 |
20120281520 | SOFTROUTER PROTOCOL DISAGGREGATION - A SoftRouter architecture deconstructs routers by separating the control entities of a router from its forwarding components, enabling dynamic binding between them. In the SoftRouter architecture, control plane functions are aggregated and implemented on a few smart servers which control forwarding elements that are multiple network hops away. A dynamic binding protocol performs network-wide control plane failovers. Network stability is improved by aggregating and remotely hosting routing protocols, such as OSPF and BGP. This results in faster convergence, lower protocol messages processed, and fewer route changes following a failure. The SoftRouter architecture includes a few smart control entities that manage a large number of forwarding elements to provide greater support for network-wide control. In the SoftRouter architecture, routing protocols operate remotely at a control element and control one or more forwarding elements by downloading the forwarding tables, etc. into the forwarding elements. Intra-domain routing and inter-domain routing are also included. | 11-08-2012 |
20120281521 | SILENT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ROUTING IN A MESH NETWORK - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for sending a single cast frame from a first node to a second node in a mesh network; sending the single cast frame from the second node to a third node in a mesh network; using the first node to detect the single cast frame sent from the second node to the third node; and interpreting this detection within the first node as an acknowledgement of success in sending the single cast frame from the first node to the second node. An additional method described herein may send a second single cast from the second node to a third node in a mesh network, interpret detection of the second single class frame within the first node as an acknowledgement of success in sending the first single cast frame from the first node to the second node. | 11-08-2012 |
20120287772 | METHOD FOR PERFORMING SERIAL TRANSPORT COMMUNICATION, AND ASSOCIATED DEVICE - A method for performing serial transport communication is provided, where the method is utilized for performing communication between a plurality of devices, each of which provides a user with a plurality of wireless communication functions respectively complying with different wireless communication standards. The method includes: with regard to a first wireless communication function of the plurality of wireless communication functions, utilizing a serial transport protocol to perform communication between the plurality of devices through a transport bus; and with regard to a second wireless communication function of the plurality of wireless communication functions, utilizing the serial transport protocol to perform communication between the plurality of devices through the transport bus. An associated device is also provided. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287773 | Mechanism for alarm management of femto related systems to avoid alarm floods - A method of alarm management in a communications system having a number of Femto base stations ( | 11-15-2012 |
20120287774 | POWER AND CONNECTIVITY AWARE SWITCH - Systems, methods, and other embodiments associated with providing uninterrupted electrical power and data communications are described. One example method includes detecting primary electrical power loss to a network switch, and/or a loss of wired Internet connectivity to the network switch. The example method may also include controlling a backup power source to provide secondary electrical power to the network switch, and controlling a wireless access point to provide wireless Internet connectivity to the network switch. | 11-15-2012 |
20120287775 | AUTOMATIC RETRANSMISSION REQUEST CONTROL SYSTEM AND RETRANSMISSION METHOD IN MIMO-OFDM SYSTEM - An automatic retransmission request control system in an OFDM-MIMO communication system includes a retransmission mode selection part which selects a retransmission mode from among (a) a mode in which to transmit the data which are to be retransmitted, via the same antenna as in the previous transmission, while transmitting, at the same time, new data by use of an antenna via which no data retransmission is requested; (b) a mode in which to transmit the data, which are to be retransmitted, via an antenna via which no retransmission is requested, while transmitting new data via another antenna at the same time; (c) a mode in which to use STBC to retransmit the data via an antenna via which no retransmission is requested; and (d) a mode in which to use STBC to retransmit the data via all the available antennas. | 11-15-2012 |
20120294139 | NETWORK RELAY DEVICE AND NETWORK RELAY METHOD - A network relay device relays data in a layer 2 network. The network relay device includes first and second communication ports, a snooping module, a transfer information storage unit, a multicast sending module, a failure detector and a port adding module. The snooping module generates snooping information. The snooping information correlates the first communication port set to a multicast transfer port to a destination MAC address. The multicast sending module refers to the snooping information stored in the transfer information storage unit and sends a multicast frame received from the layer 2 network, from the correlated multicast transfer port. The failure detector detects a communication failure in the layer 2 network. The port adding module additionally, in response to detection of the communication failure by the failure detector, set the second communication port, in addition to the first communication port, to the multicast transfer port. | 11-22-2012 |
20120294140 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARED MESH PROTECTION SWITCHING - A method for protection switching in a shared node where protection resources of a plurality of end-to-end linear protection domain are shared is provided. The shared node receives a first protection switching event message notifying that a protection switching event occurs from a first node of a first end-to-end linear protection domain, and determines whether to prohibit protection switching on a second end-to-end linear protection domain by comparing a priority of the first end-to-end linear protection domain with a priority of the second end-to-end linear protection domain. | 11-22-2012 |
20120300611 | Soft Error Recovery for Converged Networks - Detecting and recovering from soft errors in a network comprising a first device. A first device receives a first data packet. Responsive to receiving a second data packet, the first device determines whether the two data packets are identical. Responsive to the determination that the two data packets are not identical, the first device discards the two data packets, and requests retransmission of the two data packets. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300612 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - There is provided a communication apparatus including a communication unit that receives first communication data transmitted from a transmitting apparatus to a first receiving apparatus through unicast and second communication data transmitted from the transmitting apparatus to a second receiving apparatus, respectively and a processing unit that processes processing data included in the received first communication data and second communication data. When there is missing data in either of first processing data included in the first communication data and second processing data included in the second communication data, the processing unit executes processing using the other processing data in which there is no missing data, and the processing unit does not make the communication unit transmit a reply with respect to external apparatuses. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300613 | Communication Failure Tolerant Distributed Kalman Filter - A method and system include a distributed network of filters having a topology corresponding to an interconnection map of a process to be controlled, each filter modeling a sub-process of the process. Each filter is interconnected to receive an input vector of process measurements corresponding to a local state of the process and to receive process variables. The filters are adapted to determine a communication failure and responsive to the communication failure, correlations of the local state with the state of subsystems estimated by filters that are not accessible due to the communication failure are set to zero and wherein a local state covariance is increased. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300614 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ERROR CORRECTION CIPHERING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for error correction deciphering of a receive apparatus in a mobile communication system includes receiving a Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) packet. The method also includes, when error correction ciphering is set, acquiring a partial Hyper Frame Number (HFN) from the PDCP packet. The method further includes comparing the partial HFN and the receive apparatus's own lower HFN of a constant bit count. The method still further includes, if the partial HFN and the receive apparatus's own lower HFN of the constant bit count are different from each other, performing an HFN correction function. | 11-29-2012 |
20120300615 | Implementing EPC in a Cloud Computer with OpenFlow Data Plane - A method implements a control plane of an evolved packet core (EPC) of a long term evolution (LTE) network in a cloud computing system. A cloud manager monitors resource utilization of each control plane module and the control plane traffic handled by each control plane module. The cloud manager detects a threshold level of resource utilization or traffic load for one of the plurality of control plane modules of the EPC. A new control plane module is initialized as a separate virtual machine by the cloud manager in response to detecting the threshold level. The new control plane module signals the plurality of network elements in the data plane to establish flow rules and actions to establish differential routing of flows in the data plane using the control protocol, wherein flow matches are encoded using an extensible match structure in which the flow match is encoded as a type-length-value (TLV). | 11-29-2012 |
20120300616 | Methods and Apparatuses for Resource Mapping for Multiple Transport Blocks Over Wireless Backhaul Link - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, a method comprises scheduling at a wireless network node one or more resources for an uplink backhaul link of a relay node; and applying a mapping scheme to map at least one buffer content to at least one transport block, wherein the mapping scheme comprises determining a transport block index indicator to identify a mapping between the buffer content and the transport block; inserting the transport block index indicator into a resource grant; and transmitting the resource grant to the relay node on a downlink control channel. | 11-29-2012 |
20120307621 | SYSTEM, APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR REDUCING RECOVERY FAILURE DELAY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which blocking of LTE access due to Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Packet Data Network (PDN) recovery failure is prevented. The blocking may be caused by detach and immediate attach to LTE because of internal or other commonly executed network procedures. Recovery procedures may be modified to avoid prolong periods when access to the PDN is prevented based on long backoff delays set by an operator for PDN failure conditions. Based on a reason for failure to reconnect, a backoff period may be selected from an operator define minimum backoff time and a locally configured minimum backoff time. | 12-06-2012 |
20120307622 | MAC ARCHITECTURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS SUPPORTING H-ARQ - A medium access control-high speed (MAC-hs) comprises a hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) device configured to receive data blocks over a wideband-code division multiple access (W-CDMA) high speed-downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH). The H-ARQ device generates an acknowledgement (ACK) or negative acknowledgement (NACK) for each said data block received. Each received data block having a transmission sequence number. The H-ARQ device receives a new transmission instead of a pending retransmission at any time. At least one reordering device has an input configured to receive an output of the H-ARQ device and the at least one reordering device configured to reorder the received data blocks based on each received data block's transmission sequence number (TSN). Received data blocks are immediately forwarded for processing for higher layers when the received data blocks are received in sequence. | 12-06-2012 |
20120314562 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING FALLBACK TO A SECOND DATA SERVICE BASED ON THE PRESENCE OF FALLBACK CONDITIONS ASSOCIATED WITH ESTABLISHMENT OF A DATA CONTEXT WITH A FIRST DATA SERVICE - Aspects disclosed herein relate to enabling fallback to a second data service based on whether one or more fallback conditions are present before or during establishing a data context with a first data service. In one example, a UE may be configured to determine whether one or more fallback conditions are present before or during establishing a data session with a first data service. The UE may be further configured to prohibit further attempts to establish a data context to access the first data service based on the determination of the presence of at least one of the one or more fallback conditions. Some aspects disclosed herein relate to enabling fallback to a HRPD data service based on whether one or more fallback conditions are present before or during establishing a data context with an eHRPD data service. | 12-13-2012 |
20120314563 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CALIBRATING RECIPROCITY ERRORS - The present invention provides a method for reciprocity error calibration, comprising steps of: measuring downlink channel response H | 12-13-2012 |
20120320731 | Power Distribution System Communication System and Method - A power distribution system may incorporate a network communication capability. The network communication capability may be configured or may be configurable as a multi-tiered, mesh network. The network may have two tiers of fixed node meshes (tier 2 and tier 3) and one tier of mobile nodes mesh (tier 1). Each tier and each node of each tier has distinct characteristics relative to application, type of routing, transmit power control, physical configuration and message priorities. The configuration and the characteristics of the network change based upon varying application and communication needs of the network. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320732 | MULTICAST BULK TRANSFER SYSTEM - A data transfer system and method are described for providing transfer of data over a network between a sender and a plurality of receivers. Data is sent over a network to the plurality of receivers by the sender at a specified rate regardless of data loss. A receiver that identifies a lost block of data transmits a retransmission request to the sender. The sender responds to one or more retransmission requests by transmitting a repair packet to all receivers that contains blocks of data for which retransmission requests have been received. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320733 | REDUCING EVOLVED PACKET CORE INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVICE DISCONNECTS DURING INTER-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY HANDOVER - During inter-radio access technology (IRAT) handover between LTE and eHRPD technologies, Internet protocol (IP) service continuity at a user equipment (UE) may be maintained. Thus, a method, an apparatus, and a computer program product are provided for maintaining the IP service continuity during IRAT handover from an SRAT to a TRAT within an evolved packet core (EPC)—capable region. The apparatus attempts to transfer an EPC context to a TRAT, determines that a failure occurs when attempting to transfer the EPC context to the TRAT, and attempts to maintain at least one IP service continuity within the EPC context according to the failure. The attempt to maintain may include an attempt to maintain an entire EPC context or a set of parameters including at least one of an IP address, a domain name system (DNS) address, a proxy call session control function (P-CSCF) address, or a quality of service (QoS). | 12-20-2012 |
20120320734 | APPARATUS FOR CONSTRUCTING RING NETWORK - A first communication apparatus to be coupled to a second communication apparatus and a third communication apparatus via a ring network, including: a first port to coupled to the ring network; and a second port to coupled to the ring network; wherein the first port and the second port is set to receive a control frame from the second communication apparatus and the third communication apparatus, and either the first port or the second port is set to be disabled to relay a user frame. | 12-20-2012 |
20120320735 | SCATTER AND GATHER SCHEME FOR AGGREGATING MULTIPLE HIGH SPEED POINT-TO-POINT INTERFACES - A mechanism for combining plurality of point-to-point data channels to provide a high-bandwidth data channel having an aggregated bandwidth equivalent to the sum of the bandwidths of the data channels used is provided. A mechanism for scattering segments of incoming data packets, called data chunks, among available point-to-point data channel interfaces is further provided. A decision as to the data channel interface over which to send a data chunk to can be made by examining a fullness status of a FIFO coupled to each interface. An identifier of a data channel on which to expect a subsequent data chunk can be provided in a control word associated with a present chunk of data. Using such information in control words, a receive-end interface can reassemble packets by looking to the control word in a currently processing data chunk to find a subsequent data chunk. | 12-20-2012 |
20120327758 | Method, system and device for processing release failure of packet data network - The present disclosure provides a method, system and device for processing the release failure of a PDN. The method includes: a UE, when the UE determines that it currently connects with at least two PDNs, sends a PDN release request message to an EPC and then receives a release rejection message from the EPC, wherein a rejection reason is that the last PDN connection is not allowed to be released; and the UE releases each PDN connection with the EPC and then resets up a PDN connection with the EPC. Through the technical solution, the PDN connection information of the UE and that of the EPC are kept consistent, so that resources are saved and the reliability of data transmission is improved. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327759 | Internet Group Management Protocol Version Three for Quality of Service Support - The disclosure includes a method comprising: receiving, by a first network element, a first communication from a client device, wherein the first communication comprises a multicast channel membership query report and QoS data. The disclosure also includes a method comprising: receiving, by a first network element, a first communication from a client device, wherein the first communication comprises a multicast channel membership query report and QoS data. The disclosure also includes an apparatus comprising: a client device connected to a network element and a network via the first network element, wherein the client device is configured to send a multicast channel membership report indicating the client device wishes to receive a multicast channel communication and indicating requested QoS data relating to the multicast channel communication. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327760 | Compressed Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request Feedback for Device to Device Cluster Communications - A method can include receiving at a cluster head, a multicast/broadcast packet from a base station. The method can also include monitoring, at the cluster head, to detect whether any members of a cluster of the cluster head responds to the multicast/broadcast packet with a negative acknowledgment directed to the cluster head. The method can further include, when a result of the monitoring is no detection of any negative acknowledgments, and the cluster head successfully received the multicast/broadcast packet, sending, by the cluster head, a general acknowledgment of the multicast/broadcast packet to the base station. | 12-27-2012 |
20120327761 | RECEIVING APPARATUS, RECEIVING METHOD, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A receiving apparatus includes a first detecting unit that performs error detection on a packet received from a transmitter, a second detecting unit that performs error detection on each block, of a predetermined size, into which the packet is divided, and a retransmission requesting unit that controls a retransmission request for the packet with respect to the transmitter on the basis of a detection result from the first detecting unit and a detection result from the second detecting unit. | 12-27-2012 |
20130003523 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO RESOURCE CONTROL PROCEDURES - A system and method for addressing RLC unrecoverable errors experienced by User Equipment (UE) in a wireless network help the network to resolve the errors without shifting the UE into an Idle mode and dropping voice calls. A measurement event provides the buffer occupancy and identifies the affected radio bearer to the network. If the state of the bearer is not changed, the UE provides a Signaling Connection Release Indication message or a Radio Bearer Release Indication message to the network, the latter message identifying the radio bearer to be released without taking down the entire signaling connection for the domain. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003524 | Selective Caching in a Packet Network and Packet Loss Repair Using Selective Caching - The invention relates to selective caching in a packet network and to packet loss repair in a packet network using selective caching of packets. The invention provides a method of selective caching at an intermediate node in a packet network during a packet transfer session between a sending node and at least one receiving node via the intermediate node in which packet caching is initiated depending on at least one service quality factor related to the packet transfer service provided by a transfer path between the intermediate node and at least one receiving node during the transfer session. The invention also provides a method of packet loss repair using packets cached at an intermediate node. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003525 | COMMUNICATION NODE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Communication node including a transmission equipment which communicates user data with transmission equipment of an adjacent node, and a controller which communicates a message with a controller of the adjacent node and which manages the transmission equipment of its own node, wherein: a controller of the node detects existence or nonexistence of fault of a controller of the adjacent node on the basis of situation of receiving a message sent from the controller of the adjacent node; when the controller of the node detects the fault of the controller of the adjacent node, the controller of the node issues a state reference notice to a transmission equipment of its own node and checks existence or nonexistence of fault alert detection; in a case where the fault alert detection of the transmission equipment of the node does not exist, the controller of the node maintains a path state of the node. | 01-03-2013 |
20130003526 | MULTIPLEXING SCHEMES FOR OFDMA - Methods and systems are provided for allocating resources including VoIP (voice over Internet Protocol) and Non-VoIP resources. In some embodiments, multiplexing schemes are provided for use with OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing access) systems, for example for use in transmitting VoIP traffic. In some embodiments, various HARQ (Hybrid Automatic request) techniques are provided for use with OFDMA systems. In various embodiments, there are provided methods and systems for dealing with issues such as Handling non-full rate vocoder frames, VoIP packet jitter handling, VoIP capacity increasing schemes, persistent and non-persistent assignment of resources in OFDMA systems. | 01-03-2013 |
20130010587 | Methods and Arrangements in a Telecommunication System - The present invention relates to a method and arrangement for controlling re-transmission in a user equipment supporting uplink spatial multiplexing. The method comprises the steps of
| 01-10-2013 |
20130016600 | NETWORK APPARATUS AND METHOD OF RETRANSMITTING FRAME USING THE SAMEAANM HWANG; Sung HoAACI SuwonAACO KRAAGP HWANG; Sung Ho Suwon KRAANM Park; Joun SupAACI SuwonAACO KRAAGP Park; Joun Sup Suwon KRAANM Kim; Ki HongAACI SuwonAACO KRAAGP Kim; Ki Hong Suwon KRAANM Park; Chul GyunAACI YonginAACO KRAAGP Park; Chul Gyun Yongin KRAANM Song; Tae WonAACI SeoulAACO KRAAGP Song; Tae Won Seoul KRAANM Pack; Sang HeonAACI SeoulAACO KRAAGP Pack; Sang Heon Seoul KR - There is provided a network apparatus capable of effectively retransmitting a frame in a frame aggregation environment, and a method of retransmitting a frame using the same. The network apparatus includes: a transmitting node broadcasting a plurality of data frames in a frame aggregation environment; a receiving node receiving the plurality of broadcast data frames and broadcasting a reception result; and at least one relay node receiving and storing at least a portion of the plurality of broadcast data frames and transmitting, together with the transmitting node, a data frame for which retransmission is required to the receiving node according to a calculated transmission success rate when the reception result from the receiving node is a retransmission request. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016601 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING A CIRCUIT-SWITCHED VOICE CALL IN A MULTI-RAB WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IN AN AREA OF WEAK COVERAGE - An apparatus and a method are provided for improving user experience in a multi-radio access bearer (multi-RAB) wireless communication system. After a user equipment establishes a circuit-switched communication link and a packet-switched communication link with a core network, it may receive an indication of an error associated with the packet-switched communication link. Here, if the value of a timer such as the RAB re-establishment timer T314 has a predetermined value (e.g., 0), the user equipment may release the packet-switched communication link, and maintain the circuit-switched communication link. The packet-switched communication link may then be re-established. In this fashion, errors that may occur on the data call need not interrupt a voice call. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016602 | SIMPLIFIED SIGNALING FOR SMALL DATA TRANSMISSIONS - A signaling procedure for establishing and terminating connections for small data transmissions (SDTs) by wireless devices. A wireless device sends an access request message to a serving wireless access node on a random access channel (RACH). The access request message includes an indication that the access is for a SDT. The access request message includes the amount of data that will be transmitted as part of the SDT. The wireless access node sends an assignment message to immediately assign radio resources to the wireless device without further signaling needed for the SDT to begin. When the wireless device begins the SDT, the first data block is coded and transmitted according to a first predetermined coding scheme. If there are any subsequent data blocks, the wireless device includes an information element in the header of the first data block to indicate the coding scheme for the subsequent data blocks. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016603 | MULTIPLEXING SCHEMES FOR OFDMA - Methods and systems are provided for allocating resources including VoIP (voice over Internet Protocol) and Non-VoIP resources. In some embodiments, multiplexing schemes are provided for use with OFDMA (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing access) systems, for example for use in transmitting VoIP traffic. In some embodiments, various HARQ (Hybrid Automatic request) techniques are provided for use with OFDMA systems. In various embodiments, there are provided methods and systems for dealing with issues such as Handling non-full rate vocoder frames, VoIP packet jitter handling, VoIP capacity increasing schemes, persistent and non-persistent assignment of resources in OFDMA systems. | 01-17-2013 |
20130016604 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION TO SUPPORT UPLINK MULTIPLE ANTENNA TRANSMISSION - The present invention relates to a method for transmitting control information regarding uplink multiple antenna transmission may comprise the steps of: transmitting DCI for scheduling the uplink transmission of a plurality of data blocks through a PDCCH; receiving the plurality of data blocks scheduled by the DCI; transmitting information which indicates positive acknowledgement or negative acknowledgement to each of the plurality of received data blocks through the PHICH; and receiving retransmission for the negative acknowledged data blocks. When the number of the negative-acknowledged data blocks is not equal to the number data blocks indicated in the PDCCH, a pre-coding matrix, which is for the number of transmission layers equivalent to that of layers corresponding to the negative-acknowledged data blocks, may be used for retransmission. | 01-17-2013 |
20130021896 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE FOR PROTECTING MULTICAST IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method, a system, and a device for protecting multicast in a communication network. The technical solution of the present invention is: In a communication multicast network, a main node and a backup node serve as root nodes to generate two multicast trees simultaneously; the multicast tree that uses the backup node as a root node is set to be in a silent state; when the network is faulty, and the current main multicast tree is unable to forward multicast packets to all leaf nodes in the multicast tree, the silent state of the backup multicast tree is canceled and the backup multicast tree starts forwarding the multicast packets. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021897 | RETRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and discloses a retransmission method and apparatus, and a communication system. The method includes: after sending two channel-coded codewords in initial transmission, receiving a retransmission indication, where the retransmission indication includes an identifier of one channel-coded codeword to be retransmitted; according to a preset phase of each symbol, determining a precoding matrix of each symbol of the one channel-coded codeword to be retransmitted, where a phase relationship of each symbol is fixed; and after coding, by using the precoding matrix, each symbol of the one channel-coded codeword to be retransmitted, transmitting the coded symbol through an antenna. Through the present invention, a guarantee can be provided for retransmission success of a UE. | 01-24-2013 |
20130021898 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MIMO) TRANSMISSION - The present description relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and apparatus for uplink multiple input multiple output (MIMO) transmission. A method for performing an uplink MIMO transmission according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises the following steps: transmitting, from a first subframe, a first data block and a second data block through a first HARQ process and a second HARQ process, respectively; receiving, at a second subframe, uplink scheduling control information on the first data block and control information which indicates inactivation of the second data block; setting HARQ feedback information on the second data block to an ACK state; and performing retransmission of the first data block from a third subframe on the basis of the uplink scheduling control information on the first data block. Retransmission of the second data block may not be performed until uplink scheduling control information on the second data block is received. | 01-24-2013 |
20130028069 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RADIO RESOURCES MANAGEMENT IN MULTI-RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGY WIRELESS SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatus for performing wireless communication in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) configured for multi-radio access technology (RAT) operation are disclosed. A method includes the WTRU wirelessly communicating information on a first operating frequency according to a first RAT. The WTRU also wirelessly communicates information on a second operating frequency according to a second RAT. | 01-31-2013 |
20130033978 | Source Alive Route Injection - Multiple redundant sources for a datastream can be established in a network, where the redundant sources are configured with the same source address. One of the redundant sources provides the datastream to a receiver of a multicast group. If the redundant source fails, another redundant source can be used in its place, ensuring the receiver continues to receive the datastream. A routing element coupled to a redundant source monitors the redundant source for failure and informs the rest of the network of the status of the coupled redundant source. The routing element can inform other routing elements of the status by advertising or withdrawing a route that reaches the coupled redundant source, which the other routing elements can use to update their routing tables. | 02-07-2013 |
20130033979 | MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS, RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided are a mobile terminal apparatus, a radio base station apparatus and a radiocommunication method, capable of saving PHICH resources enough and realizing effective retransmission control of uplink SU-MIMO. The radio communication method of the present invention is characterized in that a radio base station apparatus receives signals of plural codewords, when there is an error in each of the codewords, generates a one-bit negative response physical HARQ indicator channel signal and transmits the physical HARQ indicator channel signal, and a mobile terminal apparatus receives the physical HARQ indicator channel signal and transmits retransmission signals of all the codewords to the radio base station apparatus based on the negative response physical HARQ indicator channel signal. | 02-07-2013 |
20130039166 | HIERARCHICAL NETWORK FAILURE HANDLING IN A CLUSTERED NODE ENVIRONMENT - According to one aspect of the present disclosure, a method and technique for hierarchical network failure handling in a clustered node environment is disclosed. The method includes: detecting a network failure by a node in a cluster, the cluster having plural nodes arranged in a hierarchy, wherein the network failure is associated with a subordinate node in the hierarchy to the detecting node; communicating the network failure from the detecting node to a superior node in the hierarchy; determining whether the network failure affects nodes higher than the detecting node in the hierarchy; and responsive to determining that the network failure does not affect nodes higher than the detecting node in the hierarchy, the detecting node initiating a protocol to expel the subordinate node from the cluster. | 02-14-2013 |
20130039167 | DATA DRIVEN CONNECTION FAULT MANAGEMENT (DDCFM) IN CFM MAINTENANCE POINTS - A Connection Fault Management (CFM) maintenance point and method for providing Data Driven Connection Fault Management (DDCFM) in CFM maintenance points in a communication network. A Reflection Responder, an REM Receiver, and a Decapsulator Responder are implemented in existing CFM maintenance points. The Reflection Responder selects frames to be reflected, mirrors the selected frames if a Continuation option is set, and encapsulates the selected frames with Return Frame Message (RFM) OpCode. The RFM Receiver sends received RFM frames to an analyzer if addressed to the maintenance point and otherwise to a passive multiplexer, The Decapsulator Responder decapsulates Send Frame Message (SFM) frames and sends decapsulated frames toward the destination specified in each frame. | 02-14-2013 |
20130044582 | CONTROL OF END-TO-END DELAY FOR DELAY SENSITIVE IP TRAFFICS USING FEEDBACK CONTROLLED ADAPTIVE PRIORITY SCHEME - When transporting delay-sensitive traffics such as voice, video and radar data over Internet Protocol (IP), control of end-to-end delay becomes a challenge. Typical approaches tie up bandwidths for entire duration of call. Second thing they do, is prioritization of certain classes over others, to control queuing delays, but this prioritization, remains at class-level and does not go to individual session-levels. As a result certain sessions within a class get more delay than others. Depending upon situation, it can cause adverse effects to certain QoS sessions. In our invention we have developed an intelligent priority scheme which adapts serving priorities of sessions to control ETE delay of each individual QoS session. Priority adapting mechanism is based on feedback control which measures ETE delay of QoS session at destination node and broadcasts it to all nodes along the route of the session to adapt session's priorities to control ETE delay. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044583 | Method, System and Program Product for Processing Requests - A method, system and program product comprises queuing a request. The request is transmitted to a server in which the server queues a response, determines if the request is out of sequence, transmits an acknowledgment and an out of order response, and transmits an executed response. Missing requests are retransmitted to the server in which the server asynchronously transmits executed responses. Executed responses are received and removed from the queuing. A response receipt confirmation is transmitted to the server in which the server removes queued responses and processing of requests in order of transmission and detection/retransmission of missing requests is enabled. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044584 | Data Transfer Method - A data transfer method having a data retransmission function, in which a sending side saves data that was sent in memory, a receiving side uses a transmission confirmation signal to request the sending side to retransmit the data when the data was not properly received, then monitors the elapsed time, and when the data is not retransmitted after the elapsed time has exceeded a set time, uses a transmission confirmation signal again to request that the data be retransmitted, and where in response to that transmission confirmation signal, the sending side retransmits the saved data to the receiving side. | 02-21-2013 |
20130044585 | INTEGRATED REPEATER FOR INTEGRATEDLY RELAYING VARIOUS TYPES OF COMMUNICATION SIGNALS, AND INTEGRATED RELAY SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an integrated repeater and an integrated relay system. The integrated repeater of the present invention receives a signal from a main repeater for relaying signals transmitted from upper devices, and comprises a demultiplexer configured to demultiplex the multiplexed signal of an Ethernet signal and a mobile communication signal received from the main repeater, and separate the signals into the mobile communication signal and the Ethernet signal; a first converter configured to convert the mobile communication signal separated from the demultiplexer into a radio frequency (RF) signal, and transmit the converted RF signal; a second converter configured to convert the Ethernet signal separated from the demultiplexer into a wireless LAN signal, and transmit the converted wireless LAN signal; and a switching unit configured to deliver a signal received from the main repeater to either the demultiplexer or the second converter, depending on whether a fault of the mobile communication signal is generated. | 02-21-2013 |
20130051215 | RELAY DUALIZATION APPARATUS - Provided is a relay dualization apparatus, in a substation automation system including at least one or more upper units and at least one or more lower units, the apparatus including a plurality of first relays receiving a power data from the lower unit using a predetermined communication method, and transmitting the power data to the upper unit, and receiving a control command from the upper unit and transmitting the control command to the lower unit, and a second relay performing communications with the plurality of first relays using the communication method to replace a relay that has generated an error in the plurality of relays. | 02-28-2013 |
20130058206 | SLOTTING OF LAST GASP COMMUNICATIONS - A commodity delivery system. The system includes a plurality of commodity delivery devices. The plurality of commodity delivery devices are configured to at least one of transport the commodity, modify the commodity, and monitor the commodity. A subset of the plurality of commodity delivery devices is further configured to receive a beacon from a network device, designate a plurality of transmission time slots based on the beacon, the transmission time slots synchronized for all of the plurality of commodity delivery devices, detect an error condition, select a transmission time slot following the detection of the error condition, and transmit a last gasp message during the selected transmission time slot. | 03-07-2013 |
20130058207 | SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT - Disclosed is a semiconductor integrated circuit capable of efficiently performing debugging. The semiconductor integrated circuit includes a distributing part distributing received packets according to destinations of the packets, a plurality of accumulating parts sequentially accumulating the packets distributed thereto, respectively, a plurality of relaying parts supplying the packets accumulated in one of the accumulating parts to corresponding one of the processing parts, respectively, and an output controlling part assigning the relay permission command to one relaying part designated by a relay permission packet from among the relaying parts when a packet distributed thereto from the distributing part is determined as the relay permission packet. | 03-07-2013 |
20130064066 | UPDATING A SWITCH SOFTWARE IMAGE IN A DISTRIBUTED FABRIC PROTOCOL (DFP) SWITCHING NETWORK - A switching network has a plurality of switches including at least a switch and a managing master switch. At the managing master switch, a first capability vector (CV) is received from the switch. The managing master switch determines whether the first CV is compatible with at least a second CV in a network membership data structure that records CVs of multiple switches in the switching network. In response to detecting an incompatibility, the managing master switch initiates an image update to an image of the switch. In response to a failure of the image update at the switch, the switch boots utilizing a mini-DC module that reestablishes communication between the switch with the managing master switch and retries the image update. | 03-14-2013 |
20130070581 | Controlling Data Transmission - A method of controlling data transmission at a transmitter, the transmitter comprising a link controller that reads data from a buffer for transmission, the transmitter operating according to a protocol in which it is mandatory for the link controller to retransmit a packet until that packet is acknowledged, the method including, at the link controller: transmitting a data packet, the payload of the data packet comprising the first data read from the buffer; determining to retransmit the data packet due to lack of receipt of an acknowledgment that the data packet was received; determining whether the first data in the buffer is still timely; and if the first data in the buffer is not still timely, deleting the first data from the buffer and replacing it with second data, and retransmitting the data packet wherein the payload of the retransmitted data packet comprises the second data read from the buffer. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070582 | METHOD OF SYNCHRONIZATION AND LINK ACCESS FOR LOW ENERGY CRITICAL INFRASTRUCTURE MONITORING NETWORK - The present invention provides a time synchronization method in a low energy critical infrastructure monitoring network and a coordinate access method using a superframe. According to the exemplary embodiments of the present invention, time synchronization can be promptly and efficiently performed in the low energy critical infrastructure monitoring network, a link access method with three grades of link access can be provided, and a frame structure and a process for link generation, link management, and extended connection are provided. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070583 | Network-Relay Signaling for Downlink Transparent Relay - In a method of providing downlink retransmissions to a mobile station in a wireless communication network, the wireless communication network comprising a base station communicatively linked to a transparent relay station, the base station receives a request for a retransmission from the mobile station; schedules resources for the retransmission; signals scheduling information for the retransmission to the transparent relay station via a control link; and the transparent relay station receives the scheduling information for the retransmission on the control link; and sends the retransmission to the mobile station in a retransmit subframe on a retransmit frequency band. | 03-21-2013 |
20130070584 | NETWORK IMPAIRMENT UNIT FOR CONCURRENT DELAY AND PACKET QUEUE IMPAIRMENTS - An impairment unit and method of emulating network impairments is disclosed. The impairment unit may receive network traffic and transmit impaired network traffic. Received packets may be stored in a memory physically partitioned into a plurality of memory blocks and logically partitioned into a plurality of buffers. At least one buffer may be associated with each of a plurality of predefined impairment classes. One or more buffer may be a limited-length queue. Memory blocks may be assigned to buffers on an as-needed basis. A classifier may determine respective impairment classes of the received packets. A number of memory blocks assigned to each limited-length queue may be limited to a respective predetermined maximum. An enqueue manager may store each received packet and associated metadata in the buffer associated with the respective impairment class. The enqueue manager may discard received packets if the associated limited-length queue is full. | 03-21-2013 |
20130083646 | Methods and Apparatus for Managing Resource Access Attempts - Systems and techniques for management of network resource access attempts. In response to identifying that a radio bearer has failed, a radio resource associated with the radio bearer is released, either through request by a user equipment or direction by the network. Attempts at regaining access to the released radio bearer are inhibited during conditions recognized as potentially leading to excessively frequent unsuccessful attempts. Inhibition of attempts at regaining access to the released radio bearer may comprise imposing a backoff timer to inhibit reestablishing access to the released radio link for the duration specified by the backoff timer. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083647 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING UNICAST TRAFFIC DURING ETHERNET RING FAILOVER - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for recovering unicast traffic during an Ethernet ring failover, solves the problem of interruption of the unicast traffic during the Ethernet ring failover. In embodiments of the present invention, because a network switch sets the broadcast flags of the ports in the loop of the Ethernet ring to the set state before completion of flushing of the MAC address table, if the broadcast flag of the destination port corresponding to the destination address in a unicast packet received by the network switch is in the set state, the network switch broadcasts the unicast packet. Therefore, the network switch in the loop of the Ethernet ring can recover the interrupted unicast traffic without waiting for completion of flushing of the MAC address table, thereby implementing recovering the unicast traffic during an Ethernet ring failover. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083648 | Receiver with Collision Detection and Method Therefor - A method of handling a collision event between a first and second transmission includes detecting a collision event between the first and second transmissions while processing the first transmission at a receiver. The method further includes halting decoding of the first transmission in response to detecting the collision, adjusting receive parameters to receive the second transmission, and detecting a preamble portion of the second transmission using the adjusted receive parameters. | 04-04-2013 |
20130083649 | CELL-TO-WIFI SWITCHER - A user is enabled to seamlessly switch between networks and/or devices, during a content delivery session. A network change detection component can determine when the user switches from one network to another. Further, a context management component is employed that stores a context state of the content delivery session on the first network when a change in network is detected. The context state is employed to seamlessly resume content delivery on the newly connected network and continue the content delivery session. | 04-04-2013 |
20130088951 | MULTICAST PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD, RELATED DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a multicast packet transmission method, and also a related device and system. A multicast packet transmission method may include receiving a first Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) protocol packet; creating an active multicast topology according to the first PIM protocol packet; receiving a second PIM protocol packet; creating a standby multicast topology according to the second PIM protocol packet, where the second PIM protocol packet carries a standby multicast identifier; setting the standby multicast topology to a disabled state; determining the active multicast topology as faulty; and enabling the standby multicast topology after the active topology is determined as faulty. | 04-11-2013 |
20130094346 | CUSTOMER FACING INTERFACE POWER CYCLING OF WIRELESS TERMINALS - Systems and methods are described for configuring customer premises equipment in a wireless network in response to reconnection of subscriber station to a base station. A set of rules is provided that governs configuration of a network interface based in part on whether the interface connects to a different base station after reconnection. Reconfiguration may include cycling power of the network interface and the decision to cycle power may be based on network configuration determined after the loss of communication. This decision can be made after the loss of communication and after the network interface is reconnected to the wireless network through the same or a different base station. The rules may be processed by a combination of subscriber equipment, network interface and base station. Power may be cycled responsive to a message transmitted by the one base station to the network interface. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094347 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RE-ROUTING CALLS IN A PACKET NETWORK DURING FAILURES - Method and apparatus for re-routing a call in a packet network during failures is described. In one example, a failure condition is detected for a destination endpoint for the call. At least one alternative endpoint address is identified from an alternative routing plan registered with the packet network in response to the failure condition. For example, various alternative routing plans may be registered with the packet network and stored in a database. Each of the alternative routing plans may include alternative endpoint address data for a plurality of endpoint devices. The database may be queried using the destination endpoint as an index value and the at least one alternative endpoint address may be retrieved. The call is then routed to the at least one alternative endpoint address. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094348 | SWITCH FABRIC MANAGEMENT - Techniques are disclosed for managing a switch fabric. In one embodiment, a server system is provided that includes a midplane, one or more server cards, switch modules and a management controller. The midplane may include a fabric interconnect for a switch fabric. The one or more server cards and the switch modules may be operatively connected to the midplane. The switch modules may be configured to switch network traffic for the one or more server cards. The management controller may be configured to manage the switch modules via the fabric interconnect. | 04-18-2013 |
20130094349 | TERMINAL APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, RETRANSMISSION METHOD AND RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD - This invention provides a terminal apparatus that can suppress the quality degradation caused by a propagation path variation when implementing a retransmission control method using non-adaptive HARQ in a wireless communication system utilizing the MIMO communication technique. In this apparatus, a number-of-retransmissions counting unit ( | 04-18-2013 |
20130100795 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING FAILURE AND RETRY MECHANISMS DURING eHRPD PRE-REGISTRATION - Aspects disclosed herein relate to effectively handling failure and retry mechanisms during pre-registration for an eHRPD optimized handover. In one example, a UE may be equipped to detect one or more instances of failure during a pre-registration procedure as part of an optimized handover process. The UE may further be equipped to perform one or more pre-registration retry processes based on the detected one or more instances of failure. In one aspect, the one or more instances of failure may include any combination of a permanent LTE connection failure, a temporary LTE connection failure, a session negotiation failure, a virtual connection failure when bringing up a data call, a link control protocol (LCP) failure, etc. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100796 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method for improving discontinuous reception for a user equipment of a wireless communication system includes separately managing retransmission reception time limits of a plurality of downlink hybrid automatic repeat request (DL HARQ) processes when the discontinuous reception is used in the plurality of DL HARQ processes. | 04-25-2013 |
20130100797 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ADJUSTING THE WINDOW SIZE OF A TCP PACKET THROUGH NETWORK ELEMENTS - A system for adjusting the window size of a TCP packet on a packet network including a sending network element in communication with a receiving network element for transmitting and receiving data packets between the sending network element and the receiving network element on the packet network, wherein at least one of the sending network element and the receiving network element is configured to determine network performance information of the packet network; and adjust the window size of the TCP packet based on the network performance information. A method for adjusting the window size of a TCP packet on a packet network is also included. | 04-25-2013 |
20130107696 | LOCATION-BASED ROUTING APPARATUS AND METHOD USING LQI | 05-02-2013 |
20130114394 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMIC OPERATIONS, ADMINISTRATION, AND MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods with dynamic Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) and Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) that enable dynamic configurations to avoid limitations associated with static reconfigurations. Variously, a network, a method, and a network element are configured to implement a dynamic CFM method for dynamic notifications and actions taken based thereon between Maintenance End Points (MEPs). The systems and methods may also include a CCM attribute adjustment method between two MEPs, a CCM suspension and/or resumption method between two MEPs, and a MEP auto-discovery and leaving method. Advantageously, the systems and methods may be utilized in a variety of contexts including controlled maintenance, in-service software upgrades, network congestion, discovery of new remote MEPs, and the like to enable dynamic configurations between MEPs. The systems and methods may also apply to Carrier Ethernet, Multiprotocol Label Switching-Transport Profile (MPLS-TP), and the like. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114395 | DATA TRANSMISSION METHODS AND APPRATUSES USING THE SAME - A mobile communication device with a wireless module and a controller module is provided. The wireless module performs wireless transceiving to and from a service network. The controller module determines a data transmission parameter associated with a first protocol layer according to a link quality of the service network and a number of transmission layers supported for spatial multiplexing associated with a second protocol layer. Particularly, the first protocol layer is hierarchically higher than the second protocol layer in a multi-layer protocol stack. Also, the controller module detects a transfer failure rate for data transmission using the data transmission parameter via the wireless module, and reduces the data transmission parameter by a predetermined ratio in response to the transfer failure rate being higher than a predetermined threshold. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114396 | High Performance Virtual Converged Enhanced Ethernet With Persistent State Flow Control - Maintaining bandwidth in links betweens servers and storage arrays comprising a device. The device establishes the links. The device identifies a first link from the links. The first link has a high response time. The device transmits a plurality of data packets on the first link. Each data packet is associated with a corresponding acknowledgment (ACK). The transmission is performed without waiting for the corresponding ACK to be received. The device tracks the ACK received in response to each of the transmitted data packets. The device detects a failure of the first link. In response to the detection, the device identifies invalid data packets. The invalid data packets comprise data packets transmitted on the first link after the detected failure. | 05-09-2013 |
20130114397 | Soft Error Recovery for Converged Networks - Detecting and recovering from soft errors in a network comprising a first device. A first device receives a first data packet. Responsive to receiving a second data packet, the first device determines whether the two data packets are identical. Responsive to the determination that the two data packets are not identical, the first device discards the two data packets, and requests retransmission of the two data packets. | 05-09-2013 |
20130121132 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RECOGNIZING RADIO LINK FAILURES ASSOCIATED WITH HSUPA AND HSDPA CHANNELS - A method and system for detecting radio link (RL) failures between a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a Node-B are disclosed. When signaling radio bearers (SRBs) are supported by high speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), an RL failure is recognized based on detection of improper operation of at least one of an absolute grant channel (AGCH), a relative grant channel (RGCH), a hybrid-automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) information channel (HICH), an enhanced uplink dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) and an enhanced uplink dedicated physical data channel (E-DPDCH). When SRBs are supported by high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), an RL failure is recognized based on detection of improper operation of at least one of a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH), a high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH) and a high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH). | 05-16-2013 |
20130121133 | GROUP COMMUNICATIONS WITH MIXED CASTING SERVICES - The disclosure is directed to group communications in a mixed casting services wireless communication system. An embodiment detects a loss of multicast coverage at a user equipment (UE), notifies a server of the loss of multicast coverage, wherein the server is configured to provide a desired multicast communication, and requests that communications related to the desired multicast communication be conducted on a unicast service using application layer signaling independent of link layer signaling. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121134 | FAIL TO WIRE REMOVABLE MODULE FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATION LINK - A fail-to-wire (FTW) module that preserves a primary data path connection from an upstream computer to a downstream computer if there is any kind of failure in a breakout data path to a breakout system. The FTW module provides switches between the incoming data network data and the breakout system such that when the breakout system encounters a failure, the switches are de-activated to bypass the breakout system. The switches in the FTW module are activated by a system health signal from the breakout system. The breakout system can be serviced without interrupting the data network connections since the FTW module can be extracted from the failed breakout system with data network connections intact. The FTW module is preferably a compact modular element that fits within the breakout chassis and is easily inserted and removed from the breakout system during servicing operations. | 05-16-2013 |
20130121135 | DATA BREAKOUT APPLIANCE AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in an appliance in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. The appliance in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. The appliance has defined interfaces and defined commands on each interface that allow performing all needed functions on the appliance without revealing details regarding the hardware and software used to implement the appliance. This appliance architecture allows performing new mobile network services at the edge of a mobile data network within the infrastructure of an existing mobile data network. | 05-16-2013 |
20130135985 | Split Microwave Backhaul Architecture with Smart Outdoor Unit - An advanced split microwave architecture is provided. The advanced split microwave architecture includes a smart outdoor communication unit including a digital N-Plexer configured to multiplex and/or demultiplex a received data signal in the digital domain, a processor unit configured to carry out instructions to control operation of the digital N-Plexer, and a converter module configured to convert the received data signal between the digital domain and the analog domain. The smart outdoor communication unit further includes an RF module, having digital capabilities, configured to correct errors within the received data signal in the digital domain, perform a conversion of the received data signal, to amplify a power of the received data signal, and to perform automatic gain control in the digital domain. | 05-30-2013 |
20130135986 | Microwave Backhaul System Having a Dual Channel Over a Single Interconnect - A microwave backhaul architecture having a dual channel over a single interconnect is provided. The backhaul architecture includes an indoor communication unit and an outdoor communication unit (ODU), which may include an N-Plexer configured to perform decouple one or more transmitted signals from one or more received signals. The ODU also includes an RF module, an analog-to-digital/digital-to-analog converter (ADC/DAC) and a digital signal processor (DSP) configured to process received data in the digital domain such that errors may be detected and/or corrected. Further, the backhaul architecture is configured to allow two transmission channels and two receipt channels to coexist on the single interconnect. The single interconnect may be implemented such that the two transmission and receipt Channels may support communication at a highest possible baud rate. Thus, the single interconnect allows for data to be communicated to the ODU over two communication channels, without having to add an additional interconnect. | 05-30-2013 |
20130135987 | OPERATION OF CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNITS IN PACKET DATA CONVERGENCE PROTOCOL - A method and apparatus reports packet data control protocol (PDCP) status and PDCP resets in a wireless communication, using control PDUs that may have security protection applied by ciphering of the control PDUs. Reliability of the PDCP status and reset messages may be assured by acknowledgment according to an acknowledged mode or to an unacknowledged mode. | 05-30-2013 |
20130135988 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING RELAY NODE - The present description relates to a method for transmitting data from a base station according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step for transmitting to the relay node a signal having a first data to be delivered to a user equipment via the relay node; a step for transmitting to the user equipment a signal having a second data; and a step for receiving from the user equipment a HARQ confirmation response information regarding the first data delivered to the user equipment through the relay node, wherein the first data is retransmitted to the user equipment from the relay node when the HARQ confirmation response information is NACK, and scheduling information for transmitting the first data from the relay node to the user equipment and scheduling information for retransmitting the first data can be designated in advance by the base station. | 05-30-2013 |
20130142032 | Method of Handling Long Term Evaluation Positioning Protocol Data and Related Communication Device - A method of handling long term evaluation positioning protocol (LPP) data for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises initiating a transmission for transmitting a protocol data unit (PDU) of a long term evaluation positioning protocol (LPP) layer of the mobile device, to a base station of the wireless communication system; and retransmitting the LPP PDU to the base station when the transmission is failed. | 06-06-2013 |
20130142033 | ACCESS POINT AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for data transmission disclosed is applied to an access point for use in a wireless local area network. The access point has multiple antennas. The method comprises in response to transmitting a first message successfully to a station, determining a maximum transmitting rate at which a message can be transmitted successfully using a current antenna group by increasing the transmitting rate and transmitting a message repeatedly; and, transmitting further messages to the station at the determined maximum transmitting rate. | 06-06-2013 |
20130148489 | CONNECTION VERIFICATION FOR MPLS LABEL SWITCHED PATHS AND PSEUDOWIRES - In one embodiment, a maintenance intermediate point (MIP) receives a packet traveling along a multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) label switched path (LSP) that extends from a first maintenance end point (MEP) to a second MEP. The receiving MIP decrements a time-to-live (TTL) value in a header of the packet. In response the TTL value in the header of the packet equaling a particular value, the receiving MIP examines an associated channel header (ACH) field in an operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) message stored in a payload of the packet, and determines a particular OAM function to perform based on a code in the ACH field. The receiving MIP performs the particular OAM function. | 06-13-2013 |
20130148490 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECONFIGURING CONNECTION TO BASE STATION AT RELAY NODE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method of processing a signal in a wireless communication system. In particular, the method comprises steps of setting an indicator indicating that an integrity failure occurs and transmitting a first message associated with a connection reestablishment including the indicator to a network. The integrity failure means that data is inserted or replaced by an unauthorized third party. | 06-13-2013 |
20130155834 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SCHEDULING A PREDICTED FAULT SERVICE CALL - Disclosed is a fault prediction system and method that uses non-fatal event data received from a terminal to make predictions concerning future fatal faults for the terminal and to schedule a predicted service call. A complex fault pattern associated with a fault is applied to the non-fatal event data to predict the fault. A corrective action is provided for each predicted fault and historical data is used to predict a time to the predicted fault to govern the type of service response to create to prevent the fault. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155835 | APPLIANCE IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK THAT SPANS MULTIPLE ENCLOSURES - Mobile network services are performed in an appliance in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. The appliance in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. The appliance has defined interfaces and defined commands on each interface that allow performing all needed functions on the appliance without revealing details regarding the hardware and software used to implement the appliance. This appliance architecture allows performing new mobile network services at the edge of a mobile data network within the infrastructure of an existing mobile data network. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155836 | Method and System for an Optimized Retransmission of a Message in a Satellite Communications Context - A communications method for retransmission of at least one fragment of a lost or erroneous message from a terminal to a gateway over a communications network comprising a plurality of terminals, communicating over a demand assignment multiple access and comprising a control centre allocating the communications resource to the terminals, comprises: detection, by the gateway, of fragments of lost or erroneous messages and, when at least one fragment is detected, notification via the gateway to the control centre of the loss of at least one fragment; calculation, by the control centre, of a second allocation plan taking into account a new transmission of the fragment; notification by the gateway to the terminal of the loss of the fragment and notification by the control centre to the terminal of the second allocation plan; transmission by the terminal of the lost fragment according to the second allocation plan to the gateway. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155837 | Selecting a Master Processor From an Ambiguous Peer Group - A distributed switch may include a plurality of special-purpose processors that control the different functions of the switch. To enable some special services, however, the distributed switch may need one of these processors to perform the role of a master. When a processor is powered on, the processor may publish a corresponding unique ID. Before electing the master, the special-purpose processors may use a discovery process to identify the network topology of the switch and evaluate the published IDs to determine which processor should be the master. If all the processors nominate the same master processor, then that processor is elected as the master and may finish configuring the distributed switch to enable the special services. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155838 | SCALING CONTENT COMMUNICATED OVER A NETWORK - An architecture is provided that can scale content resolution in order to mitigate errors in a provisioned service of a communication network, such as a wireless service or a femtocell service that integrates with DSL or other broadband carriers. The architecture can identify fault conditions relating to e.g., bandwidth oversubscription or symbolization integrity. Based upon such identification, the architecture can alter encoding format codecs of certain types of content in order to reduce their resolution/quality, thereby mitigating bandwidth oversubscription fault conditions or freeing up space (without necessarily increasing bandwidth) to insert additional FEC code. | 06-20-2013 |
20130155839 | METHOD OF PROVIDING AN MMoIP COMMUNICATION SERVICE - One or more MMoIP packet streams are transmitted via a connection established between a first and second endpoint of an IP communication network. The one or more MMoIP packet streams include MMoIP payload data and/or control data. Control data directed to a processor is inserted in at least one MMoIP packet stream of the one or more MMoIP packet streams at the first endpoint and/or the second endpoint. The one or more MMoIP packet streams are transmitted via an MMoIP switch of the IP communication network. The MMoIP switch monitors the one or more MMoIP packet streams. The MMoIP switch detects the control data directed to the processor. The MMoIP switch forwards the detected control data to the processor. | 06-20-2013 |
20130163404 | VOIP GATEWAY DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF AND VOIP - Provided are a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) gateway device, a control method thereof, and a VoIP gateway system. The VoIP gateway device includes: a connector which is connected to a first terminal; a communication unit which communicates with a proxy server that relays a VoIP communication; a storage unit which stores a ringtone corresponding to a call received by a call back function; and a controller which transmits an invite message to the proxy server for connecting a call from a first terminal to a second terminal corresponding to the call back function upon request from the first terminal for the call back function, and transmits the stored ringtone to the first terminal upon receiving a ringing message from the proxy server in response to the invite message. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163405 | METHOD FOR SELECTING PMI FOR NON-ADAPTIVE HARQ OPERATION IN A MIMO WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting an uplink signal at a User Equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system includes receiving, from a Base Station (BS), an uplink scheduling grant for multi-antenna transmission; transmitting the uplink signal precoded using precoding information included in the received uplink scheduling grant to the BS; and retransmitting the uplink signal to the BS according to Acknowledgment/Negative Acknowledgment (ACK/NACK) corresponding to the transmitted uplink signal. The retransmitted uplink signal is precoded using precoding information included in a most recent uplink scheduling grant or a predetermined precoding matrix if an uplink scheduling grant for the retransmission is not received from the BS. | 06-27-2013 |
20130163406 | TERMINAL DEVICE AND RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a terminal device that is capable of improving the characteristics of a response signal having poor transmission characteristics when ARQ is utilized in communication using an uplink unit band and a plurality of downlink unit bands associated with the uplink unit band. At the time of channel selection, a control unit ( | 06-27-2013 |
20130170334 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM, AND CONTROL METHOD - An abnormality detection unit provided in at least one node among a plurality of nodes included in an information processing apparatus detects abnormality in a data transmission path of data transmission using a shared memory area sharable in a single node and other node, which is included in the storage unit provided in the single node or other nodes. An error information generation unit provided in the single node generates error information, based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection unit, and generates an interrupt with respect to a processor within a self node. The processor provided in the single node performs recovery processing, based on the error information according to the interrupt. | 07-04-2013 |
20130176842 | DYNAMIC ERROR DAMPENING IN A NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and computer system for dynamic error dampening in a node of a network system. Data traffic of the node is implemented in accordance with an Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) network management model that includes a Layer 1 physical link, a Layer 2 link including a data link in which primitive point-to-point data communication with neighboring nodes is enabled upon the Layer 1 physical link, and a Layer 3 link which is a network link operating on top of the Layer 2 link. Implementation of an error dampening process at the node includes deactivating the Layer 3 link of the node while monitoring data traffic over the Layer 2 link of the node. Deactivating the Layer 3 link of the node includes preventing the Layer 3 Link of the node from receiving incoming data traffic for routing to other nodes in the network system. | 07-11-2013 |
20130182552 | VIRTUAL PAIRING FOR CONSISTENT DATA BROADCAST - A network comprises a plurality of nodes; and a plurality of links communicatively coupling each of the plurality of nodes to at least one respective adjacent node of the plurality of nodes via a first communication channel and to another respective adjacent node of the plurality of nodes via a second communication channel. At least one of the plurality of nodes is a source node configured to source data. The source node is configured to form a virtual self-checking pair with one of the respective adjacent node on the first communication channel or the respective adjacent node on the second communication channel to achieve a consistent broadcast of data on the first and second communication channels. Data exchanged between the source node and the respective adjacent node in the virtual self-checking pair is only sourced by the source node. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182553 | IMAGE TRANSFER APPARATUS, METHOD, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - An image transfer apparatus includes a generator, a scrambling device, first and second converters, a descrambling device, a detector, and a retransmission request unit. The generator generates packets each having an error detecting code added to image data. The scrambling device scrambles the generated packets on a packet-to-packet basis to reduce repetition of identical data. The first converter subjects the scrambled packets to parallel-to-serial conversion, and transfers the packets to a target apparatus. The second converter receives the scrambled packets from the target apparatus, and subjects the received packets to serial-to-parallel conversion. The descrambling device descrambles the packets subjected to the serial-to-parallel conversion. The detector detects an error from the error detecting code of each of the descrambled packets. Upon detection of the error, the retransmission request unit requests the target apparatus to retransmit the packet in which the error is detected. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182554 | CORE SERVICES PLATFORM FOR WIRELESS VOICE, DATA AND MESSAGING NETWORK SERVICES - A Core Service Platform (CSP) system is integrated with an operator network and IT system to provide services to subscribers and operators. Based on information collected from the operator network and IT system, the CSP system delivers alerts to a subscriber's device and provides offers to resolve the condition causing the alerts. The CSP system provides customized contextual offers to the subscriber's device based on contextual assessments of a subscriber's current context, such as time in contract, loyalty status, data and voice usage, value of customer, time, location and purchase history. The CSP system also provides an operator a suite of tools for the operator to manage its pricing, offers, campaigns and other subscriber-related issues. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182555 | Radio Link Failure Recovery Control in Communication Network Having Relay Nodes - There is proposed a mechanism for controlling a radio link failure recovery procedure in a communication network having relay nodes, wherein a network control node, such as a DeNB, forwards cached UE context information to a target network node which is contacted by an UE for re-establishment after radio link failure and requests, since it does not have the context information, the context information for the UE in question. Context information can also be proactively forwarded from the network control node to candidate neighboring network nodes when it is detected that a radio link failure between a relay node and the network control node, or between the relay node and a UE is possible. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182556 | METHOD, BASE STATION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR TRX MUTUAL AID - The present invention relates to a method, a base station, and a wireless communication system for TRX mutual aid, where the method comprises: obtaining, by the base station, capability information of a TRX board in the base station, and obtaining from a base station controller information of a cell to which a carrier that is configured on the TRX board belongs; and selecting, by the base station, a corresponding TRX mutual aid way according to the capability information and the information of the cell to perform TRX mutual aid with a faulty BCCH dominant frequency carrier. By implementing TRX mutual aid on the base station, the capability of the board can be easily learned, and the TRX mutual aid is performed based on the capability in comprehensive consideration of another carrier in the cell and standard configuration of the carriers, so that more carriers continue providing services. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182557 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR OBTAINING KEY INFORMATION DURING FAST CHANNEL SWITCHING - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method, apparatus and system for obtaining key information during fast channel switching. A fast channel switching request sent by a terminal is received; at least one data unit bearing key information is generated according to the fast channel switching request; a fast channel switching response message is sent to the terminal, where the response message carries an identifier of a first data unit bearing the key information and the number of data units bearing the key information; and the at least one data unit bearing the key information is sent to the terminal. When the key information is lost, the key information is retransmitted without a need to perform status maintenance, which improves scalability of fast channel switching. | 07-18-2013 |
20130182558 | Method For Reassigning The Role Of A Wireless Node In A Wireless Network - A method for maintaining network lifetime of a wireless network in wireless communication system, the network including a plurality of device nodes. Selected ones of the wireless nodes have assigned roles in the wireless network. To improve and maintain network lifetime the method includes determining a below threshold operating condition of a first sensor node assigned to a first role and re-assigning the first role to another second node in said network. In other aspects of the invention a method, system and a computer program for carrying out the method are described. | 07-18-2013 |
20130188471 | RELIABLE PACKET DELIVERY WITH OVERLAY NETWORK (RPDON) - In one embodiment, a device in a computer network establishes a reliable map that defines a set of packet criteria for which reliability is desired over an unreliable link to a peer device. In response to receiving a first packet from the peer device over the unreliable link, the device acknowledges the first packet to the peer device when the first packet matches the packet criteria of the reliable map. Also, in response to receiving a second packet destined via the peer device over the unreliable link, the device buffers the second packet when the second packet matches the packet criteria of the reliable map and retransmits the buffered second packet over the unreliable link to the peer device until acknowledged by the peer device. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188472 | METHOD FOR MANAGING A SWITCH CHIP PORT, MAIN CONTROL BOARD, SWITCH BOARD, AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method for managing a switch chip port. The method is applied in a distributed communications system and includes: detecting whether each of multiple service boards is in position; when it is detected that a service board is not in position, controlling disabling of a port corresponding to the detected not-in-position service board on a first switch chip of the main control board; and/or sending an in-position message including information about the not-in-position service board to the switch board, so that the switch board controls, according to the information about the not-in-position service board, disabling of a port corresponding to the not-in-position service board on a second switch chip of the switch board. Energy saving of a switch chip port can be efficiently implemented by adopting the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention, thereby efficiently reducing power consumption of the system. | 07-25-2013 |
20130188473 | Random Access Failure in Wireless Device Multiple Timing Advance Groups - A wireless device receives a control command to transmit a random access preamble on a first secondary cell. The wireless device repeatedly transmits the random access preamble until a random access response corresponding to the random access preamble is received or a predetermined number of transmissions is reached. If the predetermined number of transmissions is reached without receiving the random access response, the wireless device stops transmission of the random access preamble and keeps a connection with the base station active. | 07-25-2013 |
20130194909 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING ERROR IN AN IP-BASED BEARER INDEPENDENT CALL CONTROL ENVIRONMENT - A call monitoring method for detecting an error in a Bearer-Independent Call Control (BICC) environment using an Internet Protocol (IP) as a bearer is provided, in which an MSC receives connection information about a called exchange from another MSC, requests IP resource allocation for configuring a termination to a Media GateWay (MGW) controlled by the MSC based on the received connection information about the called exchange, determines, upon receipt of a resource allocation failure message from the MGW, whether a cause of a resource allocation failure is an IP allocation error, and transmits the resource allocation failure message to a resource manager, if the cause of the resource allocation failure is an IP allocation error. | 08-01-2013 |
20130194910 | FAILURE RECOVERY IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM NETWORK - A method is provided for facilitating recovery from the failure of a P-CSCF within an IP multimedia Subsystem network. A gateway, such as a GGSN, monitors signals arriving at the gateway from the P-CSCF and provides an indication if the monitored signals become unacceptable, for example because of an interruption in the signals. The gateway responds by signalling the unavailability of the P-CSCF to user equipment, which was associated with the P-CSCF during a previous registration with the IMS network. In response, for example, the user equipment affected by the failure may request re-registration with the IMS network using a different available P-CSCF. | 08-01-2013 |
20130201815 | BUFFER SPACE ALLOCATION METHOD AND DEVICE - Disclosed are a buffer space allocation method and a device. The solution of the present invention enables the division of the buffer space in the buffer resource of a terminal equipment according to the currently configured carrier aggregation mode of the terminal equipment, so that the number of buffer spaces in the buffer can be adjusted according to the number of aggregated carriers, thereby improving the utilization rate of the buffer resource. The method is simple, easy to implement, and applicable to both FDD and TDD systems. | 08-08-2013 |
20130201816 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR E-TFC SELECTION FOR UPLINK MIMO COMMUNICATION - One or more scheduling grants may be received from a Node B related to a plurality of uplink MIMO streams. A determination may be made as to a primary transport power and a primary transport block size for a primary stream. A secondary transmit power and a secondary transport block size for a secondary stream may also be determined. | 08-08-2013 |
20130208580 | HOSTING EDGE APPLICATIONS AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A breakout component in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and hosts edge applications, including third party edge applications, that perform one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. | 08-15-2013 |
20130215733 | SPECULATIVE RESERVATION FOR ROUTING NETWORKS - Aspects relate to methods, devices and manufacturing relating to routing networks including a method for routing data units. The data units are individually routable through a routing network. A reservation request data unit is received over the routing network and from a sender. At least one speculative data unit associated with the reservation request data unit from the sender is received. The at least one speculative data unit is dropped in response to the at least one speculative data unit being blocked within the routing network. The sender is provided, over the routing network, a negative acknowledgement data unit that indicates the dropping of the at least one speculative data unit. The sender is provided a grant data unit indicating a start time. After the start time, at least one non-speculative data unit corresponding to the reservation request from the sender is received. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215734 | Cell Degradation Detection - There is provided a solution for detecting a condition of at least one cell. The solution includes determining, for each predetermined channel, the number of failed attempts in establishing a connection to a cell, and communicating the information to the next connected cell. The cell may then apply the information in determining whether a cell is degraded or not. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215735 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND STATE INFORMATION RECEIVING APPARATUS - A communication system includes a wireless communication apparatus which comprises a wireless communication unit performing wireless communication with a designated wireless apparatus as a communication correspondent; a state storing unit storing state information which indicates a communication state at each point of time in the wireless communication; a failure determination unit using a predetermined determination criterion to determine at each stage of the wireless communication whether or not a communication failure occurs in the wireless communication; a state acquisition unit acquiring from the state storing unit, when it is determined that a communication failure occurs, state information which indicates a communication state at each point of time during a predetermined time period; and a state sending unit sending via wireless communication the state information to a communication correspondent other than the designated wireless apparatus; and a state information receiving apparatus receiving the state information. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215736 | METHOD, TERMINAL AND NETWORK DEVICE FOR CONFIGURING MEASUREMENT GAP - The present invention provides a method for configuring measurement gap, terminal and network device. The method includes: determining an aggregation state of current component carriers, an aggregation state of component carriers which will be configured for a terminal by a network side, or a failure state of a measurement performed by a terminal according to a state of a current measurement configuration; sending, in the case of the aggregation state of the current component carriers or the failure state of the measurement, current measurement capability information of the terminal to the network side; sending, in the case of the aggregation state of the component carriers which will be configured for the terminal by the network side, measurement capability information according to the aggregation state of the component carriers which will be configured for the terminal. The embodiments of the present invention may reduce signaling overhead and avoid signaling waste. | 08-22-2013 |
20130215737 | Method and System for Trunk Independent Gateway Transfer of Calls - Techniques for providing a method and system for trunk independent gateway transfer of calls are disclosed. In one particular exemplary embodiment, the techniques may be realized as a computer implemented method, comprising receiving a call transfer request for a call at a gateway and determining, using a processor of the gateway, whether a trunk to be used for transferring the call requires a transfer command. In the event the trunk requires transfer command, the techniques comprise generating a transfer command, and transferring the call using the transfer command. | 08-22-2013 |
20130223203 | Hybrid ARQ With Variable Retransmission Energy - Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) is implemented using multi-bit feedback and variable retransmission energy. The multi-bit feedback provides information to the transmitter about the state of the decoder so that the transmitter can adapt retransmissions to the current state of the decoder. In some embodiments, the multi-bit feedback indicates a level of convergence reached by the decoder, and the transmitter varies an amount of energy used for the retransmission as a function of the multi-bit feedback. The transmitter can vary the amount of energy applied to the retransmission by varying the number of bits in the retransmission, or by varying a transmit power used for the retransmission. | 08-29-2013 |
20130229906 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR UPLINK MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT TRANSMISSION - Methods and apparatuses are provided for uplink MIMO transmissions in a wireless communication system. In some particular aspects, scheduling of the uplink MIMO transmissions may make a determination between single stream, rank=1 transmissions and dual stream, rank=2 transmissions based on various factors. Further, when switching between single and dual stream transmissions in the presence of HARQ retransmissions of failed packets, the scheduling function may determine to transmit the HARQ retransmissions on a single stream transmission or to transmit the HARQ retransmissions on one stream while transmitting new packets on the other stream. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229907 | WIRELESS STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A second wireless station includes a communicating unit that transmits a packet to a first wireless station and retransmits the packet when a response signal for the packet is not received by a predetermined response time limit; an acquiring unit that acquires from the first wireless station, transmission prohibition period information indicating a transmission prohibition period during which transmission of a signal by the first wireless station is prohibited; and a postponing unit that postpones the response time limit in the transmission prohibition period indicated by the acquired transmission prohibition period information to be after the transmission prohibition period ends. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229908 | SYSTEM AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - A system and method for transmitting data over a channel, in which the data are categorized in at least two different categories. For example, the data are categorized according to the effect on perceived degradation on the data when error mitigation is performed on the data. Corrupted data of the first category are replaced using a first replacement method, such as retransmission and forward error correction. The corrupted data of the second category are replaced using a second replacement method different from the first replacement method, e.g., error mitigation or interpolation. | 09-05-2013 |
20130229909 | DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN CONNECTIVITY VERIFICATION AVAILABILITY AND FORWARDING PROTOCOL FUNCTIONALITY IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a local network device transmits a connectivity verification protocol control message over a link to a remote network device to attempt to establish a connectivity verification protocol session with the remote network device. In response to non-receipt of a returned connectivity verification protocol control message from the remote network device, the local network device determines that there is an inability to establish a connectivity verification protocol session with the remote network device. The local network device then sends a connectivity verification protocol echo message over the link to the remote network device without establishment of a connectivity verification protocol session. The echo message is sent using a forwarding protocol. In response to receipt of a reply to the connectivity verification protocol echo message from the remote network device, the local network device determines that the forwarding protocol is functioning and uses the link to forward data traffic to the remote network device. | 09-05-2013 |
20130242716 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING RADIO LINK FAILURE IN LTE EMBMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a UE. The UE may detect a multicast/broadcast radio link failure based on at least one of decoding errors, lost or error packets/segments, or failure to receive a multicast/broadcast channel for a time period greater than a threshold, and recover from the detected multicast/broadcast radio link failure upon detecting the multicast/broadcast radio link failure. | 09-19-2013 |
20130242717 | RESTART METHOD AND NODE DEVICE - A restart method that performs restart in a label transfer network, the restart method includes: selecting, by a restart node, one or more adjacent nodes based on a processing capacity of the restart node, setting a selected adjacent node as a restart group and notifying the selected adjacent node of restart; restoring, based on a label value of a path notified by the selected adjacent node, an entry corresponding to the path using a label table that associates the path with the label; and repeating a notification of restart and a restoration of an entry to restore the label table. | 09-19-2013 |
20130250747 | Method and Apparatus Relating to HARQ Processes - A method in a radio receiver arrangement for receiving data blocks of radio signalling. The method comprises receiving a plurality of data blocks over a radio interface from a transmitting side. The method also comprises applying a single hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process to the plurality of data blocks, whereby it is determined that at least one of the plurality of data blocks has been received ok and that at least one of the plurality of data blocks has not been received ok. The method also comprises generating a negative acknowledgement (NAK) for the plurality of data blocks in response to the at least one of the plurality of data blocks having not been received ok. The method also comprises outputting, from the receiver arrangement, at least one symbol obtained from the at least one of the plurality of data blocks which has been received ok. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250748 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MULTI-RAB SERVICE IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus implements a method for maintaining a voice call in a communication system providing a multi-Radio Access Bearer (RAB). In the method for maintaining a voice call in an electronic device, a data call and a voice call with a wireless network are connected. When an error of the data call is detected, the connection of the data call with the wireless network is released. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250749 | CONTROL METHOD FOR ACCESS GATEWAY AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In order to provide a redundancy configuration to an access gateway apparatus in which a control plane and a user plane are separated, the access gateway apparatus includes: a control computer for receiving control signals from the networks to establish the communication path, thereby determining packet transfer information for the data; and a transfer computer for receiving the packet transfer information from the control computer to transfer the data through the communication path. The transfer computer includes: a plurality of first transfer computers for executing the transfer of the data; and a second transfer computer for taking over, when a fault occurs in any one of the plurality of first transfer computers. The control computer includes: a first control computer for processing the control signals received from the networks; and a second control computer for taking over, when a fault occurs in the first control computer. | 09-26-2013 |
20130250750 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, GATEWAY APPARATUS, MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NODE, AND CALL SESSION CONTROL SERVER APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step A of re-establishing, by IMS (P-CSCF), association among a PDN connection, a PCC connection #1 and a PCC connection #2 in case of detecting a specified event after detecting a failure in PCRF. | 09-26-2013 |
20130258835 | LOAD BALANCING ACROSS A LINK AGGREGATION GROUP - A system includes a network element. The network element includes multiple egress ports configured as a LAG, an ingress port, and a distributor. The ingress port is configured to receive multiple packets including at least one flood domain. Additionally, the distributor is configured to access a virtual local area network identifier (VID) of each flood domain. Based on the VID and the number of egress ports in the LAG, the distributor is configured to select a representative egress port from the multiple egress ports. The distributor additionally forwards packets of each flood domain to the egress port of the LAG which is selected as the representative egress port for that flood domain. | 10-03-2013 |
20130258836 | Preserving Stable Calls During Failover - According to one method for preserving stable calls during failover, during a dialog between two user endpoints, a determination is made whether a standby call processor has become operational, such as when a corresponding primary call processor is in fault. Responsive to determining that the standby call processor has become operational, a signaling protocol message is received from a requester. A determination is made whether the message includes an in-dialog signaling protocol request. Responsive to determining that the message includes the in-dialog request, a determination is made whether a call state associated with the dialog is found in memory. Responsive to determining that the call state associated with the dialog is not found in memory, a non-call terminating error response is made responding to the in-dialog request. The non-call terminating error response may cause the requester to terminate the in-dialog request but not terminate the dialog. | 10-03-2013 |
20130265865 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND WIRING STATE DETECTION METHOD AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM STORING PROGRAM USING COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The communication device, which is connectable by straight or crossover wiring to another communication device, comprises a transmission port configured to send signals to the other communication device, a reception port configured to receive signals, a communication controller including an automatic transmission and reception switching component that determines whether or not the wiring is correct and automatically switches the transmission and reception of signals by the transmission port and the reception port | 10-10-2013 |
20130265866 | METHOD FOR DETECTING FAILURES OF RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURES - A method of performing a random access channel (RACH) procedure between a mobile terminal and a network includes the steps of detecting whether a random access response (RAR) is received from the network within a certain time period, the RAR including information about a random access channel (RACH) preamble transmitted to the network; and if the RAR is not received within the certain time period or if the information about the transmitted RACH preamble included in the RAR does not match the transmitted RACH preamble, performing a first procedure to detect failures in the RACH procedure; and if the RAR is received within the certain time period and if the information about the transmitted RACH preamble included in the RAR matches the transmitted RACH preamble, performing a second procedure to detect failures in the RACH procedure. | 10-10-2013 |
20130272109 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION SERVICES FOR USER ENDPOINT DEVICES - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, an edge device having a controller to receive a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message from a user endpoint device (UE) requesting communication services, forward the SIP message to a network element of a Server Office, receive from the network element a first error message indicating communication services at the Server Office are unavailable, replace the first error message with a second error message, the second error message indicating a temporary unavailability of communication services, and transmit the second error message to the UE. Additional embodiments are disclosed. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272110 | Method for Handling Transmission Errors On a Telecommunications Transmission Line - When data retransmission is used to handle errors caused by impulse noise, buffer memory requirements may be reduced and/or data rate increased by detecting impulse noise at the transmitting equipment and initiating retransmission in response to such detection rather than waiting for a retransmission indication from the receiving end. The decision to retransmit may be made dependent on the strength or other properties of the detected noise burst. The decision criterion may be made adaptive by correlating noise burst properties with received retransmission indications or the absence thereof. | 10-17-2013 |
20130272111 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR LINK FAULT DETECTING AND RECOVERING BASED ON ARP INTERACTION - A method for link fault detection and recovery based on Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) interaction, including: configuring an IP address and a mask code, a strategy routing or static routing module and an ARP module for network devices of a home terminal and an opposite terminal; the strategy routing or static routing module regularly inquiring whether an ARP entry to which a next hop corresponds exists, if the ARP entry exists, a link being available, otherwise, notifying the ARP module to perform keepalive on the next hop; and the ARP module performing a process of keepalive on the next hop, and after performing keepalive on the next hop, notifying the strategy routing or static routing module to judge whether the link is available. Further, a device for link fault detection and recovery based on ARP interaction. | 10-17-2013 |
20130286813 | DISTRIBUTED STORAGE AND SHARING OF DATA PACKETS IN HYBRID NETWORKS - Systems and methods provide distributed storage and sharing of data packets in hybrid networks to enable user devices (e.g., mobile terminals) to cooperate to recover lost data packets. According to embodiments, a centralized system operable to provide data transmission may optimize broadcast resources by adjusting redundancy in data packet transmission to enable a desired or a predetermined percentage of user devices to either successfully receive transmitted data packets using transmitted redundancies or to recover lost data packets relying on the distributed storage and sharing scheme. | 10-31-2013 |
20130286814 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SIMULTANEOUS DATA TRANSMISSION SERVICE OVER TWO OR MORE NETWORKS - The heterogeneous network based-simultaneous data transmission service method includes identifying an access state with a reception device by a network device configured to relay data transmission/reception between a particular reception device and a particular transmission device, the network device being located in a particular network, when the access state with the reception device is abnormal, making a request for re-routing particular data transmitted from the transmission device to the reception device, and when the transmission device configured to transmit/receive particular partial data divided from one particular data through two or more network interfaces receives the re-routing request from the network device corresponding to a particular network interface, transmitting the particular partial data according to the re-routing request to the reception device through another network interface of the two or more network interfaces. | 10-31-2013 |
20130294221 | Optimization for Trill LAN Hellos - Systems and methods may be provided embodying an optimized Trill LAN network hello mode. The optimized hello mode may allow the number of LAN hellos exchanged to be reduced significantly in a steady state mode of operation. No modifications to the current Trill specification are needed and in a converged state (when designated RBridge election and appointed forwarder appointments are complete), only 1 hello PDU per RBridge is originated in every hello interval. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294222 | HOST COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE - A system and method for low-cost, fault tolerant, EMI robust data communications, particularly for an EV environment. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294223 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RETRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for retransmitting data in a wireless communication system using channel bonding are provided. The method for retransmitting data includes transmitting data by mapping the data to at least two channels according to the channel bonding, and retransmitting the data by changing a mapping scheme of the data to the at least two channels. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294224 | TRANSMIT AND ADMISSION CONTROL FOR CDMA SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system for performing transmit power and admission control for a satellite based wireless communication systems. Admission control uses centralized admission and distributed admission controls. Centralized admission control uses a maximum persistence value broadcasted from a hub to terminals. Persistence is the probability that a transmission will timely occur. Each terminal transmits a persistence that is no greater than the maximum persistence value. If the transmission fails, the transmission is repeated using the same probability. Lowering the persistence introduces a delay for alleviateing congestion. Power control is performed using centralized and distributed power control. Centralized power control uses power control commands transmitted from the hub to each terminal. When an acknowledge is not received, a backoff and recovery procedure is performed. Distributed power control is performed during the recovery process when a terminal fails to receive an acknowledgment message after a predetermined number of attempts. | 11-07-2013 |
20130294225 | Error Correction Coding Across Multiple Channels in Content Distribution Systems - Error correction coding across multiple channels is provided in multi-channel transmission systems. Specifically, redundancy is provided by selecting a portion of original data from each of a plurality of original channels, performing at least one encoding operation using the portions of original data to produce at least one portion of redundancy data, including the portion of redundancy data in at least one redundancy channel, and transmitting the redundancy channel along with the original channels. Error correction is achieved by receiving at least one redundancy channel and a plurality of original channels, selecting a portion of redundancy data from the redundancy channel, selecting a portion of original data from each of the original channels, and performing at least one decoding operation using the portion of redundancy data and the portions of original data to correct at least one error in the portions of original data. | 11-07-2013 |
20130301402 | MESSAGE PASSING TO ASSURE DELETION OF LABEL SWITCHED PATH - A label switched path through a network of nodes, is torn down by sending a message along the path from an ingress node. If there is a fault along the path, a path error message ( | 11-14-2013 |
20130308436 | System and Method for Cloud-Based Live Media Ingestion and Transcoding - Embodiments are provided for a cloud-based reliable media ingestion and transcoding. The embodiments comprise an improved backup mechanism where each worker node, such as a virtual machine, physical machine, workstation, or server, in a cloud or Internet environment handles one streamed media/video channel transcoding and another streamed media/video channel ingestion backup. To reduce ingestion storage demands, the ingestion backup storage is based on a pre-determined relatively short-term sliding window. When an ingestion and transcoding worker node fails, a new worker node is brought up to take over from the failed worker node the live transcoding task of a first channel and the ingestion backup task of a second channel. Additionally, the new worker node retrieves backup data for the first channel from a third worker node and a central media storage to ensure seamlessly uninterrupted live ingestion and transcoding of the first channel, and continues the ingestion backup task of the second channel. | 11-21-2013 |
20130308437 | STP PATHWAY CONTROL SYSTEM APPLIED TO WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING AMR FUNCTION - A pathway control system, implementing control and setting for a communication pathway between wireless communication devices each implementing wired communication and wireless communication and each equipped with an AMR function, detects communication speed with respect to uplink wireless communication and downlink wireless communication in each wireless communication device, thus determining which one of uplink wireless communication and downlink wireless communication undergoes communication failure. It carries out adaptive modulation control on uplink wireless communication or downlink wireless communication, which undergoes communication failure, calculates new communication speed, and carries out STP pathway control based on new communication speed. Irrespective of a reduction of line speed due to activation of an AMR function, it is possible to automatically switch to redundant pathways by way of STP pathway control; it is possible to prevent momentary disconnection of wireless communication; and it is possible to maintain an adequate capacity for communication pathways. | 11-21-2013 |
20130315052 | MODEM ADAPTATION CONTROL FOR FACSIMILE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL - Described embodiments provide an IP-aware modem, such as for use in an IP-aware facsimile machine, operable with an IP packet network. The IP-aware modem has voice-band data engine that receives packets from the packet network, converts data in the packets to PCM samples, stores the samples as PCM sample frames in a buffer for further processing by the modem, and determines for each PCM sample frame whether or not during the conversion one or more packets were missing. An equalizer or timing recovery element in the modem adapts using the PCM sample frames and suspends the adaptation for the time period of each PCM sample frame converted without the one or more missing packets. Similarly, searches of the PCM sample frames for certain modem synchronization signals are skipped when, during the search, the searched PCM sample frame was converted without the one or more missing packets. | 11-28-2013 |
20130315053 | FAILURE INDEPENDENT PATH PROTECTION WITH P-CYCLES - A telecommunications network, comprising plural nodes connected by plural spans and arranged to form a mesh network. There is at least one pre-configured cycle of spare capacity established in the mesh network, the pre-configured cycle including plural nodes of the mesh network. The plural nodes of the pre-configured cycle are configured to protect a set of plural mutually disjoint working paths end to end. | 11-28-2013 |
20130322230 | AUTOMATIC CONNECTION RECOVERY - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including one or more of the following: selecting a connection of a plurality of connections; testing the selected connection to determine whether the selected connection is usable; and based on a determination that the selected connection is not usable: closing the selected connection and at least one additional connection of the plurality of connections, and reestablishing the selected connection and the at least one additional connection. | 12-05-2013 |
20130329544 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS BASE STATION RADIO WITH SLEEP MODE - A base station radio having a number of multi-carrier power amplifiers to provide signal diversity at a cell site is disclosed. The base station radio is operable to provide an on-demand sleep mode condition when certain conditions are met. The base station radio has a first multi-carrier power amplifier for providing a main RF beam transmission at one sector of the cell site and a second multi-carrier power amplifier for providing RF beam transmission diversity to the main RF beam transmission. A switch is operable to disable either the first or second multi-carrier power amplifier when a sleep mode condition is required at one or more sectors of the cell site. | 12-12-2013 |
20130329545 | Error Control in a Communication System - A method and apparatus for controlling wireless communications by a multi-radio communication device is disclosed. An error control mechanism can be operated in accordance with a first mode of operation. Switching to a second mode of operation is provided in response to determining occurrence of a period of communication restrictions that is longer than a threshold. The error control mechanism is then operated in accordance with the second mode of operation during the period. | 12-12-2013 |
20130336103 | INTER-DOMAIN SIGNALING TO UPDATE REMOTE PATH COMPUTATION ELEMENTS AFTER A CALL SET-UP FAILURE - In one embodiment, a router in a non-originating domain receives a signal to establish a tunnel, the signal having an identification (ID) of an originating path computation element (PCE) of an originating domain from where the signal to establish the tunnel originated. In response to determining that establishment of the tunnel fails, the router may signal the failure of the establishment to a local PCE of the non-originating domain, the signaling indicating the ID of the originating PCE to cause the local PCE to provide updated routing information of the non-originating domain to the originating PCE. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336104 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROPAGATING HEALTH OF A CLUSTER NODE - The present disclosure describes systems and methods for propagating port state to intermediary devices of a cluster in a static link aggregation environment. The methods and systems include a cluster comprising a plurality of intermediary devices in communication with a network device via a static link aggregation comprising aggregated ports from different intermediary devices of the cluster. A first device of the static link aggregation is configured to detect that a health of the first device is below a predetermined threshold and, responsive to the detection, identify one or more ports in the aggregated ports as down. A second device of the link aggregation is configured to, responsive to the identification, remove the ports from a distribution list for the static link aggregation. Upon detection that a health of a device is above a predetermined threshold, the first device may identify the ports as up. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336105 | EXPANDER DEVICE - An example expander includes a processor, a switch, and a plurality of physical layer devices (PHYs). The processor is to detect an error condition and, in response to detecting the error condition, cause the expander to enter a reduced functionality mode which keeps the switch and the plurality of physical layer devices (PHYs) operating notwithstanding the error condition. | 12-19-2013 |
20130336106 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR RESOLVING A SERVING GRANT DEADLOCK AT A MOBILE STATION CONFIGURED FOR ENHANCED UPLINK (EUL) - A user equipment (UE) and a method of using the UE are provided for fulfilling a network's intent to increase or decrease the serving grant for the UE in spite of a deadlock condition that may otherwise prevent fulfillment of the network's intent. That is, upon determining the network's intent, the UE may alter its serving grant according the intent by altering the number of packets for transmission in a TTI. | 12-19-2013 |
20140003223 | NETWORK COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD | 01-02-2014 |
20140003224 | DETERMINISTIC NETWORK FAILURE DETECTION | 01-02-2014 |
20140003225 | DYNAMIC REACTION TO DIAMETER ROUTING FAILURES | 01-02-2014 |
20140003226 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RECOVERY OF PACKETS IN OVERLAY NETWORKS | 01-02-2014 |
20140016453 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPTIMIZING AND SCALING CONTROL PLANE TRAFFIC IN CARRIER ETHERNET TRANSPORT NETWORKS - Methods and apparatuses for merging continuity check messages (CCMs) are described. Some embodiments determine multiplexer and de-multiplexer nodes in a network for multiplexing and de-multiplexing CCM traffic. One embodiment creates an optimization problem which when solved identifies nodes in the network that should be configured as multiplexer nodes to multiplex multiple CCMs into a group CCM and/or as de-multiplexer nodes to de-multiplex a group CCM into multiple CCMs. This embodiment uses the solution of the optimization problem to configure nodes in the network as multiplexer nodes and/or as de-multiplexer nodes. Another embodiment determines weights for different paths in the network that can be used for merging CCM traffic, and then merges the CCM traffic based on these weights. | 01-16-2014 |
20140022885 | DETERMINATION OF WHETHER STORAGE DOMAIN PATHS FOR STORAGE DEVICES INCLUDE A COMMON ROUTING MODULE - Examples disclosed herein relate to determination of whether storage domain paths for storage devices include a common routing module. Examples include determining whether the storage domain paths include a common routing module if a threshold stage of a storage device recovery procedure has been reached for a threshold number of storage devices within a detection time period. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022886 | PROXY MAINTENANCE ENDPOINT AT PROVIDER EDGE SWITCH - A proxy maintenance endpoint is configured within a provider edge switch in a service provider network. Maintenance endpoints within customer premises equipment register with the proxy maintenance endpoint and transmit Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) frames to the proxy maintenance endpoint. The proxy maintenance endpoint encapsulates the CFM frames into a CFM report and transmits the CFM report to remote proxy maintenance endpoints for subsequent distribution to maintenance endpoints within remote customer premises equipment. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022887 | METHOD FOR ZERO TRAFFIC HIT SYNCHRONIZATION SWITCHOVER IN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure relate to a Zero traffic hit synchronization switch over technique in a telecommunication network. The switch over is carried out by switching input reference of the receiver from one or more master ( | 01-23-2014 |
20140022888 | Server Arbitrated Reliable Multicast System and a Process for Accessing the Same - A system and a process for a session layer protocol allows a large number of client machines to receive a reliable data stream over inherently unreliable multicast connections in a highly efficient and scalable manner. More specifically, streaming of high-quality video, audio, stock and news tickers, or any other application specific data that requires a reliable data stream is described. The streaming allows for the source to instruct individuals to drop their connection to the stream to prevent noisy individuals from disrupting the operating efficiency of the stream. | 01-23-2014 |
20140022889 | TRANSFERRING A CONFERENCE SESSION BETWEEN CONFERENCE SERVERS DUE TO FAILURE - Commands relating to a conference session being handled by a first conference server are logged, where the commands are exchanged between an application server and the first conference server. Failure of the first conference server is detected. In response to detecting the failure, the logged commands are used to transfer the conference session to a second conference server. | 01-23-2014 |
20140029407 | SELF TROUBLESHOOTING HOME ROUTER - A device detects DNS timeouts indicative of a connectivity problem, determines, after detection of the DNS timeouts, whether a reboot timer has expired prior to troubleshooting the connectivity problem, and reboots the device and collect error logs when the reboot timer has expired. The device determines whether the rebooting of the device has corrected the connectivity problem, and provides a request to perform a reset of the device when the rebooting of the device fails to correct the connectivity problem. The device receives, based on the request, an instruction to perform the reset of the device, resets the device based on the instruction, and determines whether the resetting of the device has corrected the connectivity problem. The device sends the error logs to the log server when either the rebooting of the resetting of the device corrects the connectivity problem. | 01-30-2014 |
20140029408 | TRANSMISSION-SIDE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RETRANMSISSION CONTROL METHOD - A retransmission control method of a transmission-side communication apparatus, which transmits a packet to a reception-side communication apparatus in a radio communication system that supports adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) and hybrid automatic retransmission control (HARQ), comprises: a step (S | 01-30-2014 |
20140036656 | COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT IN E-UTRA NETWORKS - Embodiments of systems and techniques for coverage adjustment in evolved universal terrain radio access networks (E-UTRANs) are described. In some embodiments, a network management (NM) apparatus may receive data representative of first and second radio link failure (RLF) reports including information related to respective disconnections of first and second user equipment (UEs) from an E-UTRAN. The NM apparatus may identify a hole in a coverage area of the E-UTRAN based at least in part on the first and second RLF reports, and may perform an automated coverage and capacity optimization (CCO) action to reconfigure cell resources of the E-UTRAN based on the identified hole. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036657 | Rank Deficient Decoding of Linear Network Coding - Rank deficient decoding for linear network coding. The decoding problem is first decomposed into multiple parallel sub-problems. A determination is made whether the decoding problem is or is not rank deficient. If rank deficient, and for each sub-problem, a rank deficient decoder is applied to obtain a solution. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036658 | Systems and Methods for Alternative Routing of Voice Over IP Originated Emergency Calls - Systems and methods are described for routing Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) originated emergency calls. Where registered location information is not available, the present invention can attempt to identify an appropriate emergency call receiving office based on available information regarding the caller's physical location. Such information can include the IP address of the caller and, where the VoIP device is a dual mode device, the location of the last cellular base station accessed by the device. Where registered location information does exist, the present invention offers methods for ensuring that the registered location information is not obsolete and in need of updating and, in some cases, providing a manual override of call routing to the caller. | 02-06-2014 |
20140036659 | Method and Device for Handling Radio Link Failure - A method and device for handling radio link failure is disclosed. The method is as follows. A device at network side requests a terminal device to send an uplink signal according to a predefined first period, and detects first signal quality. if the device at the network side determines for continuous M1 times that the first signal quality is lower than a predefined first threshold, the device at the network side requests the terminal device to send the uplink signal according to a predefined second period, and detecting second signal quality, wherein M1 is a predefined first value. When determining according to the second signal quality that restoration of a radio link of the terminal device is failed, the device at the network side releases network resources corresponding to the radio link of the terminal device. The predefined second period is larger than the predefined first period. | 02-06-2014 |
20140043956 | Techniques for Flooding Optimization for Link State Protocols in a Network Topology - Techniques are provided for generating efficient flooding tree paths in a network. At a node device in a network, a unicast message is sent to a plurality of node devices in the network. The node device obtains an identifier associated with each of the node devices in the network. The identifier contains information indicating node connectivity for each of the node devices. A selected node device is then identified. The selected node device is one of the node devices in the network that has a lowest identifier value indicating a lowest number of connected node devices to the selected node device in the network. The selected node device is classified as a root flooding tree node device. A flooding tree is generated by performing a shortest path first operation from the selected node device to the plurality of node devices in the network. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043957 | Automatic Recover After Loss Of Signal Event In A Network Device - A switch device can identify when a loss of signal event occurs on a communication link connecting a local link partner and a remote link partner. The switch device may automatically perform a link restart process to restore communication with the remote link partner without performing a speed negotiation with the remote link partner. The link restart process may include disabling a transmitter for a recovery duration and configuring a transmitter and a receiver to an initial configuration state. The link restart process may also synchronize the start of a training protocol communication between the local link partner and remote link partner. The switch device may also perform the link restart process when traffic received from the remote link partner fails a link criteria. | 02-13-2014 |
20140043958 | METHOD AND LABEL FORWARDING ROUTER FOR INITIATING LDP SESSION CONNECTION - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method and a label forwarding router for initiating an LDP session connection. The method includes: using an address of a first transport address family of a local device as a connection address, and starting an LDP session setup procedure for the local device and a peer device according to the address; setting a random time value in the procedure; determining that current time reaches the random time value and that the LDP session setup fails; and selecting an address of a second transport address family as a new connection address, and starting a new LDP session setup procedure according to the new address. The present invention can implement normal initiation of an LDP session connection. | 02-13-2014 |
20140050077 | HITLESS PRUNING PROTOCOL UPGRADE ON SINGLE SUPERVISOR NETWORK DEVICES - In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) permits administrators to upgrade the control plane software of a network device without any disruption to the traffic passing through the data plane of the network device. However, because the control plane is unavailable, the network device is unable to transmit periodic messages to re-subscribe to specific VLANs. This may result in a service outage in end devices that rely on the network device to receive data assigned to those VLANs. To prevent the network device from being unsubscribed from the VLANs while the control plane is unavailable, the network device may transmit a control plane message before starting ISSU. Once a neighboring network device receives the message, the neighboring device delays unsubscribing the network device until the control plane is again available. Thus, the network device may perform ISSU without the possibility of data traffic not reaching end devices. | 02-20-2014 |
20140056121 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING HIGH AVAILABLE (HA) NETWORK COMMUNICATION IN A MIDDLEWARE MACHINE ENVIRONMENT - A system and method can implement highly available Internet Protocol (IP) based communication across multiple independent communication paths. The system can have different IP addresses associated with different interfaces and communication paths and can implement communication fail-over as part of the communication layers above the IP layer, e.g. at the application level. The system can provide a balance between an average fail-over time and implementation complexity, and can achieve simplicity and robustness while providing high communication performance. | 02-27-2014 |
20140064055 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, DATA TRANSFER METHOD, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD - An information processing apparatus includes a control information generating unit configured to generate second control information transferred and received on a physical layer of a communication line on the basis of an error on the physical layer of the communication line or an error on a data link layer initialized by use of first control information of the physical layer, and a transmitting unit configured to transmit the second control information generated by the control information generating unit via the physical layer of the communication line when a communication on the data link layer of the communication line is disabled. | 03-06-2014 |
20140064056 | NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, NETWORK MANAGEMENT METHOD, AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - A network management apparatus is designed so that when reassigning the existing address, the network management apparatus extracts a link with the largest link cost from among links comprising the network based on the network configuration information and specifies a flow routed though the extracted link based on the statistic information; when receiving a path change request and a via link request to request a via link with respect to the specified flow from an external terminal, the network management apparatus selects either one of addresses of an address pair of the specified flow as a change target address; and when changing the selected change target address, the network management apparatus changes the change target address to a candidate address to be assigned by selecting an address, which is routed through a link included in the via link request and has not been assigned, as the candidate address to be assigned. | 03-06-2014 |
20140071802 | NODE AND METHOD FOR MANAGING A MAXIMUM TRANSFER UNIT RELATED PATH FAILURE - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards the management of a Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) related path failure. The example embodiments comprise an originating node, or a node sending a data message, identifying a path with a re-transmission count that is equal to or greater than a predetermined heartbeat threshold value. The originating node further extends a heartbeat message size according to a maximum message transfer size. The originating sends the extended heartbeat message of the identified path and manages the identified path based on results of the extended heartbeat message transmission. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071803 | Packet Loss Recovery on a Wireless Link in a Transmission Layer Protocol Session - Methods and apparatus are provided for recovering from packet loss in an end-to-end network connection having at least one wireless segment. A packet on a wireless segment of an end-to-end network connection is processed by determining whether the packet comprises one or more of a lost packet and a malformed packet; and generating a modified packet for an application associated with the packet to replace one or more of the lost packet and the malformed packet if the application is substantially tolerant to one or more of lost and malformed data. The modified packet comprises, for example, a non-original packet and/or a corrected packet. Link layer information or information from a deep packet inspection can be used to determine whether the packet comprises a lost packet or a malformed packet. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071804 | UTILIZING STORED DATA TO REDUCE PACKET DATA LOSS IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK WITH DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE - In a mobile data network with a breakout system, when data is broken out, the RLC function is split into two different flows, between the UE and the breakout system and between the breakout system and the RNC. These two flows are processed by different RLC functions that may drift apart and become out of synchronization resulting in errors that diminish the user's quality of experience. Other errors may also occur in communication on these two different flows. The breakout system attempts to correct these errors using data stored locally in communication data structures for the two data flows. If the errors cannot be corrected, the breakout system can initiate an RLC reset into both of these flows to resynchronize the data communication. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071805 | UTILIZING STORED DATA TO REDUCE PACKET DATA LOSS IN A MOBILE DATA NETWORK WITH DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE - In a mobile data network with a breakout system, when data is broken out, the RLC function is split into two different flows, between the UE and the breakout system and between the breakout system and the RNC. These two flows are processed by different RLC functions that may drift apart and become out of synchronization resulting in errors that diminish the user's quality of experience. Other errors may also occur in communication on these two different flows. The breakout system attempts to correct these errors using data stored locally in communication data structures for the two data flows. If the errors cannot be corrected, the breakout system can initiate an RLC reset into both of these flows to resynchronize the data communication. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071806 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE DEVICE RECOVERY FOLLOWING RADIO LINK FAILURE - Methods and apparatus to audibly provide messages in a mobile device at described. An example method includes detecting a radio link failure condition, in response to detecting the radio link failure condition, sending a cell update message to a medium access control of the user equipment, detecting that a timer associated with a radio access bearer has expired before receiving confirmation from the medium access control of transmission of the cell update message to a network, and in response to detecting that the timer associated with the radio access bearer has expired and sending the cell update message to the medium access control, maintaining the radio access bearer associated with the timer. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071807 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a management unit and a setting unit. The setting unit sets, upon determination of disconnection of a wireless link with a base station of a main network used for communication, duration for waiting for receiving a first signal related to formation of a new network based on a priority. The management unit, when the duration is set, waits for receiving the first signal until the duration elapses. The setting unit switches an operation mode to a base station mode if the first signal is not received even the duration elapses. The management unit repeatedly performs a process to transmit the first signal after the operation mode is switched to the base station mode. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071808 | CALL FLOW DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FOR HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A call flow diagnostic system and/or methods for monitoring, diagnosing and updating a communication network for high bandwidth, real time, feature-rich voice/video communications. An interface component is operatively coupled to the communication network. A monitoring and alert component coupled to the network devices monitors in real time transmission and device status, and the condition, state, routing, transmission, transformation settings, and packet or call routing settings of the network devices. The component collects, debugs and traces information from the network devices. A graphical user interface is coupled to the monitoring and alert component and displays information to an operator about network device status, diagnostics results, alerts, instructions in real time. | 03-13-2014 |
20140071809 | DISTRIBUTED PROTECTION SWITCHING ARCHITECTURE FOR POINT-TO-POINT MICROWAVE RADIO SYSTEMS - A system and method for protecting a received data stream. Active receivers and standby receivers are provided, each adaptable to receive a data stream on a traffic channel. Plural data processing units are operatively in communication with the receivers. At least one of the plural DPUs provides a switching signal to the receivers to switch the state of the active receiver to standby and the state of the standby receiver to active as a function of a quality measurement of the received data stream via the traffic channel. | 03-13-2014 |
20140078882 | Automated Datacenter Network Failure Mitigation - The subject disclosure is directed towards a technology that automatically mitigates datacenter failures, instead of relying on human intervention to diagnose and repair the network. Via a mitigation pipeline, when a network failure is detected, a candidate set of components that are likely to be the cause of the failure is identified, with mitigation actions iteratively targeting each component to attempt to alleviate the problem. The impact to the network is estimated to ensure that the redundancy present in the network will be able to handle the mitigation action without adverse disruption to the network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078883 | METHODS FOR RETRANSMITTING REVERSE LINK DATA AND APPARATUSES USING THE SAME - A method for retransmitting reverse link data practiced by a media access control layer, the method comprising: buffering a plurality of data frames encapsulated in a first access probe in a memory; obtaining information regarding data frames encapsulated in the first access probe that are successfully decoded by a telecommunication network; selecting the buffered data frames that are required to be retransmitted, according to the obtained information; and passing down the selected data frames to a physical layer, to encapsulate the selected data frames into a second access probe and transmit the second access probe to the telecommunication network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078884 | COMMUNICATING NETWORK PATH AND STATUS INFORMATION IN MULTI-HOMED NETWORKS - An example network system includes a layer two (L2) device and a layer three (L3) device. The L2 device includes a control unit is configured to determine a preferred network path from a first L2 network in which the L2 device resides to an intermediate L3 network in which the L3 device resides that couples the first L2 network to a second L2 network having a second L2 device. The control unit includes a management endpoint (MEP) module. The MEP module executes an operations, administration, and management (OAM) protocol to monitor the first L2 network and output an L2 frame in accordance with the OAM protocol to the L3 device to notify the L3 device that it is within the preferred network path. A MEP module of the L3 device executes an OAM protocol that outputs L2 frames to the L2 device indicating the status of the L3 network. | 03-20-2014 |
20140078885 | PRE-CONFIGURED REDIRECTION INFORMATION - A method includes receiving information to be used in response to failure, while a UE is in a connected state with a network, of a network connection between the user equipment and a current cell. The received information is to be used by the UE to search for another cell to reestablish the network connection. In response to the failure, searching, based on the received information, for another cell to reestablish the network connection. Another method includes determining, in a network, information to be used by a UE in response to failure of a network connection between the UE and a current cell. The information is to be used by the UE in response to the failure occurring while the UE is in a connected state with the network and to be used to search for another cell to reestablish the network connection. Apparatus and program products are disclosed. | 03-20-2014 |
20140086040 | NETWORK SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION DEVICE, AND FAULT INFORMATION DELIVERY METHOD - If, in a situation where the information about the OAM function of a first network including router networks is collected, a fault affecting a service used by a user occurs in a transmission network, which is a second network that acts as a relay for the first network and includes a plurality of transmission devices having a fault monitoring function, the transmission network promptly reports the fault to the router networks by actively using the OAM function of the router networks in order to achieve rapid fault recovery. | 03-27-2014 |
20140092720 | User equipment optimization for multimedia broadcast multicast service - A technique to receive a Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) broadcast, in which a plurality of source symbols and repair symbols of a broadcast from a broadcast source are received at a UE. The source symbols and repair symbols are based on fountain codes, so that not all of the repair symbols are used to recover the originally sourced data. An application layer of the UE recovers the sourced data and places the receiver in a power-save mode following the last repair symbol used to recover the sourced data, so that remaining repair symbols are not received by the receiver and subsequently processed. | 04-03-2014 |
20140092721 | RECONNECTING DROPPED CALLS USING AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) system controls an Internet Protocol (IP) communication session between a first communication device and a second communication device. A SIP control server receives a SIP bye message from the first communication device indicating a loss of the IP communication session, and in response, transfers a notification request for the second communication device to a SIP registration server. The SIP registration server processes a SIP registration message from the second communication device, and in response to the notification request and the SIP registration message, transfers a registration notification for the second communication device to the SIP control server. The SIP control server receives the registration notification for the second communication device, and in response, transfers a SIP invite message to re-establish the IP communication session to the first communication device. | 04-03-2014 |
20140098657 | Error Recovery - Measures for use in recovering from ciphering errors in an unacknowledged mode environment. The measures, including methods, apparatus, and computer program products, may utilize a user equipment (UE), such as a mobile terminal, to communicate with a network node, such as a wireless station. The network node may mark Radio Bearers (RBs) communicating in the UM RLC mode to manage re-establishment of RBs in response to a ciphering error. In the event of a ciphering error in communications between the UE and the network node, the network node may cause a radio link failure. The radio link failure may cause the UE to initiate a cell update. In response to the cell update, the network node and the UE may each re-establish marked RBs, thus reinitializing the cipher values and correcting the error. | 04-10-2014 |
20140104999 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus and a data transmission method of the communication apparatus are disclosed. The communication apparatus receives feedback messages corresponding to failed data from receivers, generates a feedback matrix in response to the feedback messages, selects transmission candidate data from the feedback matrix, performs network coding on the transmission candidate data, and transmits retransmission data generated by the network coding to the receivers. Transmission candidate data is selected from the feedback matrix, and network coding is performed on the transmission candidate data to retransmit data to the receivers. | 04-17-2014 |
20140105000 | METHOD AND APPARATUS TO DETECT AND COMMUNICATE INFORMATION REGARDING STATE OF COMMUNICATION LINK - The present invention relates to methods and apparatuses for of communicating loss of connectivity to the end-user without the end-user explicitly asking for that information, as well as communicating potential mechanisms to restore the loss of connectivity. In embodiments, after detecting loss of connectivity within the CPE, user requests are redirected to a local web server on the fly, which is running on the CPE. The local webserver returns informational status web pages describing the situation, potential causes, and possible steps to fix the connectivity issue. | 04-17-2014 |
20140112119 | METHODS FOR SHORTENING CSFB PERFORMANCE TIME AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for shortening a circuit switch fallback (CSFB) performing time includes determining a plurality of weighting values each associated with one of a plurality of frequencies to be measured during a CSFB procedure, determining a frequency measurement sequence for scheduling the frequencies to be measured in sequence according to the determined weighting values, and measuring a signal quality on the frequencies according to the frequency measurement sequence. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112120 | SERVER, CLIENT DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHODS THEREOF - A server, a client device, and control methods thereof are provided. The server includes: a communicator which communicates with the client device; and a controller which, if a retransmission request for a previously transmitted real-time data packet is received from the client device, repeatedly retransmits the previously transmitted real-time data packet. | 04-24-2014 |
20140112121 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INCLUDING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A data transmission method is provided, including adjusting a data transmission speed when a number of retransmission of a data transmission unit reaches a predetermined number, wherein the retransmission is performed when a transmission failure occurs, transferring the data transmission unit at the adjusted data transmission speed, and readjusting the adjusted data transmission speed to a basic data transmission speed when data transmission is successful, and reducing the basic data transmission speed when at least one of a retransmission rate and a number of the transmission failure satisfies a predetermined threshold condition. | 04-24-2014 |
20140126346 | APPROACH FOR EXTENDED BATTERY LIFE NETWORK NODES - In an embodiment, triplets of network-enabled FCIs operate to monitor the three phases of a power distribution system. In being network-enabled, the FCIs also operate as nodes of an RF mesh network. In an embodiment, upon the detection of a power failure, the triplet of network FCIs is serially operated so as to extend their networking capabilities by approximately three times. | 05-08-2014 |
20140126347 | Address Processing Method, Gateway Device, and Access Point - Embodiments of the present invention relate to an address processing method, a gateway device, and an access point. An access point sends a request message to a gateway device. The access point obtains an address of an access controller from the gateway device. The address of the access controller is an address of an access controller selected by the gateway device. The access point establishes a CAPWAP tunnel with the access controller selected by the gateway device. | 05-08-2014 |
20140133289 | ETHERNET FAULT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Ethernet fault management systems and methods using programmable Type-Length-Value (TLV) offsets combine software-based Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol support with hardware-based fault management support to delegate generation and processing of OAM protocol messages to hardware devices with the software-based protocol support used to program hardware based on fixed offsets in the OAM protocol messages. The hardware can be designed to be flexible since the hardware can be agnostic to the logic within the OAM protocol which would reside in the software. The Ethernet fault management systems and methods combine the flexibility of software-based approaches with the speed and efficiency of hardware-based approaches. | 05-15-2014 |
20140133290 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication system includes first and second wireless communication apparatuses. The first wireless communication apparatus includes a plurality of communication units that perform communication in different frequency bands. The plurality of communication units transmits the same control signal and data in the different frequency bands to keep allocation of communication slots for the second wireless communication apparatus on a plurality of paths. When detecting a communication failure while connecting to and communicating with one communication unit through one path, the second wireless communication apparatus switches to another communication unit and continues the communication through another path. | 05-15-2014 |
20140140196 | METHOD AND SYSTEMS FOR BIDIRECTIONAL OUTAGE BYPASS FOR A VOICE OVER INTERNET PRIVATE BRANCH EXCHANGE - A system and method is disclosed herein for providing a bidirectional outage bypass for a hosted voice-over Internet protocol (VoIP) private branch exchange (PBX) system. An outage monitoring system is in communication with both the bidirectional bypass system and one or more bypass enablers that act at the direction of the bidirectional bypass system. The outage monitoring system detects outages and overloads, as well as, network failures between the VoIP PBX and the public switched telephone network (PSTN). The bidirectional bypass system, in response to detection of an outage, determines error-handling procedures for the bidirectional bypass based on bypass configuration data. The bypass enablers forward outgoing communications between a client device and the PSTN, in accordance the error-handling procedures, by bypassing components that are currently experiencing failures or overloads. The bypass enablers forward incoming communications for the VoIP PBX to an alternative destination in accordance with the error-handling procedures. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140197 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING DATA FLOW OVER A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of controlling data flow over a communication network. For example, an apparatus may include a communication unit to communicate between first and second devices a transfer response, the transfer response in response to a transfer request, the transfer response including a transfer pending status indicating data is pending to be received at the second device, the communication unit is to communicate the transfer response regardless of whether a retry indicator of the transfer request represents a first request for transfer or a retried request. | 05-22-2014 |
20140140198 | Fault Routing Of An Emergency Communication - Aspects of the disclosure relate to routing of an emergency communication under fault conditions. Routing can be implemented in a packet-switching (PS) network that provides voice service. For a network node of the PS network, availability to route the emergency communication through a specific emergency service routing number (ESRN) can be determined and, in response to the network node being unavailable, administrative data associated with the ESRN can be accessed. In addition, an identifier associated with the administrative data can be updated (e.g., created or modified) with data indicative of the device that originated the emergency communication. The administrative data and the resulting identifier can be delivered to a second network node that can route the emergency communication to an emergency service network. | 05-22-2014 |
20140153380 | DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOCOMOTIVE CONSISTS - A method for controlling data communication among two or more of access points within a locomotive consist is disclosed. The method may include selecting, from among the two or more access points, a first access point to output a synchronization signal. The method may also include outputting the synchronization signal from the first access point to the remaining one or more access points, wherein the synchronization signal may be used to synchronize data communication among the two or more access points. | 06-05-2014 |
20140153381 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION NETWORK AND CORRESPONDING NETWORK NODE - The network according to the invention, including functional nodes connected in series by information transmission means, in which the information assumes the form of discrete messages propagating from node to node in the network, is characterized in that the information transmission means between the nodes are bidirectional to allow information to propagate in both circulation directions of the network, and each node includes at least one first and second associated information input/output port, connected by corresponding information transmission means to neighboring nodes and the operation of which is controlled exclusively and sequentially, by means forming a communication automaton, between a mode of operation with asynchronous reception of information from its neighboring nodes and a mode of operation for synchronous transmission of information to its neighboring nodes. | 06-05-2014 |
20140169152 | Intelligent Network Operation - A node may be configured for operation in an intelligent network environment, wherein the node communicates via different modes of communication. The node selects a first mode of communication (e.g., mesh network mode). The node communicates via the first mode of communication. In response to determining a first condition (e.g., interference), the node selects a second mode of communication. The node then communicates via the second mode of communication. In response to determining a second condition (e.g., interference ceases), the node selects the first mode of communication and communicates via the first mode of communication. | 06-19-2014 |
20140177428 | SERVICE LEVEL MIRRORING IN ETHERNET NETWORK - A mirror maintenance endpoint (MEP) is hosted on a provider edge switch within an Ethernet network to perform service level mirroring to a network management device of the Ethernet network. The mirror MEP is configured by the network management device to receive all mirrored frames from provider edge switches in a service provider network and to switch the mirrored frames to the network management device. The mirrored frames are mirrored by the provider edge switches to the mirror MEP during mirror sessions initiated by the network management device. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177429 | TECHNIQUES FOR REDUCING NETWORK CONGESTION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Methods, systems, and devices are described for reducing congestion in a wireless communications system. A second connection failure is detected, and a difference between a timestamp of the second connection failure and a timestamp of a first connection failure is calculated. Upon determining that the difference satisfies a first time threshold, information relating to one or more previous connection failures is cleared. A time period is identified. A number of connection failures from a cell that occur during the time period is identified. A determination is made as to whether the number of connection failures satisfies a threshold. Upon determining that the number of connection failures satisfies the threshold, a future connection request may be withheld for a time period. | 06-26-2014 |
20140177430 | RECOVERY FROM MULTIPLE FAULTS IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of recovery from multiple faults in a communications network comprising: a. receiving an alarm signal from each of a plurality of faults in the communications network, each alarm signal comprising a respective alarm descriptor; b. for each alarm signal: i. analysing the respective alarm descriptor to identify a possible root cause of the alarm signal; ii. providing a root cause metric for the identified possible root cause, the metric being indicative of a difficulty of repairing the respective fault; iii determining a service impact caused to the communications network by the respective fault; iv. providing a service impact metric indicative of the service impact; v. combining the root cause metric and the service impact metric to generate an alarm metric; c. ranking the alarm signals in dependence on their respective alarm metrics; and d. causing the fault having the highest ranked alarm metric to be repaired first. | 06-26-2014 |
20140185426 | Repair Method and Device for Missing Detection of Control Channel - Embodiments of the present invention provide a repair method for missing detection of a control channel and relate to the field of communications. The method includes detecting whether a user equipment misses detecting a physical downlink control channel. After it is detected that the user equipment misses detecting the physical downlink control channel, a repair is performed using a repair policy. | 07-03-2014 |
20140192630 | GRACEFUL HANDLING OF CRITICAL TRAFFIC BLACKHOLING FAULTS - In one embodiment, a network device may detect a data plane critical fault condition, while a corresponding control plane is not experiencing a critical fault condition. In response to a network device based critical fault condition, the network device may activate and advertise an increased and expensive usable metric for each network interface of the network device. On the other hand, in response to an interface based critical fault condition, the network device may activate and advertise an increased and expensive usable metric for one or more particular network interfaces of the interface based critical fault, and signals, over the control plane to a corresponding network device at an opposing end of each particular network interface of the interface based critical fault, a request to activate and advertise an increased and expensive usable metric at the opposing end of each particular network interface. | 07-10-2014 |
20140192631 | METHOD FOR DETECTING SECURITY ERROR IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND DEVICE OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - According to one embodiment, a method of performing a re-establishment procedure in a mobile communication system includes: receiving at least one packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) control plane data unit; performing an integrity check on the at least one PDCP control plane data unit; identifying an integrity check failure with regard to the at least one PDCP control plane data unit; and performing a re-establishment procedure if the integrity check failure is identified to exist with regard to the at least one PDCP control plane data unit. | 07-10-2014 |
20140198630 | FAILURE REPAIR SEQUENCE GENERATION FOR NODAL NETWORK - Failure repair sequence generation systems and methods may generate a repair sequence for nodes experiencing failure in a nodal-network-based system that meets acceptable performance metrics, such as acceptable total network damage, acceptable node-failure preventability rate, or a combination thereof. | 07-17-2014 |
20140204726 | ALARM MANAGEMENT APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MANAGING ALARMS - An alarm management apparatus includes a processor. The processor is configured to receive alarms notified upon a plurality of communication apparatuses detecting a failure. The alarms include identification information for identifying types of the respective alarms. Each of the plurality of communication apparatuses is included in one of a plurality of communication networks. The processor is configured to check development situations of respective types of alarms received from each of the plurality of communication networks on basis of the identification information to identify a particular communication network and a particular type of alarms. The processor is configured to cause a first relay apparatus of a plurality of relay apparatuses to discard first alarms of the particular type. The first alarms are notified from a first communication apparatus included in the particular communication network. The first communication apparatus is not adjacent to a development location of the failure. | 07-24-2014 |
20140211604 | Method and Apparatus for the Fast Detection of Connectivity Loss Between Devices in a Network - A method and apparatus for quickly determining the status of a network device in a network communicates status inquiry messages over the forwarding plane of one network device to at least one neighboring network device. The status inquiry messages indicate the connectivity status with at least one neighboring network device. | 07-31-2014 |
20140211605 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING CELL OUTAGE COMPENSATION AND CAPACITY AND COVERAGE OPTIMIZATION - The present invention discloses a method and an apparatus for coordinating cell outage compensation and capacity and coverage optimization, and belongs to the communications field. In the present invention, a cell to be coordinated is determined, where the cell is a cell that needs coordination of a COC action and a CCO action; priorities of the COC action and the CCO action are compared, and a high-priority action and a low-priority action are determined in the COC action and the CCO action; and for the cell to be coordinated, the high-priority action continues to be performed, and the low-priority action is stopped from being performed. This effectively solves a problem of a conflict generated when the COC action and the CCO action are performed for the same cell, and ensures normal execution of a network optimization action with a relatively high priority. | 07-31-2014 |
20140219076 | REDUNDANCY SUPPORT FOR NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION (NAT) - Stateful failover redundancy support is provided for network address translation (NAT). A master NAT device is backed-up with at least one back-up NAT device. Existing sessions are synchronized between the two NAT devices, such as via a dedicated link between them. In the event of a failover where the master NAT device is unable to perform its NAT functions, ownership of Internet protocol (IP) addresses is transferred from the master NAT device to the back-up NAT device. The back-up NAT device, which is now owner of the IP addresses, assumes the NAT functionality associated with these IP addresses and continues the existing sessions, as well as processing new sessions. | 08-07-2014 |
20140233368 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR DETECTING ORPHAN SY OR RX SESSIONS USING AUDIT MESSAGES WITH FAKE PARAMETER VALUES - A policy and charging rules function (PCRF), generates a Diameter audit message concerning an application level Diameter session for which local resources are maintained by the PCRF. The PCRF includes, in the audit message, a fake parameter value. The PCRF sends the audit message with the fake parameter value to the OCS or the AF over an Sy or Rx interface. The PCRF receives a response to the audit message from the OCS or AF. The PCRF determines, based on the response, whether the application level session comprises and orphan session. The PCRF, in response to determining that the application level Diameter session comprises an orphan session frees the local resources maintained by the PCRF for the orphan session. | 08-21-2014 |
20140241143 | EARLY TERMINATION OF A BASE STATION IDENTITY CODE PROCEDURE IN TD-SDCMA - An early BSIC (base station identity code) abort procedure includes comparing a first signal strength of a serving cell with a first threshold and comparing a second signal strength of a target cell to a second threshold. The first threshold is a sum of a network indicated threshold and a user equipment (UE) threshold. The second threshold is a difference between the network indicated threshold and the UE threshold. When the first signal strength is below the first threshold and the second signal strength is above the second threshold, the base station identity code (BSIC) procedure is initiated. A number of BSIC failure attempts is adaptively set before terminating the BSIC procedure. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241144 | Reducing Fragmentation of Packets in a Networking Environment - Automated techniques reduce packet fragmentation in a communications network environment, including a networking environment that uses tunnels. In a tunneling environment, a tunnel endpoint evaluates whether tunnel processing for an outbound packet will cause the packet to exceed a particular size such as a message transmission unit (“MTU”) size, which in turn would lead to error processing and/or fragmentation of the packet. Similar MTU and packet mismatch may occur in a system across the virtual machine and the hypervisor, a networking stack and the physical MTU possible on the network. If so, the tunnel endpoint or the network driver simulates an error condition and returns an error message to the protocol stack that prepared the packet, so that the packet size can be reduced before the packet is actually sent on the tunnel. Existing functionality is leveraged to perform the size reduction, thus obviating the need for administrator intervention. | 08-28-2014 |
20140241145 | METHODS FOR ANALYZING NETWORK TRAFFIC AND DEVICES THEREOF - A method, non-transitory computer readable medium and traffic analysis computing device for analyzing network traffic comprising sending to one or more network devices a request to capture one or more network information upon identifying a fault within a network. Next, one or more network reporting files comprising the captured one or more network information is received from each of the one or more network devices. Upon receiving the network reporting files, a location at which the identified fault occurred within the network is determined. Based on the determination, one or more corrective actions is performed at the location of the identified fault within the network. | 08-28-2014 |
20140247708 | ROUTER AND RAPID RESPONSE NETWORK - A router includes a plurality of wireless network carrier cards, each of the network carrier cards adapted for use with one of a like plurality of different carrier networks, means for determining which of the plurality of network carrier cards provides a suitable connection to a carrier network and means for selecting one or more suitable connections to one or more carrier networks and for connecting the EVDO router to the carrier network through a particular one of the plurality of network carrier cards and a load balancing processor for load balancing between a plurality of different backbone networks and wherein the load balancing processor directs traffic among multiple networks to provide a desired throughput. In one embodiment, the router is provided as an evolution-data optimized (EVDO) wireless router. | 09-04-2014 |
20140269250 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TUNNEL-FREE FAST REROUTING IN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORKS - An information handling system is provided. The information handling system includes a first, a second, a third, and a fourth network device. The first network device is coupled to the second network device and to the third network device, while the fourth network device is also coupled to the second and third network devices. At least the fourth network device has a plurality of interfaces and one or more processors in communication with the interfaces and a memory. At least one of the one or more processors is configured to disassociate a network address of the first network device from a first VRF instance and associate the network address of the first network device with a second VRF instance when a network failure associated with the first VRF instance is detected. Methods for rerouting traffic through the information handling system in response to a network event are also disclosed. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269251 | NETWORK-BASED ALARMING AND NETWORK-BASED RECONFIGURATION - Techniques for supporting communication by base stations are disclosed. In an aspect of the present disclosure, for network-based alarming, a base station may notify a designated user equipment (UE) whenever certain trigger events occurred at the base station. The base station may send notification messages for detected trigger events to the UE for timely intervention. In another aspect of the present disclosure, for network-based reconfiguration, a base station for a small cell may be reconfigured by a network server based on performance metrics for base stations in a wireless system. The reconfiguration may improve the performance of the base station and possibly other base stations in the wireless system. | 09-18-2014 |
20140269252 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR MANAGING SWITCHING DEVICES IN AN INFORMATION HANDLING SYSTEM - Systems and methods are provided that allow for the management of switching devices in an information handling system without having to access the switching device. An information handling system as provided herein includes at least one switching device and a controlling device in communication with the at least one switching device. The controlling device includes a network interface component configured to receive a request from the at least one switching device, and one or more processors. The one or more processors are configured to provide configuration settings and an operating system to the at least one switching device in response to the received request, record network traffic of the at least one switching device, provide the recorded traffic to an analytics engine, and debug the at least one switching device based on information received from the analytics engine. | 09-18-2014 |
20140293768 | TECHNIQUE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING REMOTE CELLULAR BASE STATION RADIOS FROM THE NETWORK MANAGEMENT PLATFORM USING LOCAL WIRELESS HOTSPOT AT THE RADIO SITE - Systems and methods are provided for first-level debugging for a radio equipment of a base station using a local wireless hotspot created by another radio equipment of the base station in local wireless proximity to the radio equipment. In one embodiment, a network management system is remotely connected to a Radio Equipment Controller (REC) of a base station in a cellular communications network. The network management system determines that there is a loss of communication between the REC and a first Remote Radio Equipment (RRE) of the base station. The network management system causes a second RRE of the base station to create a local wireless hotspot and then obtains debug information for the first RRE that is obtained by the second RRE via the local wireless hotspot. The network management system then utilizes the debug information for the first RRE. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293769 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING DEVICE FAULTS - The present invention relates to the communication field and discloses a method, an apparatus, and a system for processing device faults, which are used to recover the device fault in a timely manner and improve user's service experience. The processing method includes: receiving a connection deletion request message sent by a network device in the case of a fault, where the connection deletion request message includes a global packet data network connection identifier FQ-CSID; locally deleting a packet data network PDN connection related to the FQ-CSID, or retaining a PDN connection related to the FQ-CSID and receiving downlink data corresponding to the PDN connection; and performing a network-triggered service recovery procedure. The solutions provided in the present invention are applicable to device fault recovery scenarios. | 10-02-2014 |
20140293770 | METHODS FOR PERFORMING AND CONTROLLING RETRANSMISSION AND APPARATUS THEREOF - The present disclosure proposes methods for performing and controlling retransmission in a MIMO system and relevant network elements therefor. A method for performing retransmission includes transmitting one or more data blocks to the base station by using a first set of beams. The number of beams in the first set of beams corresponds to a first channel rank. Each beam of the first set of beams is generated by using at least one of pilot channel, data channel and control channel. The method further includes receiving a signal from the base station indicating erroneously received data blocks, and retransmitting the erroneously received data blocks in response to the signal. | 10-02-2014 |
20140301180 | OPPORTUNISTIC MEDIA PATCHING FOR A COMMUNICATION SESSION - A user equipment (UE) selectively attempts recovery of lost media for a real-time communication session. In an embodiment, the UE detects presence of a lost media packet from another UE participating in the real-time communication session that did not successfully arrive at the UE. The UE evaluates a set of recovery criteria associated with the lost media packet to attempt to dynamically select at least one external source from a plurality of external sources from which the lost media packet can potentially be recovered at different predicted reliabilities and/or response times for attempting recovery of the lost media packet based on the set of recovery criteria. The UE attempts to recover the lost media packet from the selected at least one external source based on the evaluation. | 10-09-2014 |
20140307536 | TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A terminal and a communication method thereof whereby, even in a case of employing the asymmetric carrier aggregation system and further employing the MIMO transmission method for upstream channels, the error characteristic of control information can be prevented from being degraded. In the terminal, a transport signal forming unit forms transport signals by arranging, based on an arrangement rule, ACK/NACK and CQI in a plurality of layers. According to the arrangement rule, an error detection result is arranged, on a priority basis, in a layer that is different from a layer in which the channel quality information is arranged. In this way, the puncturing of CQI using ACK/NACK can be minimized, with the result that the error characteristic of control information can be prevented from being degraded. | 10-16-2014 |
20140307537 | METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN IMS NODES - A method of communication between two nodes providing online charging functionalities in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS), network is described, wherein a first node is configured to operate as a Charging Triggering Function (CTF) and wherein a second node is configured to operate as an Online Charging Service (OCS). The method may alleviate drawbacks stemming from low availability of the OCS. | 10-16-2014 |
20140313877 | PROCESSING METHOD OF WIRELESS FIDELITY TECHNOLOGY AND USER EQUIPMENT - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a processing method of a wireless fidelity technology and a user equipment, where implementation of the method includes: detecting whether a radio link failure occurs at an air interface of a wireless fidelity network; resetting a bottom layer of the wireless fidelity network, and suspending a radio bearer to an access point of the wireless fidelity network, when it is detected that the radio link failure occurs at the air interface of the wireless fidelity network, during a process that a base station distributes mobile data for a user equipment by using the wireless fidelity technology; and restoring the radio bearer to the access point of the wireless fidelity network, when the resetting of the bottom layer of the wireless fidelity network is completed, and it is detected that the air interface of the wireless fidelity network is restored to be normal. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313878 | Retransmission Method and Device - Embodiments of the present invention provide a retransmission method and device. The method includes: controlling, by a network side device, a network side node to send a second space processing mode to a terminal after the network side node receives a negative acknowledgement fed back by the terminal, where the negative acknowledgement is used to indicate that the terminal fails in decoding the downlink data sent by a first node, the second space processing mode is used to indicate a space processing mode applied by the second node to the downlink data, and the second space processing mode is different from a first space processing mode applied by the first node to the downlink data; and controlling, by the network side device, the second node to perform space processing for the downlink data by using the second space processing mode and then retransmit the downlink data to the terminal. | 10-23-2014 |
20140313879 | Processing Transport Packets - Method, relay node and computer program product for processing transport packets, the transport packets conveying: (i) data stream units forming a data stream, and (ii) correction data units relating to the data stream units, where each transport packet contains information identifying the content of units in that transport packet. Transport packets are received at the relay node, the data stream units in the transport packets received at the relay node being insufficient to constitute the data stream. At least some of the correction data units and the data stream units in the received transport packets are used to generate substitute data stream units thereby to substantially recover the data stream at the relay node. The relay node packetises the data stream units of the substantially recovered data stream with correction data units to form output transport packets for transmission from the relay node, and then the output transport packets are transmitted from the relay node. | 10-23-2014 |
20140321260 | OPTIMIZING FAULT SYNCHRONIZATION IN A BIDIRECTIONAL DATA NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for optimizing fault synchronization in a bidirectional data network are provided. In an example, a downstream endpoint of the data network receives a first Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). The first AIS indicates a first FLI of an upstream interface having an interface fault. The downstream endpoint transmits, to an upstream endpoint of the data network, a second AIS including a Remote Defect Indication (RDI) and a second FLI identifying the downstream endpoint. An upstream endpoint of the data network receives the second AIS and determines that the AIS is an AIS-RDI (AIS-RDI) from the presence of the second FLI. The presence of the AIS-RDI triggers the upstream endpoint to initiate tunnel failure synchronization with the downstream endpoint. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321261 | COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A communications network including a plurality of communicating stations, each communicating station being connectable to two adjacent communicating stations via respective ring connections, the ring connections being arranged to define at least one communications ring interconnecting the plurality of communicating stations, the network being adapted to at least partially reconfigure the ring connections in response to detection of at least one network fault. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321262 | Network Monitoring for Active Medical Device Alarms - A system and method for monitoring a patient over a network. In one embodiment, the system includes a network; a connection device configured to connect to the network, the connection device including a reporter that transmits reports to the network; a user interface device in communication with the network, the user interface device including a display and a gateway; a network management system in communication with the network, the network management system comprising an active alert system list listing each user interface device having a gateway that has registered with the network management system; a communications interface in communication with the network, the communications interface receiving reports from the reporter and transmitting reports to the network management system; wherein the network management system determines if a report received from the communications interface is to be sent to the user interface device as an alert. | 10-30-2014 |
20140321263 | Method of Handling Data Transmission and Reception in Dual Connectivity - A method of handling data transmission and reception in dual connectivity, for a communication device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises connecting to at least two evolved base station (eNBs) including a first eNB and a second eNB in the wireless communication system, being configured a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) entity corresponding to at least two radio link control (RLC) entities including a first RLC entity for receiving/transmitting data from/to the first eNB and a second RLC entity for receiving/transmitting data from/to the second eNB, and when detecting a radio link failure a connection to the second eNB, not initiating a radio resource control (RRC) connection re-establishment procedure for connection recovery. | 10-30-2014 |
20140328156 | SERVICE ACQUISITION TECHNIQUES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Improved service acquisition techniques for wireless communications systems are described. In one embodiment, for example, an apparatus may comprise a processor circuit, a service acquisition application for execution by the processor circuit to select multiple services for attempted acquisition, and a service management module for execution by the processor circuit to attempt to acquire the multiple services according to a connection mode, the service management module to attempt to acquire the multiple services concurrently when the connection mode comprises a concurrent connection mode. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 11-06-2014 |
20140328157 | OPTIMIZATION OF A HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM USING A LOCAL POWER LINE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for optimizing a home automation system comprising a plurality of communicating devices capable of exchanging information therebetween via a local low bandwidth PLC network. According to the invention, the method comprises a phase in which the PLC transmission power is adjusted for each new device added to the network, said phase comprising the following successive steps: installing ( | 11-06-2014 |
20140334286 | INTER-DOMAIN FAST REROUTE METHODS AND NETWORK DEVICES - A network device, is to be deployed in a network between a first network domain and a second network domain, and is to be configured for fast reroute. The network device includes a first traffic forwarder control module, corresponding to the first network domain, which is to determine a primary next hop in the first network domain. The control plane includes a second traffic forwarder control module, corresponding to the second network domain, which is to determine a backup next hop in the second network domain. The backup next hop is to be used as a fast reroute for the primary next hop in response to a failure associated with the primary next hop. The control plane includes a controller module, in communication with the first and second traffic forwarder control modules, which is to configure a forwarding structure of the forwarding plane with the primary and backup next hops. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334287 | Method and Apparatus for Handling Address Conflict - A method and an apparatus for handling an address conflict. The method for handling an address conflict includes: acquiring a media access control (MAC) address of an associated first node and a first auxiliary identifier; receiving a MAC frame that carries the first auxiliary identifier; and sending an auxiliary identifier conflict report message to the first node when it is determined that the MAC frame is sent by a second node. According to the method and the apparatus for handling an address conflict in the embodiments of the present invention, the following problem can be detected and resolved. An AP auxiliary identifier conflict is caused by a MAC header compression method where an auxiliary identifier is used to replace a MAC address. | 11-13-2014 |
20140334288 | WIRELESS TAP-OFF DEVICE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING WIRELESS LAN SERVICE - A wireless tap-off device capable of providing a wireless LAN service, which can allow a user to receive a wireless LAN service anywhere in the country through a tap-off device of an existing CATV network, is provided. The wireless tap-off device may include a cable modem which converts a CATV signal into an Ethernet signal, outputs the converted signal, converts an Ethernet signal into a CATV signal, and transmits the converted signal to a connector, an access point which converts an Ethernet signal applied from the cable modem into a wireless signal, transmits the converted signal to a computer device through an antenna in a wireless manner, converts a wireless signal applied from the computer device into an Ethernet signal, and provides the converted signal to the cable modem, a DC power supply, and a switching unit. | 11-13-2014 |
20140341011 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING CARRIER AGGREGATION - A random access procedure control method and apparatus is provided for controlling a random access procedure efficiently in a mobile communication system supporting carrier aggregation. The method for controlling random access procedure of a terminal in a wireless communication system having a primary cell and at least one secondary cell includes initiating a random access procedure in the primary cell and the at least one secondary cells, detecting a random access failure of a terminal performing the random access procedure, determining whether the random access failure is detected in the primary cell or the at least one secondary cell, and determining whether to continue the random access procedure according to a result of the determining of whether the random access failure is detected. | 11-20-2014 |
20140347973 | System for Maintaining the Integrity of a Tour Group - A group of tourists traveling, for example, in a foreign land needs to be sure that no-one becomes lost. Embodiments of the present invention take advantage of mobile wireless terminals colloquially known as “smartphones” to quickly identify any members of a tour group that stray from the group, and to help them rejoin the group. Also, with the assistance of a Central Command Center, appropriate authorities such as a tour leader or relatives can be automatically notified, and search operations initiated if needed. | 11-27-2014 |
20140347974 | DATA TRANSMISSION NETWORK AND PROGRAMMABLE NETWORK NODE - The network including functional nodes ( | 11-27-2014 |
20140355409 | Method For Debugging Private VLAN - A method, apparatus and computer program product for debugging private Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) is provided. In a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) domain wherein a primary Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) includes promiscuous ports and wherein a secondary VLAN includes isolated ports, a determination is made at a first network device whether a CFM packet is received on a primary VLAN or a secondary VLAN. When the CFM packet is received on a secondary VLAN, then the CFM packet is responses to on the primary VLAN. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355410 | Systems and Methods for Data Transmission - Systems and methods are provided for data transmission. For example, first data to be sent is obtained; the first data is sent to a reception terminal; second data related to a packet-loss rate returned by the reception terminal is received; and in response to the packet-loss rate exceeding a pre-determined threshold, at least a portion of the first data is sent multiple times. | 12-04-2014 |
20140355411 | CELL DEPENDENT MULTI-GROUP HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT METHOD FOR MULTICAST IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are described including determining address using an access point address and a multicast group address, transmitting a recovery request message to a recovery server to request recovery data using the address and receiving the recovery data from the recovery server. Also described are a method and apparatus including receiving a registration message, transmitting a reply to the registration message, receiving a recovery request message, transmitting recovery data responsive to the recovery request message and transmitting a message to a recovery multicast group to determine status of the recovery multicast group. | 12-04-2014 |
20140362678 | NETWORK PHYSICAL LINK (PHY) SWITCH SYSTEM - One example includes network physical link (PHY) switch system. The system includes a multiplexer to output a first of a plurality of data streams that are input to a PHY device in response to a first state of a selection signal. The system also includes a data detector that monitors the first data stream and provides a trigger signal in response to a predetermined condition associated with the first data stream. The system further includes a switching controller that provides the selection signal, and in response to a switching command signal indicating a command to switch from the first data stream to the second data stream, monitors the data detector for the trigger signal and changes the selection signal from the first state to a second state in response to receiving the trigger signal to switch to the second data stream of the plurality of data streams. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362679 | AUTOMATIC RETRANSMISSION IN COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Automatic retransmission in communications systems. An embodiment includes retransmitting data. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is executed on a portion of data received as part of a data stream at a receiver antenna. Feedback information of acknowledgment (ACK) or negative acknowledgement (NACK) for the portion of data is determined based on a result of the CRC. It is identified that the portion of data is to be retransmitted based on the feedback information indicating a NACK with respect to the portion of data. A retransmission mode is selected for the portion of data based on desired characteristics of the data stream, including a first mode that retransmits the portion of data on at least a first transmitter antenna while transmitting new data on at least a second transmitter antenna; and a second mode that retransmits the portion of data simultaneously on at least the first and second transmitter antennas. | 12-11-2014 |
20140362680 | WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS METHOD - Arrangements with wireless transmitter having: transmission operation processing unit allocating first header information (FHI) including physical address (PA) information to a header, allocates first data error checking code (FDECC) for detecting an error of FHI, second header information (SHI) as redundant header information of FHI, second data error checking code (SDECC) for detecting an error of SHI, divides data field into cell units, and adds third error checking code to each cell, to generate the communication frame; and a wireless transmission unit. A wireless receiver with: wireless receiving unit receiving the frame; reception operation processing unit checking if errors exists in FHI based on FDECC allocated to data field, and if an error, further checks if error in SHI based on SDECC, and if no error, generates a predetermined PA by using SHI, and judges if received communication frame is addressed to own wireless receiver based on generated predetermined PA. | 12-11-2014 |
20140369177 | Implementing Multicast Link Trace Connectivity Fault Management in an Ethernet Network - Multicast link trace Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is implemented in an Ethernet network by causing nodes on the network which perform Reverse Path Forwarding Check (RPFC) based on packet Source Address (SA) to not update the packet SA when updating the content of the CFM message. Alternatively multicast CFM is implemented by causing nodes on the network to update the packet SA when the content of the CFM message is updated, but cause a secondary RPFC process to be implemented by a control process in connection with processing the CFM message. The secondary RPFC process is based on a combination of source and content contained in the payload of the CFM message. | 12-18-2014 |
20140369178 | APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT HANDLING FOR EMERGENCY BEARER SERVICES - A Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context handling method for a Mobile Station (MS) with a PDP context for an emergency bearer service is provided, wherein a radio access bearer (RAB) associated with the PDP context is released by a network. The method comprises the steps of: downgrading the maximum uplink bit rate and the maximum downlink bit rate associated with the PDP context from original non-zero positive values to a zero value; sending a request signal associated with a modification of the maximum uplink bit rate and the maximum downlink bit rate; and re-establishing the RAB for the PDP context with the maximum uplink bit rate and the maximum downlink bit rate reconfigured as the original non-zero values after the request signal has been sent. | 12-18-2014 |
20140376358 | SYMBOL DETECTION TECHNIQUE - A technique of processing an Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) transmission is disclosed. As to a method aspect of the technique, the method comprises the steps of requesting a retransmission of a transport block; receiving the retransmission of the transport block; and detecting modulation symbols. The retransmission is requested in response to an error-detecting code indicating an error in the transport block as received in at least one previous transmission. The modulation symbols are detected based on at least a part of the received retransmission and information from the at least one previous transmission. At least in some embodiments, a detection rate is thus improved. | 12-25-2014 |
20150009796 | Reconciliation of Network State Across Physical Domains - Some embodiments provide a method for a first network controller located at a first domain that manages a logical network spanning several physical domains including the first domain. Upon reconnection to a second network controller located at a second physical domain of the several physical domains after a period of disconnect, the method receives a first set of updates indicating modifications to logical network state from the second network controller. The method reconciles any conflicts between (i) the logical network state stored at the first controller, (ii) the first set of updates received from the second network controller, and (iii) updates received from other network controllers located at different physical domains of the several physical domains. The method transmits a second set of updates to the second controller indicating modifications to the logical network state based on the reconciliation of conflicts. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009797 | Managing Forwarding of Logical Network Traffic Between Physical Domains - Some embodiments provide a method for a first network controller located at a first physical domain that manages a logical network spanning several physical domains including the first domain. The method detects that connectivity is lost between the first network controller and a second network controller located in a second one of the physical domains. The method identifies a set of forwarding elements managed by the first network controller that implement the logical network. The method instructs the set of forwarding elements to drop packets for the logical network received from forwarding elements in the second physical domain. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009798 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, INFORMATION-RELAYING METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes a communication apparatus that processes a packet according to control information set by a control apparatus; a first control apparatus that controls the communication apparatus by setting the control information in the communication apparatus; and a second control apparatus that operates in concert with the first control apparatus. The first control apparatus transmits information necessary for interoperation between the first and second control apparatuses to the second control apparatus via the communication apparatus. | 01-08-2015 |
20150009799 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM RECORDING COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A communication device is connected to an end of a first network of a cascade topology, and also to a second network. This communication device transmits a first list including information of communication devices, in the first network, that are destinations of transmission of frames through the first network, to an opposing communication device, in the second network, located at another end of the first network, and receives, from the opposing communication device, a second list including information of communication devices, in the first network, that are destinations of transmission of frames from the opposing communication device through the first network. The communication device determines in which of the first list and the second list a destination of a frame is included, and when the destination of the frame is included in the second list, transmits the frame to the second network. | 01-08-2015 |
20150016241 | BACK-UP PATH FOR IN-HOME DIAGNOSTICS AND OTHER COMMUNICATIONS - A local router for a home network pairs with a mobile device via a local network connection. The local router is also connected to a wide area network. The local router receives, from the mobile device and over the local network connection, configuration settings for a backup path for the wide area network. The backup path includes the local network connection and a mobile broadband connection using the mobile device. The local router detects an interruption with the local router's connection to the managed wide area network and forwards, based on the detecting, critical traffic from the home network via the backup path. | 01-15-2015 |
20150023146 | APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - An apparatus includes a memory; and a processor coupled to the memory and configured to: detect change of an acceptable transmission unit in a network segment, the change being detected due to a transmission of a first packet transmitted from a first virtual machine; identify a second virtual machine configured to communicate via the network segment; and cause the second virtual machine to transmit a second packet based on the change. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023147 | METHODS FOR MANAGING TRANSACTION IN SOFTWARE DEFINED NETWORK - Disclosed are methods for managing transactions in a software defined network (SDN). A method performed in a controller may comprise generating a group message for modifying flow entries of a plurality of flow tables related to each other in a switch; and transmitting the group message to the switch. Thus, a plurality of flow tables having relevance to each other can be simultaneously modified so that modifications on a plurality of switches can be synchronized, and consistency of them can be guaranteed. | 01-22-2015 |
20150023148 | Wireless Network Fault Diagnosis Method and Device - A wireless network fault diagnosis method and device are provided. The method includes receiving, by a network management server, sampling data of user equipment in at least one area in a wireless network, where the sampling data includes attribute information of the user equipment and probe-collected information of the user equipment; generating, by the network management server according to the sampling data of the user equipment in the at least one area, statistical information that corresponds to each area of the at least one area; and performing, by the network management server, area-based wireless network fault diagnosis according to the statistical information that corresponds to each area of the at least one area. Therefore, area-based wireless network fault diagnosis is performed, a fault trend of the user equipment can be fully perceived, so that corresponding measures are taken against wireless network faults to effectively improve satisfaction on user experience. | 01-22-2015 |
20150036476 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING TRANSMISSION OF TTI BUNDLES VIA A LTE DOWNLINK CHANNEL - A method and system for facilitating communication between an Evolved Node B (eNB) and a user equipment (UE) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) network. In particular the technology addresses downlink transmission via potentially large TTI bundles. The eNB transmits a downlink grant message to the UE, indicating a pending TTI bundle for downlink transmission. The UE transmits an acknowledgement message to the eNB if the DL grant message is successfully received and decoded. The eNB aborts transmission of the TTI bundle if it fails to timely receive the acknowledgement and may reassign the network resources scheduled for use in the transmission. In some embodiments, the eNB may introduce a delay between the downlink grant message and the TTI bundle. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036477 | Method and device for detecting and repairing channel anomaly of active antenna - The present disclosure provides a method and device for detecting and repairing a channel anomaly of an active antenna, and the method includes: an operation state of a transmission channel or a reception channel is determined by analyzing in real time data of a feedback coupling channel or data of the reception channel, if the operation state is anomalous, an anomaly protection is performed and an alarm is reported; a level of the alarm and a reason causing the alarm are determined, if data of the transmission/reception channel are anomalous and the anomaly protection is performed, a current antenna beam forming parameter is stored and the antenna beam forming parameter is set to zero; after the alarm has been eliminated, a stored valid antenna beam forming parameter is set to a valid value; and if a transmission/reception analog channel operates anomalously and the anomaly protection is performed, the antenna beam forming parameter is re-acquired and an acquired valid antenna beam forming parameter is configured. The present disclosure can detect states of multiple transmission/reception channels of an active antenna without an extra calibration channel, thus reducing the design cost of a system. | 02-05-2015 |
20150036478 | EVENT TRIGGERED TRACEROUTE FOR OPTIMIZED ROUTING IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a network device (e.g., a master controller) may detect an event on a current path in a computer network from a local network domain to a destination address prefix of a remote domain. In response, the device may dynamically (e.g., intelligently) determine a trace target destination address within the destination address prefix, and may perform (or request performance of) a Traceroute of the current path and a selection of alternate paths in the network from the local network domain to the trace target, where the Traceroute is adapted to obtain per-hop measurements along the respective traced path. The measurements may then be stored, for example, to be used for optimal path selection, fault identification reporting, etc. | 02-05-2015 |
20150043325 | Wireless Terminal Device, Measurement Control Method, Control Method, Measurement Control Program, and Recording Medium - A wireless terminal device performs a communication via the wireless LAN and also performs a communication via a wireless communication network different from the wireless LAN. The wireless terminal device is provided with a determiner for determining whether the device is moving or not, and a measurement controller for measuring a communication power of a communication radio wave transmitted from an access point of the wireless LAN in the position of the determination and for transmitting the information for allowing the operation administrator to specify the measured value of the communication power and the measurement position to the predetermined destination via the above described wireless communication network, triggered by a fact that the determiner determines that the wireless terminal device is not moving. | 02-12-2015 |
20150049599 | GUARANTEEING MOBILE USER EQUIPMENT REATTACHMENT TO A MINI BASE STATION UNDER INTERMITTENT IP NETWORK FAILURES - This invention relates to remedying a major shortcoming of the 3G and beyond cellular wireless communications network architecture, where an intermittent IP network failure causes mobile (cellular) user stations attached to a mini base station (MBS) to become unreachable after the failure is cleared. The MBS automatically changes its configuration and particularly its Location Area Code (LAC) value from its previous LAC (i.e., before the occurrence of the failure), according to an aspect of this invention, to force the mobile user equipment (MUE) to re-register with the cellular wireless communications network after the IP network failure is cleared. Doing so, the MUE becomes reachable without needing any manual power cycling of the MBS or the MUE. | 02-19-2015 |
20150049600 | PRIORITIZING FREQUENCIES IN EMBMS MULTI-FREQUENCY DEPLOYMENT DURING RLF/OOS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus may be a UE. The UE receives, from a serving cell, system information including a plurality of SAIs. The UE determines an interest in receiving an MBMS service from at least one cell on one or more candidate frequencies based on the received SAIs. The UE determines that the UE has encountered one of an RLF or an OOS on the serving cell. The UE prioritizes network reestablishment on the one or more frequencies that carry the MBMS service the UE is interested in receiving upon determining the UE encountered the one of the RLF or the OOS. | 02-19-2015 |
20150055446 | INTELLIGENT POLICY AND CHARGING RULE FUNCTION (PCRF) RESTORATION - A first device associated with an evolved packet core network receives a first update request from a second device associated with the evolved packet core network. The first update request is associated with a communication session previously provided between the first device and the second device, and the first update request is generated based on a voice/video request. The first device generates an update answer in response to the first update request, where the update answer includes a code requesting that the communication session be restored between the first device and the second device. The first device receives, based on the code, a second update request from the second device, where the second update request includes session information associated with the communication session. The first device restores, based on the session information, the communication session between the first device and the second device to create a restored communication session. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055447 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTIVE ACCESS CONTROL WITH ENSURED SERVICE CONTINUITY GUARANTEES - A method and system for providing a continued service to user equipment (UE) under overload conditions is disclosed. A primary network undertakes a protective measure under unable to serve conditions by commanding a change in the UE network access behavior so that the UE can move to the secondary PLMN. After receiving the indication from the primary network, the UE connects to the secondary network and continues to obtain the services from the secondary network. The secondary PLMN ID can be sent to the UE in system information. Further, the information like overload indication, secondary PLMN ID and the time for which the UE can obtain the services from the secondary PLMN ID can be sent to individual UEs over dedicated messages either on an Access Stratum (AS) message or over a Non Access Stratum (NAS) message. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055448 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONFIGURATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a configuration in a wireless communication system is provided. A user equipment (UE) receives a configuration from a first node, stores the received configuration if a connection failure is detected, and transmits the stored configuration to a second node. The connection failure may be one of a radio link failure (RLF) or a handover failure (HOF). The configuration may include at least one of a discontinuous reception (DRX) configuration and a measurement configuration. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055449 | Online Reconfiguration Transition Synchronization - An online reconfiguration method comprising communicating data transfer units (DTUs) using a subscriber line, monitoring the subscriber line for a line condition event, detecting the line condition event, wherein detecting the line condition event comprises determining whether the line condition triggers a threshold, sending an online reconfiguration request message that indicates a robust management channel (RMC) frame type in response to detecting the line condition event, wherein the RMC frame type is a normal RMC frame that comprises time marker information when the line condition event does not trigger the threshold, and wherein the RMC frame type is a special RMC frame that comprises time marker information when the line condition event triggers the threshold, receive an online reconfiguration response message that comprises the time marker information, and synchronizing a transition of one or more transmission parameters using the time marker information. | 02-26-2015 |
20150055450 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SYNCHRONIZING MULTI-LEVEL OUTPUT DEVICES IN AN UNRELIABLE NETWORK - A method and system are described that allow a device operating in coordination with other devices to synchronize the devices operation with the other devices. A controllable device processor may determine that a received data packet is a retransmission of an initial control command data packet. The processor may obtain from the retransmitted data packet a start value and a time indicator related to performance of the operation. A ramp rate related to the operation to be performed may be obtained. Using the time indicator, an adjusted ramp rate may be calculated. An output value for the device may be set based on the start value, the adjusted ramp rate, and the time indicator. The adjusted ramp rate may result in completing the operation at substantially the same time as though the device received the original command. | 02-26-2015 |
20150063091 | RECOVERING CONNECTION IN LTE LOCAL AREA NETWORK FOR EPS AND LOCAL SERVICES - A method is disclosed, comprising sending a local connection re-establishment request to a local access apparatus in response to a failure of a radio link by which a user equipment was connected to a local network and operated in a single radio mode to use bearer services provided by a macro network; and recovering local signalling radio bearer in response to successfully verifying, by the local access apparatus, local context of the user equipment. | 03-05-2015 |
20150063092 | METHOD OF RECEIVING OR TRANSMITTING A PACKET, TERMINAL THEREOF, AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method of receiving a packet by a receiving terminal is provided. The method includes receiving one or more packets including information about an event which belongs to a same kind of event from a transmitting terminal, and selecting at least one packet from among the received one or more packets based on time information of a certain point of time at the certain point of time. | 03-05-2015 |
20150071051 | ACKNOWLEDGEMENT, ERROR RECOVERY AND BACKOFF OPERATION OF UPLINK MULTI-USER MULTIPLE-INPUT-MULTIPLE-OUTPUT COMMUNICATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Wireless communication in a wireless network comprises obtaining a transmission opportunity period (TXOP) for communicating with an access point (AP) over a wireless communication channel. An announcement is sent to the AP to share the transmission opportunity period among wireless stations, as a multi-user transmission opportunity period for simultaneously transmitting data from said wireless stations to the AP on multiple uplink (UL) spatial streams over the wireless channel. Correctly received UL frames received by the AP are acknowledged. Error recovery and backoff processing are performed upon loss of communication information based on frame type. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071052 | RECONFIGURING A HEADLESS WIRELESS DEVICE - Systems and methods for onboarding wireless devices are disclosed. An onboarder device receives updated network credentials for a primary local wireless network, establishes a recovery local wireless network, and sends the updated network credentials to the one or more user devices via the recovery local wireless network. An onboardee device detects a loss of connectivity to a primary local wireless network, connects to a recovery local wireless network, wherein credentials for the recovery local wireless network were received during an onboarding process to the primary local wireless network, receives updated network credentials for the primary local wireless network via the recovery local wireless network, and reconnects to the primary local wireless network using the updated network credentials. | 03-12-2015 |
20150071053 | IMPLEMENTING EPC IN A CLOUD COMPUTER WITH OPENFLOW DATA PLANE - A method implements a control plane of an evolved packet core (EPC) of a long term evolution (LTE) network in a cloud computing system. A cloud manager monitors resource utilization of each control plane module and the control plane traffic handled by each control plane module. The cloud manager detects a threshold level of resource utilization or traffic load for one of the plurality of control plane modules of the EPC. A new control plane module is initialized as a separate virtual machine by the cloud manager in response to detecting the threshold level. The new control plane module signals the plurality of network elements in the data plane to establish flow rules and actions to establish differential routing of flows in the data plane using the control protocol, wherein flow matches are encoded using an extensible match structure in which the flow match is encoded as a type-length-value (TLV). | 03-12-2015 |
20150071054 | CORE SERVICES PLATFORM FOR WIRELESS VOICE, DATA AND MESSAGING NETWORK SERVICES - A Core Service Platform (CSP) system is integrated with an operator network and IT system to provide services to subscribers and operators. Based on information collected from the operator network and IT system, the CSP system delivers alerts to a subscriber's device and provides offers to resolve the condition causing the alerts. The CSP system provides customized contextual offers to the subscriber's device based on contextual assessments of a subscriber's current context, such as time in contract, loyalty status, data and voice usage, value of customer, time, location and purchase history. The CSP system also provides an operator a suite of tools for the operator to manage its pricing, offers, campaigns and other subscriber-related issues. | 03-12-2015 |
20150085635 | MIGRATION SUPPORT FOR BIT INDEXED EXPLICIT REPLICATION - A method and network device are disclosed for multicast forwarding. In one embodiment, the method includes receiving at a node configured to use a bit-indexed forwarding table a multicast message comprising an incoming message bit array. The method further includes comparing the incoming message bit array to a first neighbor bit array within a first forwarding table entry, and determining that for at least one relative bit position in the bit arrays a corresponding destination node is both a destination for the message and a reachable destination from a first neighboring node. The method further includes forwarding toward the first neighboring node a copy of the message, where a first node on the path of the forwarded message is not configured to use a respective bit-indexed forwarding table. An embodiment of the device includes a network interface, a memory and a processor configured to perform steps of the method. | 03-26-2015 |
20150085636 | NETWORK TRAFFIC CONTROL VIA SMS TEXT MESSAGING - A wireless mobile device coupled to a communications network is configured to transmit a Short Message Service (SMS) message to a network control device when the network control device is not accessible via a TCP/IP network. Said network control device is configured to parse and extract an instruction label from the SMS message received, retrieve a sequence of commands predefined and stored on the network control device based on the extracted instruction label, execute the sequence of commands on the network control device, and provide a status report back to the wireless mobile device following execution of the sequence of commands on the network control device. | 03-26-2015 |
20150092529 | LIGHTWEIGHT MULTICAST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TECHNIQUE IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - In one embodiment, a message is received at a caching node in a network including an indication of the message's urgency. The message is transmitted to child nodes of the caching node, and upon transmitting the message, a retransmission timer is initiated when the message is urgent, based on the indication of the message's urgency. Then, one or more acknowledgements of receipt of the transmitted message are received from one or more of the child nodes, respectively. Upon expiration of the retransmission timer, when it is determined that one or more of the child nodes did not receive the transmitted message based on the received acknowledgements, the message is retransmitted to the child nodes. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092530 | Mesh Network Defragmentation - Methods of reassembling a mesh network which has been disrupted by the unavailability of a node or a link are disclosed. Nodes continuously receive beacon messages originating from a leader node. These beacon messages may be transmitted directly by the leader node, or may have been retransmitted by an intermediate node. When a node determines that it has not received a beacon message in a certain time period, it concludes that it is now disconnected from that leader node. At this point, it may choose to act as a leader node and form a new network, or may join with another network. The determination of which network to join may be based on some indicia associated with the leader node of that network. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092531 | VIRTUAL CABLE MODEM TERMINATION SYSTEM - A method, a system, and an apparatus provide for a cable modem termination system (CMTS). The CMTS may include a virtual machine configured to provide a plurality of virtual CMTSs (vCMTSs). The CMTS may also include a plurality of subscriber groups. Each subscriber group of the plurality of subscriber groups may be assigned to a vCMTS of the plurality of vCMTSs. Additionally, each vCMTS is configured to provide a process. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092532 | Fault Tolerant Chip-to-Chip Communication with Advanced Voltage Regulator - Systems and circuits are described for transmitting data over physical channels to provide a fault tolerant, high speed, low latency interface such as between a memory controller and memory devices. Communications signals are communicated over interconnection groups comprised of multiple wires, with the described encoding and decoding permitting continued communication in the presence of a wire failure within an interconnection group. An efficient distributable voltage regulator to provide communications driver power is also disclosed. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092533 | RECOVERY OF ESTABLISHED EMERGENCY CALLS - A system, method and apparatus for re-establishing a messaging session received at a public safety answering point are described. A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) messaging session establishment request is received at an emergency call answer node. The messaging session establishment request has an indication of a previously established emergency messaging session between an operator workstation and a sending device to re-establish. The emergency call answer node checks a recovery queue for a previously received call establishment request having a matching indication for the previously established messaging session to re-establish. The emergency call answer node bridges a session leg for the received call establishment request and, a session leg for the previously received call establishment request having the matching indication for the previously established messaging session to re-establish the messaging session when a match is found. | 04-02-2015 |
20150092534 | System and Method to Route Data in an Anycast Environment - A method of routing data in a network includes sending an instruction to a router to statically route outbound traffic to a firewall farm having an anycast address, identifying prefixes of endpoints that communicate with router, instructing a firewall router to send a route advertisement to the network announcing that the firewall router is the subsequent best hop for data bound for the endpoints, detecting a change in network condition, and sending another instruction to the router to route outbound traffic to another firewall farm having the anycast address after detecting the change. | 04-02-2015 |
20150098314 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING COMMUNICATION REQUESTS - A system that incorporates the subject disclosure may perform, for example, operations including receiving a request from a communication device to initiate a communication session, obtaining a first name authority pointer record that replaces a second name authority pointer record responsive to an undesirable fault level in a voice over long term evolution network, obtaining the second name authority pointer record responsive to determining that there is no fault or a tolerable level of faults in the voice over long term evolution network, and initiating the communication session according to one of the first name authority pointer record or the second name authority pointer record obtained by the system. The first name authority pointer record can include instructions for initiating the communication session utilizing a circuit-switched communication network, and the second name authority pointer record can include instructions for initiating the communication session utilizing the voice over long term evolution network. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 04-09-2015 |
20150098315 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIATING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - An aspect of the subject disclosure may include, for example, receiving a request from a communication device to initiate a communication session in a packet-switched network, obtaining a first name authority pointer record responsive to determining that there is an undesirable operational state in the packet-switched network, wherein the first name authority pointer record comprises a null record, obtaining a second name authority pointer record responsive to determining that there is a desirable operation state in the packet-switched network, wherein the second name authority pointer record comprises a record, and initiating the communication session according to one of the first name authority pointer record or the second name authority pointer record. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 04-09-2015 |
20150109896 | TRANSFER DEVICE, CONTROL DEVICE, AND TRANSFER METHOD - A transfer device in a network including a plurality of control devices includes a network connection device, memory, and a processor. The network connection device communicates a target packet as a target of a transferring process. The memory stores a transfer rule received by the network connection device from a determination device as a control device for determining a transfer rule indicating a method of a process performed by the transfer device. The processor judges whether or not disable information indicating that the transfer rule is not to be acquired from the determination device when a transfer rule applicable to the target packet is not stored in the memory is included in the target packet. When the disable information is included, the processor outputs the target packet to the network connection device without requesting the transfer rule. The network connection device transmits the target packet to another transfer device. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109897 | METHOD FOR CONNECTION BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - Methods and apparatuses are provided for connecting electronic devices. A first electronic device broadcasts a message including at least one of related service information and connectivity information necessary for accessing a wireless access point (AP) accessed by the first electronic device, by using short-range communication. The first electronic device receives a connection request from at least one second electronic device via the wireless AP. | 04-23-2015 |
20150109898 | Mobile Terminated Call Improvements - In one aspect, a method for a packet gateway node (PGW) is disclosed. The PGW being adapted for (a) communicating with at least a serving gateway node, SOW, (b) receiving and forwarding downlink data packets to a user entity, UE, and (c) communicating with a mobility management entity, MME. In one embodiment, the method comprises: the PGW, when receiving a downlink user plane data packet destined for the UE on a Packet Data Network, PDN, connection associated with a restarted SGW, determining if the PDN connection has not yet been relocated to a new SGW, and, if so, selecting at least one SGW from a set of SGWs including the restarted SGW or another SGW and transmitting a control plane signal to at least one of the selected SGWs, the control plane signal identifying at least the UE. | 04-23-2015 |
20150117175 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR RAPID FAILURE DETECTION IN FIBRE CHANNEL OVER ETHERNET NETWORKS - An information handling system is provided herein. The information handling system includes a central processor in communication with a network processor, a plurality of ports coupled to the network processor for sending and receiving Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) frames, and an Ethernet controller in communication with a physical connector and with the central processor. The information handling system further includes a management controller configured to communicate with a management system through the Ethernet controller to report a failure to be mitigated by temporarily stopping inputs and outputs on a coupled network device. Associated methods and computer-readable media having associated instructions are also provided herein. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117176 | DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING CONNECTIONLESS-ORIENTED PROTOCOL - Provided is a data communication method using a connectionless-oriented protocol. The data communication method includes: configuring indicators, each of the indicators indicating whether a corresponding one of a plurality of data packets is received from a data transmitter; performing a logical operation on the indicators to determine whether there is a lost data packet among the plurality of data packets; and when it is determined that there is the lost data packet, transmitting to the data transmitter an acknowledgment message including the indicators. | 04-30-2015 |
20150117177 | ETHERNET ENHANCEMENTS - This disclosure describes enhancements to Ethernet for use in higher performance applications like Storage, HPC, and Ethernet based fabric interconnects. This disclosure provides various mechanisms for lossless fabric enhancements with error-detection and retransmissions to improve link reliability, frame pre-emption to allow higher priority traffic over lower priority traffic, virtual channel support for deadlock avoidance by enhancing Class of service functionality defined in IEEE 802.1Q, a new header format for efficient forwarding/routing in the fabric interconnect and header CRC for reliable cut-through forwarding in the fabric interconnect. The enhancements described herein, when added to standard and/or proprietary Ethernet protocols, broadens the applicability of Ethernet to newer usage models and fabric interconnects that are currently served by alternate fabric technologies like Infiniband, Fibre Channel and/or other proprietary technologies, etc. | 04-30-2015 |
20150124580 | PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - The application provides a parameter adjustment method and apparatus. The parameter adjustment method is applicable to a communication device including a SerDes link, and includes: acquiring, by the communication device, a current ambient temperature of the communication device; and if it is determined, according to a preset correspondence between a temperature range and a parameter, that the current ambient temperature does not match a SerDes parameter of the communication device, adjusting the SerDes parameter of the communication device according to the correspondence. In the application, the SerDes parameter of the communication device is adjusted in real time, thereby improving reliability of a SerDes link of the communication device, and reducing a bit error rate of the SerDes link. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124581 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR DELIVERING USER-ASSISTED DATA USING PERIODIC MULTICAST - Disclosed herein are a method and apparatus for delivering user-assisted multimedia data using periodic multicast, which provide stable high-capacity Video-On-Demand (VOD) streaming service by proposing a user-assisted video transfer scheme capable of replacing a client-server configuration in providing high-capacity VOD streaming service. | 05-07-2015 |
20150124582 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF RELEASING RESOURCES IN A TELECOMMUNCATIONS NETWORK - A system, method, and node for releasing resources in a telecommunications network. The method begins by a node assigning a resource-Identification (ID) to an internal resource within the node. At least one internal resource is allocated by the node for a specific Packet Data Network (PDN) connection. Next, a first message containing a resource-ID of the allocated internal resource is sent to one or more peer nodes. The peer nodes store the received resource-ID from the first message. When a node determines that a malfunction of the allocated internal resource of the node occurs, the node sends a second message containing the resource-ID of the malfunctioning internal resource to the peer nodes. The peer nodes then tear down the PDN connection. | 05-07-2015 |
20150131428 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING ERROR IN RDM PROTOCOL - Disclosed herein is a method and apparatus that are capable of retransmitting lost RDM packets in RDM protocol to control various devices connected to DMX512 network. The method recovers an error in a remote controller for remotely controlling devices connected to DMX512 network via RDM protocol based on the DMX512 network. A RDM packet to be transmitted to each device is stored in a buffer, and then the RDM packet is transmitted to the device. A preset period of time is waited for so as to receive a response packet from the device. If the response packet is received within the preset period of time, a transaction number of the response packet is checked, and a sequence of the response packet with respect to previously arrived response packets is determined The corresponding RDM packet is retransmitted depending on a result of determination of the sequence. | 05-14-2015 |
20150131429 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPENSATING FOR VOICE PACKET LOSS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for compensating for a voice packet loss, which are used to compensate for a lost voice packet. The method in the embodiments of the present invention includes: extracting a pitch period from received voice data when a lost frame is detected; calculating a backward phase of a last received frame of normal voice data; calculating a forward phase of the lost frame according to the backward phase; capturing, from the received data, data whose last frame is with a same phase as the forward phase, as compensation data. | 05-14-2015 |
20150138944 | DETERMINING A PRIMARY WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WAP) OBJECT FROM COVERAGE PREDICTIONS FOR TRIAL WAP CONFIGURATIONS - Examples disclosed herein relate to determining a primary wireless access point (WAP) object from coverage predictions for trial WAP configurations. Examples include determining that one of a plurality of WAP objects is a primary WAP object based on the coverage predictions and at least one coverage monitor. | 05-21-2015 |
20150138945 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELF-HEALING OF COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method of self-healing a communication network is described herein. In particular, a plurality of message addresses can be registered with a publisher, and notifications from the publisher for the message addresses can be received. In addition, the notifications received from the publisher for the message addresses can be time-stamped. A notification interval for the message addresses can be monitored in which the interval may be based on a predetermined amount of time. The time-stamps of the received notifications can be compared to the notification intervals to determine whether a disruption in the receipt of the notifications for at least some of the message addresses has occurred. If a disruption has been determined to have occurred, the message addresses that have been affected by the disruption can be deleted. The deleted message addresses can then be re-registered with the publisher to restore the receipt of the notifications from the publisher for the affected message addresses. | 05-21-2015 |
20150146513 | Apparatus and Methods for Accessing a Data Network - A packet data network gateway, P-GW, is located in a second network for supporting control plane data in a wireless communications system that additionally comprises a first network having a first packet data network gateway, P-GW, operably couplable to the P-GW and a serving gateway, S-GW. The P-GW comprises a processor arranged to determine an operational status of at least one of: a backhaul link, first P-GW. In response to the processor determining that both of the backhaul link and the first P-GW are available, the processor is arranged to perform at least one of: trigger deferred signalling between the first network and at least one of a mobility management entity, MME, the S-GW; trigger user plane handling, monitor and build terminal device context information for a plurality of terminal devices being served with user plane data by the backhaul link of the second network. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146514 | EFFICIENT CELL SITE OUTAGE MITIGATION - To efficiently mitigate cell coverage disruptions caused by either unplanned equipment failures or planned outages during maintenance activities, an efficient cell site outage mitigation system is provided to calculate an optimal configuration for neighboring cell site devices before adjusting the cell site configuration settings to cover the coverage gap. The optimal configuration is determined using an offline model learner. Radio frequency propagation models and user demand and distribution models can be used to determine the offline solution. The optimal configuration setting learnt using an offline model is then implemented when an outage is determined to have occurred in the operational field. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146515 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RESILIENT WIRELESS PACKET COMMUNICATIONS - Rapid failure detection and recovery in wireless communication networks is needed in order to meet, among other things, carrier class Ethernet transport channel standards. Thus, resilient wireless packet communications is provided using a hardware-assisted rapid transport channel failure detection algorithm and a Gigabit Ethernet data access card with an engine configured accordingly. In networks with various topologies, this is provided in combination with their existing protocols, such as rapid spanning tree and link aggregation protocols, respectively. | 05-28-2015 |
20150146516 | Layered Multicast and Fair Bandwidth Allocation and Packet Prioritization - Embodiments include an overlay multicast network. The overlay multicast network may provide a set of features to ensure reliable and timely arrival of multicast data. The embodiments include a congestion control system that may prioritize designated layers of data within a data stream over other layers of the same data stream. Each data stream transmitted over the network may be given an equal share of the bandwidth. Addressing in routing tables maintained by routers in the may utilize summarized addressing based on the difference in location of the router and destination address. Summarization levels may be adjusted to minimize travel distances for packets in the network. Data from high priority data stream layers may also be retransmitted upon request from a destination machine to ensure reliable delivery of data | 05-28-2015 |
20150312387 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR RESOLVING DATA INCONSISTENCIES IN AN IMS NETWORK - A Serving Call Session Control Function, S-CSCF, within an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, core network. Notifications are sent to a Home Subscriber Server, HSS, of the IMS core network, indicating IMS registration state changes of users. Delivery failure of a notification of an IMS registration state change sent to a HSS and relating to a given user is detected. An association between an identifier of the given user and an indication of said delivery failure is stored in order to indicate a loss of IMS registration state synchronization for the given user between the S-CSCF and the HSS. An event requiring an IMS registration state change for the user is detected. A determination is made that a delivery failure indication associated with the user's identifier is stored. The HSS is notified indicating the required IMS registration state change and of a previous loss of the IMS registration state synchronization. | 10-29-2015 |
20150319036 | NETWORK TRANSACTION CONTROL METHOD AND EXECUTING METHOD, NETWORK CONTROLLER, AND FORWARDING DEVICE - The present invention discloses a network transaction control method. The network transaction control method includes: sending, by a network controller, according to a network transaction, an operation set package including at least one operation instruction to at least two forwarding devices, where: the operation set package includes an atomic operation identifier; receiving an execution status message fed back by each forwarding device; and if it is determined, according to each execution status message, that an operation result of any operation instruction executed by any forwarding device is: execution failed, separately sending a rollback control instruction including the atomic operation identifier to each forwarding device for which no execution failure is determined, so as to instruct each forwarding device to restore to a state that is prior to execution of each operation instruction. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319094 | FLOW SYNCHRONIZATION - A controller node receives a list of a first plurality of flows programmed on a network switch. The controller node extracts a flow cookie value from a flow cookie data field of each flow in the first plurality of flows on the received list and calculates a session identifier on the basis of the extracted cookie values. At least one add flow command is transmitted from the controller node to the network switch to program a second plurality of flows on the network switch. The at least one add flow command comprises flow cookie values in the flow cookie data fields of each of the flows in the second plurality of flows which are set equal to the calculated session identifier. At least one delete flow command is transmitted from the controller node to the network switch to delete programming of the first plurality of flows on the network switch. | 11-05-2015 |
20150319719 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WCDMA RACH OPTIMIZATION - According to an example embodiment of this application, a method may include transmitting at least one preamble with a predetermined power level to a network element; determining whether to retransmit the at least one preamble to the network element; if it is determined to retransmit, retransmitting the at least one preamble with a ramped down power level; and transmitting a message to the network element based on at least one of the predetermined power level and the ramped down power level. | 11-05-2015 |
20150326425 | RECORDING, ANALYZING, AND RESTORING NETWORK STATES IN SOFTWARE-DEFINED NETWORKS - A system that includes a recorder that records information of a flow table of at least one network device in a network by capturing information regarding the flow table that is transmitted to and from the network device, wherein the network device receives and forwards incoming packet data over the network, and the flow table is used to determine how each incoming packet is handled by the network device; an analyzer that analyzes state changes in the network and manages a network state; and a restorer that, when a type of failure occurs in the network, recovers the network state by restoring at least a portion of the flow table using the recorded information of the flow table and based on the type of failure event that has occurred. | 11-12-2015 |
20150333875 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORWARDING NON-CONSECUTIVE DATA BLOCKS IN ENHANCED UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS - A method and apparatus for forwarding non-consecutive data blocks in enhanced uplink (EU) transmissions. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and one or more Node-Bs include one or more automatic repeat request (ARQ)/hybrid-ARQ (H-ARQ) processes for supporting an enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH). Data blocks transmitted by the WTRU are re-ordered in a re-ordering entity located in the Node-B(s) or a radio network controller (RNC). Once a missing data block is identified, a data forwarding timer in the Node-B(s) or RNC is initiated and subsequent WTRU transmissions are monitored to determine whether the missing data block has been discarded by the WTRU. Upon recognition of the discard of the missing data block, the non-consecutive data blocks are forwarded to higher layers. | 11-19-2015 |
20150334007 | COMMUNICATION NETWORK CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM OF CONTROL PROGRAM - A communication network control system ( | 11-19-2015 |
20150341808 | INTEGRATED REPEATER FOR INTEGRATEDLY RELAYING VARIOUS TYPES OF COMMUNICATION SIGNALS, AND INTEGRATED RELAY SYSTEM - The present invention relates to an integrated repeater and an integrated relay system. The integrated repeater of the present invention receives a signal from a main repeater for relaying signals transmitted from upper devices, and comprises a demultiplexer configured to demultiplex the multiplexed signal of an Ethernet signal and a mobile communication signal received from the main repeater, and separate the signals into the mobile communication signal and the Ethernet signal; a first converter configured to convert the mobile communication signal separated from the demultiplexer into a radio frequency (RF) signal, and transmit the converted RF signal; a second converter configured to convert the Ethernet signal separated from the demultiplexer into a wireless LAN signal, and transmit the converted wireless LAN signal; and a switching unit configured to deliver a signal received from the main repeater to either the demultiplexer or the second converter, depending on whether a fault of the mobile communication signal is generated. | 11-26-2015 |
20150349915 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING FRAMES FOR ERROR CORRECTION - A method and apparatus for generating frames to apply error correction to data including a plurality of consecutive data groups are provided. Upon receiving input of an n-th data group consisting of a plurality of priority groups with different priority levels, the number of first code rate frames, which is the number of frames in the n-th data group for which a first code rate is used, is calculated based on the number of first code rate bits calculated based on the ratio of the length of data in an (n−1)-th data group for which the first code rate is used. The number of second code rate frames, which is the number of frames in the n-th data group for which the second code rate is used, is calculated based on the number of second code rate bits calculated based on the number of first code rate bits. Frames for error correction are generated based on the number of first code rate frames and the number of second code rate frames. | 12-03-2015 |
20150350115 | ENHANCED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT HANDLING IN COMMUNICATION PACKET TRANSFER - Described herein are methods, systems, and software for handling packet buffering between end users and content servers, such as content delivery nodes. In one example, a method of operating a content server includes generating first and second data packets for first and second content requests. Once generated, the method provides storing the first packets in a packet buffer and transferring the first packets to a first user device. Upon transfer, the first packets are deleted from the packet buffer and replaced with the second packets. Theses second packets are then transferred to a second user device and deleted from the packet buffer. Further, once the packets are transferred to the user devices, the method further includes monitoring for an acknowledgment from the user devices to ensure the packets are received. | 12-03-2015 |
20150351005 | JOINING PROCESS FOR POWERLINE COMMUNICATION (PLC) NETWORKS - Systems and methods for routing protocols for power line communications (PLC) are described. In some embodiments, a method performed by a PLC device, such as a PLC meter, may include active discovering and identifying at least one bootstrapping agent and a personal area network (PAN) identifier for one or more networks that are operating within a personal operating space of the PLC device. The device selects a target bootstrapping agent to use for the join process with a target network. The target bootstrapping agent may be selected from a list of bootstrapping agents associated with the target PAN identifier. If the attempt to join the target network fails, then the device further determines if other bootstrapping agents are associated with the target PAN identifier. The device selects an alternate target bootstrapping agent from the other bootstrapping agents that are associated with the target PAN identifier and reattempts the join process. | 12-03-2015 |
20150365271 | OPTIMIZATION TO EXPAND IS-IS LEAF NODES DURING LFA COMPUTATION - A method and system implemented by a network device, where the network device is in a network having a plurality of nodes. The method computes a loop free alternative (LFA) next hop as a backup for a primary path next hop for intermediate system-intermediate system (IS-IS). The method improves LFA computation efficiency by minimizing expansion of prefixes. The method includes expanding all prefixes of the next LFA shortest path first (SPF) destination node and inheriting a next candidate next hop as a current LFA next hop where the next candidate next hop provides link or node protection and better protection than the current LFA next hop. | 12-17-2015 |
20150365539 | Voip terminal and ringing parameter setting method therefor - Provided are a VOIP terminal and a ringing parameter setting method therefor. An application scenario detecting module of the VOIP terminal detects an application scenario of the VOIP terminal, and sends a detection result to a parameter matching module of the VOIP terminal, the parameter matching module matches a ringing parameter according to the detection result, and then a parameter setting module of the VOIP terminal sets the VOIP terminal according to the ringing parameter obtained by the matching. Manual setting according to experience is not involved. The set ringing parameter can better meet requirements of various voice user terminals under the VOIP terminal compared with an existing manual setting manner. Abnormal conditions that some voice user terminals ring briefly all the time, some voice user terminals are muted after ringing a sound, even some voice user terminals have no ringing all the time, and so on under the same VOIP terminal can be reduced, and user experience can be improved. At the same time, the cost of ringing parameter maintenance of the VOIP terminal can be also reduced. | 12-17-2015 |
20150372827 | MANAGING RENDEZVOUS POINT REDUNDANCY IN A DYNAMIC FABRIC NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - Multi-destination frames in a network fabric may be carried in IP multicast packets. As such, the network fabric may us IP multicast technique such as a PIM protocol for handling the multi-destination frames. To provide redundancy, the system administrator can use phantom rendezvous points (RPs) that include multiple physical RPs where one of the RPs serves as a primary RP and the other RPs serve as secondary RPs (e.g., backup RPs). Instead of the system administrator manually configuring the phantom RPs, the RPs are automatically configured. To do so, the system administrator may use a GUI to provide multicast groups allocated for the multi-destination traffic, the number of desired phantom RPs (or physical RPs), and the desired RP redundancy. Based on these parameters, a data center manager generates one or more templates that automatically configure the network devices in the fabric as they are booted. | 12-24-2015 |
20150373564 | Alarm Processing Method and Device, Alarm Associated Information Setting Method - Disclosed are an optimized alarm processing method and device, and an alarm associated information setting method, wherein the alarm processing method includes: a logic function module detecting an event which can trigger an alarm, and sending an alarm generation request to an alarm generation module; the alarm generation module determining alarm type, alarm path and level of the alarm triggered by the event in accordance with the alarm associated information stored in an alarm associated information storage module; if the determined alarm type is a correlated alarm, first inquiring an alarm memory module and judging whether the next level of alarm on the alarm path to which the correlated alarm belongs is reported or not, if not reported, generating and reporting the alarm; if reported, no generating or reporting the alarm. | 12-24-2015 |
20150381321 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH A RETRANSMISSION PROTOCOL - A communication device is described comprising a transmitter configured to transmit data according to a retransmission protocol, a determiner configured to determine whether, for a transmission time scheduled according to the retransmission protocol, there was a transmission gap within a predetermined time interval before the transmission time or to determine whether there will be a transmission gap within a predetermined time interval after the transmission time and a controller configured to control the transmitter to perform an initial transmission of data or a retransmission of data according to the retransmission protocol at the transmission time based on the result of the determination. | 12-31-2015 |
20150381475 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM - A master station | 12-31-2015 |
20150382394 | METHODS, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ASSISTING A VEHICLE OCCUPANT UTILIZING FUNCTIONALITY OF A NOMADIC DEVICE VIA AN IN-VEHICLE SYSTEM - The present disclosure relates to a method performed by a nomadic device paired with an in-vehicle system of a vehicle, for assisting a vehicle occupant utilizing functionality of the nomadic device via the in-vehicle system, in avoiding incorrectly assuming the in-vehicle system to be at fault rather than the nomadic device. The nomadic device determines status data reflecting a current status associated with the nomadic device. The nomadic device furthermore provides status information to the in-vehicle system, which status information is based on the status data. Indicative information derived from the status information is adapted to be presented by the in-vehicle system. The disclosure also relates to a nomadic device in accordance with the foregoing, an in-vehicle system and a method performed therein, and a vehicle including such an in-vehicle system. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382395 | Method For Recovering From PDCP HFN De-Synchronization For VoLTE Call And Data Failure In RLC Layer - A method and/or device that determines when an erroneous voice packet has been received over the air interface of a cellular communication network, such as a 4G LTE network, and initiates a voice communications re-establishment procedure when a triggering event—based on receptions of erroneous voice packets—has occurred. The voice communications re-establishment procedure is performed to avoid at least a portion of the air interface (i.e., an uplink or downlink of the Uu interface through which the erroneous voice packets have traversed) from becoming non-operational. The triggering event may be the number of consecutive erroneous voice packets received over an uplink or downlink surpassing a threshold or it may be the length of time that has lapsed during receptions of consecutive erroneous voice packets. The triggering event is an indication that an uplink or downlink will most likely become non-operational if voice communications are not re-established. | 12-31-2015 |
20150382397 | 802.1X ACCESS SESSION KEEPALIVE METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM - The present invention relates to the field of communications. Disclosed are an 802.1X access session keepalive method, device, and system. The method comprises: during network access of a 802.1X client, an authenticating node used for access authentication sending, to the 802.1X client according to an actual keepalive period of the authenticating node, a keepalive request message used for determining whether the 802.1X client is off-net abnormally; and during a preset duration of the authenticating node, if the authenticating node does not receive a keepalive response message from the 802.1X client in response to the keepalive request message, the authenticating node determining that the 802.1X client is off-net abnormally; otherwise, determining that the 802.1X client is on-net normally. The embodiments of the present invention improve network resource utilization, reduce the security problem caused by too heavy load of the authenticating node, and lower the risk of errors in charging on time. | 12-31-2015 |
20160006603 | TECHNIQUES FOR SYNCHRONIZING OPERATIONS BETWEEN REGIONS WHEN A NETWORK CONNECTION FAILS - A technique for synchronizing operations in a transaction processing system includes identifying, by a first recovery management connector (FRMC) in a first region, a failure of a first network connection having a first network type during synchronization operations with a partner region. The FRMC queries connections defined to the transaction processing system to identify a replacement network connection that is connected to the partner region using a second network type that is different than the first network type. The FRMC collects relevant data for an interrupted synchronization operation. The FRMC issues a command to link to a specific program in a FRMC in the partner region. The command includes the relevant data for the interrupted synchronization operation. A second recovery management connector of the first region communicates the command to and a response from the partner region via the replacement network connection in order to continue the interrupted synchronization operation. | 01-07-2016 |
20160006748 | METHOD FOR DETECTING SECURITY ERROR IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND DEVICE OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - According to one embodiment, a method of performing a re-establishment procedure in a mobile communication system includes: receiving at least one packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) control plane data unit; performing an integrity check on the at least one PDCP control plane data unit; identifying an integrity check failure with regard to the at least one PDCP control plane data unit; and performing a re-establishment procedure if the integrity check failure is identified to exist with regard to the at least one PDCP control plane data unit. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007216 | COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT IN E-UTRA NETWORKS - Embodiments of systems and techniques for coverage adjustment in evolved universal terrain radio access networks (E-UTRANs) are described. In some embodiments, a network management (NM) apparatus may receive data representative of first and second radio link failure (RLF) reports including information related to respective disconnections of first and second user equipment (UEs) from an E-UTRAN. The NM apparatus may identify a hole in a coverage area of the E-UTRAN based at least in part on the first and second RLF reports, and may perform an automated coverage and capacity optimization (CCO) action to reconfigure cell resources of the E-UTRAN based on the identified hole. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 01-07-2016 |
20160007228 | RATE CONTROL FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Rate control is provided for communicating within a wireless communication network. In some examples, redundant packet information transmitted over separate links, each link having its own independent rate control loop, can result in improvement in packet reliability with fast convergence to a desired error level. In other examples, artificial degradation of a received data stream can be utilized to improve packet reliability, also with fast convergence to the desired error level. | 01-07-2016 |
20160013993 | UBIQUITOUS TROUBLE MANAGEMENT AND E-SERVICE ECOSYSTEM FOR THE INTERNET OF THINGS | 01-14-2016 |
20160014019 | WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, METHOD FOR GENERATING NUMBER OF ALTERNATIVE PATHS, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | 01-14-2016 |
20160020940 | Automated Datacenter Network Failure Mitigation - The subject disclosure is directed towards a technology that automatically mitigates datacenter failures, instead of relying on human intervention to diagnose and repair the network. Via a mitigation pipeline, when a network failure is detected, a candidate set of components that are likely to be the cause of the failure is identified, with mitigation actions iteratively targeting each component to attempt to alleviate the problem. The impact to the network is estimated to ensure that the redundancy present in the network will be able to handle the mitigation action without adverse disruption to the network. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021178 | DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATION OF INDEPENDENT AUTONOMOUS VEHICLES TO PROVIDE REDUNDANCY AND PERFORMANCE - A method and system of distributed communication of independent autonomous vehicles to provide redundancy and performance are disclosed. In one embodiment, a set of autonomous vehicles operates in a geographically proximate area through which peer-to-peer communication sessions are established between nearby ones of the set of autonomous vehicles through an ad-hoc network based on a present geo-spatial location of each one of the set of autonomous vehicles in communication proximity to preferred adjacent ones of the set of autonomous vehicles. A central server directly coupled to each of the set of autonomous vehicles establishes centralized communication paths with each of the set of autonomous vehicles through a wide area network. The centralized server processes a communication from adjacent ones of the set of autonomous vehicles when an error condition is detected in an operational mode of a non-functional vehicle that has lost communication with the central server. | 01-21-2016 |
20160021219 | Method and Apparatus for High Reliability Wireless Communications - A physiologic transmitter manages multiple communications between physiologic data acquisition devices attached to the patient and a receiver attached to an MRI or CT scanner. The transmitter's processor is able to generate waveform data and trigger data based upon the acquired physiologic data and transmit the data to a physiologic receiver attached to the host scanner. The receiver then is able to deliver a trigger signal to the host scanner for imaging the patient during a selected time frame based upon cardiac and/or respiratory cycles of the patient. | 01-21-2016 |
20160056927 | EARLY PACKET LOSS DETECTION AND FEEDBACK - A video encoding device (e.g., a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU)) may transmit an encoded frame with a frame sequence number using a transmission protocol. The video encoding device, an application on the video encoding device, and/or a protocol layer on the encoding device may detect a packet loss by receiving an error notification. The packet loss may be detected at the MAC layer. The packet loss may be signaled using spoofed packets, such as a spoofed NACK packet, a spoofed XR packet, or a spoofed ACK packet. A lost packet may be retransmitted at the MAC layer (e.g., by the encoding device or another device on the wireless path). Packet loss detection may be performed in uplink operations and/or downlink operations, and/or may be performed in video gaining applications via the cloud. The video encoding device may generate and send a second encoded frame based on the error notification. | 02-25-2016 |
20160057800 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE AND RADIO LINK FAILURE IN INTER-ENB CARRIER AGGREGATION - A method and system for configuring a User Equipment (UE) for dual connectivity mode of operation when the UE is carrier aggregated with one or more serving frequencies served by a Master eNB (MeNB) and one or more serving frequencies served by the Secondary eNB (SeNB). The method allows the UE to autonomously initiate the random access procedure on a SCell of the SeNB after adding or replacing SCell of the SeNB. Further, the method allows the UE to handle a Radio Link Failure (RLF) on one or more data radio bearers established between the UE and the SCell of the SeNB. | 02-25-2016 |
20160066203 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING PACKET LOSS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for handling packet loss in a mobile communication network are provided. In the method for handling a call when packet loss occurs, the apparatus receives an uplink packet from a user equipment (UE) and deciphers the packet based on a first hyper frame number (HFN). When the deciphering based on the first HFN fails, the apparatus changes an HFN value from the first HFN to a second HFN and then further deciphers the packet based on the second HFN. | 03-03-2016 |
20160066210 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUSLY TRANSMITTING DATA IN MULTI-NETWORK - A receiving device includes: a communication unit to receive a plurality of partial data divided from data to be transmitted through two or more connection networks; an information confirming unit to confirm (i) transmission order information and (ii) network transmission order information indicating related to a transmission order assigned to of the specific partial data among the plurality of partial data to be transmitted through a the specific connection network designated among the two or more connection networks; and the control unit to determine whether non-received partial data are lost based on at least one of the transmission order information and the network transmission order information. | 03-03-2016 |
20160073290 | FAULT ANALYTICS FRAMEWORK FOR QOS BASED SERVICES - A device may be configured to determine a current state of each of multiple operator network devices that provide a service via an operator network. The device may determine an allowable event at an operator network device based on the current state of the operator network device and model information that models behavior of the operator network device for the service. The device may monitor events at the operator network devices during a session. The device may detect that an allowable event for the operator network device does not occur during the session. The device may determine that a fault occurred at the operator network device during the session based on the allowable event not being detected at the operator network device. The device may provide fault information that indicates the fault occurred at the operator network device. | 03-10-2016 |
20160080100 | METHOD FOR PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL SYNCHRONIZATION NETWORK AND APPARATUS - Embodiments relate to the field of communications, and provide a method for a PTP synchronization network and an apparatus, which help to reduce costs of obtaining performance of a Precision Time Protocol synchronization network. The method includes: executing, by a slave clock apparatus, an operation of time synchronization with a first apparatus according to the PTP through a first port; setting a state of a second port of the slave clock apparatus to slave; obtaining information required for determining a time offset between the slave clock apparatus and a second apparatus; determining an offset according to the information; if an absolute value of the offset is greater than a threshold, determining that time synchronization performance of a first link is faulty or time synchronization performance of a second link is faulty; and sending a message to a third apparatus. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080118 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HYBRID CONTENT DELIVERY - Systems and methods which provide data communication content delivery through, a hybrid network implementation are disclosed. A hybrid network configuration may utilize a broadcast communication technique to deliver large amounts of data communication content to one or more mobile communication device via uni-directional network links and a uni-cast communication technique via bi-directional network links with the one or more mobile communication device to facilitate delivery and utilization of the data communication content. Data content delivery loss recovery techniques implemented according to embodiments of the invention utilize network links of the hybrid network other than or in addition to the uni-directional network links to implement loss recovery techniques such as a hybrid repeat technique, a hybrid retransmission technique, hybrid statistical feedback technique, and/or combinations thereof. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080194 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - An interface accesses a server for managing usage of a plurality of frequency resources allocated to a first wireless system and acquires information indicating the usage. Based on the acquired information, a control unit selects, amongst the frequency resources, a frequency resource to be used by a second wireless system. The control unit determines whether, after the information is acquired at a first time point, reacquisition of the information at a second time point is successful, which second time point is scheduled to reacquire the information from the server. If the reacquisition is unsuccessful, the control unit allows a frequency resource for the second wireless system to be selected based on the information acquired at the first time point even from the second time point onward. | 03-17-2016 |
20160080196 | PACKET SWITCH MODULES FOR COMPUTER NETWORKS WITH EFFICIENT MANAGEMENT OF DATABASES USED IN FORWARDING OF NETWORK TRAFFIC - In a packet switch with databases ( | 03-17-2016 |
20160080453 | SCALING CONTENT COMMUNICATED OVER A NETWORK - An architecture is provided that can scale content resolution in order to mitigate errors in a provisioned service of a communication network, such as a wireless service or a femtocell service that integrates with DSL or other broadband carriers. The architecture can identify fault conditions relating to e.g., bandwidth oversubscription or symbolization integrity. Based upon such identification, the architecture can alter encoding format codecs of certain types of content in order to reduce their resolution/quality, thereby mitigating bandwidth oversubscription fault conditions or freeing up space (without necessarily increasing bandwidth) to insert additional FEC code. | 03-17-2016 |
20160094380 | Notification Technique for Network Reconfiguration - A technique for informing nodes in a communications net work about changes in a state of the communications network using notification packets is described. In that technique, the communications network is reconfigured using a fast reroute protocol responsive to the state change. A method aspect of the technique comprises generating, upon a network state change, a notification packet. Generating the notification packet includes adding a unique identifier to the notification packet. The method further includes propagating the notification packet through the communications network | 03-31-2016 |
20160094975 | LATENCY REDUCTION FOR MODE SWITCHING IN SIDELINK COMMUNICATIONS - A wireless terminal ( | 03-31-2016 |
20160095005 | REMEDIAL ACTION BASED ON INTER-PACKET RECEIVED POWER - In order to maintain performance during wireless communication, a transmitting electronic device may selectively perform a remedial action based on a received power in a channel during time intervals between received packets (e.g., due to interference) and/or a metric associated with the measured received power. In particular, when the received power is less than a threshold value (e.g., when the interference is insufficient to stop transmission by the transmitting electronic device), the transmitting electronic device performs the remedial action based on the measured received power and/or the metric. For example, the remedial action may include: selecting a modulation technique; selecting the receiving electronic device; selecting an antenna pattern for the one or more antennas; reducing a transmit power; selecting a data rate; determining a cumulative distribution function; and/or estimating a channel capacity. Next, the transmitting electronic device transmits a packet in the channel to a receiving electronic device. | 03-31-2016 |
20160099864 | SELECTIVE SERVICE BYPASS IN SERVICE FUNCTION CHAINING - In one embodiment, a method includes identifying a failure of a service function at a service node in a service chain, receiving a packet at the service node, and processing the packet at the service node according to a flag associated with the service function and set based on a criticality of the service function. An apparatus is also disclosed herein. | 04-07-2016 |
20160105809 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES OF WLAN ALARM NOTIFICATION IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe systems, devices, and methods for wireless local area network alarm notifications in cellular networks. Various embodiments may include an integration reference point agent in an element manager that receives an alarm notification according to a first format from an access point, converts the alarm notification to a second format, and send the converted alarm notification to an integration reference point manager. Other embodiments may be described or claimed. | 04-14-2016 |
20160105912 | Random Access Procedure in Wireless Device, Radio Base Station and Methods Therein - Embodiments herein relate to a wireless device ( | 04-14-2016 |
20160112250 | Connection Recovery Method, Apparatus, and System - A connection recovery method includes searching, by a first terminal, for a recovery candidate corresponding to an interrupted connection; selecting, by the first terminal, one found recovery candidate as a first recovery candidate; sending, by the first terminal, a negotiation request to a second terminal; receiving, by the first terminal, a matching success message returned by the second terminal; and transmitting, by the first terminal, data to the second terminal according to the first connection information. | 04-21-2016 |
20160112549 | SYNCHRONIZATION OF TRAFFIC MULTIPLEXING IN LINK AGGREGATION - Synchronization of traffic multiplexing in link aggregation is described. In an embodiment, a first link aggregator and a second link aggregator are associated with a plurality of links. The first link aggregator maintains an identifier for each link indicating at least a state of enabled or disabled. A synchronized clock is established between the first link aggregator and the second link aggregator. A particular link of the plurality of links is transitioned. Wherein, the transitioning is performed by the first link aggregator sending, to the second link aggregator, a first message identifying a particular time to transition the particular link. The first link aggregator receives, from the second link aggregator, a second message indicating that the particular time is acceptable. In response to a determination that the second message indicates that the particular time is acceptable and that the synchronized clock has reached the particular time, transitioning the link. | 04-21-2016 |
20160119178 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RECOGNIZING RADIO LINK FAILURES ASSOCIATED WITH HSUPA AND HSDPA CHANNELS - A method and system for detecting radio link (RL) failures between a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and a Node-B are disclosed. When signaling radio bearers (SRBs) are supported by high speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), an RL failure is recognized based on detection of improper operation of at least one of an absolute grant channel (AGCH), a relative grant channel (RGCH), a hybrid-automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) information channel (HICH), an enhanced uplink dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) and an enhanced uplink dedicated physical data channel (E-DPDCH). When SRBs are supported by high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), an RL failure is recognized based on detection of improper operation of at least one of a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH), a high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH) and a high speed dedicated physical control channel (HS-DPCCH). | 04-28-2016 |
20160127168 | PREVENTING OR REDUCING TRAFFIC LOSSES - Embodiments of the present invention include systems and methods for preventing or reducing traffic losses of data. If an information handling system, such as a switch or router, in a network attempts to install route information in the data store of the information handling system and has a failure or a potential failure, the information handling system may take one of several options or combinations thereof. In embodiments, the information handling system may not advertise the route information. In embodiments, the information handling system may send a route withdrawal message to one or more peer information handling systems to remove that system from routing determinations involving the route information. Alternatively, the information handling system may advertise the route prefix with a high metric to indicate that the system is a non-preferred forwarder for data intended for a destination associated with the route information. | 05-05-2016 |
20160127169 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC RADIO ACCESS NETWORK ORCHESTRATION - A method is provided in one example embodiment and may include monitoring, by a radio access network (RAN) orchestration function, impairments between a plurality of candidate locations interconnected by a transport network, wherein one or more network elements capable of performing one or more operations associated with a RAN are located at the plurality of candidate locations; determining a decomposition of one or more operations associated with the RAN into a plurality of sets of virtualized network functions (VNFs) to execute the operations; determining a distribution of the plurality of sets of VNFs among the one or more network elements associated with the RAN for one or more optimal locations of the plurality of candidate locations based, at least in part, on the monitored impairments; and instantiating the plurality of sets of VNFs at each of the one or more optimal locations. | 05-05-2016 |
20160134487 | RECONFIGURING INTERRELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN COMPONENTS OF VIRTUAL COMPUTING NETWORKS - Embodiments of the present invention relate to an approach for reconfiguring interrelationships between components of virtual computing networks (e.g., a grid computing network, a local area network (LAN), a cloud computing network, etc.). In a typical embodiment, a set of information pertaining to a set of components associated with a virtual computing network is received in a computer memory medium or the like. Based on the set of information, a graphical representation (e.g., hierarchical tree) depicting the set of interrelationships between the set of components is generated. When a failure in the virtual computing network is detected, at least one of the set of interrelationships between the set of components is reconfigured based on the graphical representation and the set of rules to address the failure. | 05-12-2016 |
20160134728 | Apparatus, system and method of controlling data flow over a communication network - Some demonstrative embodiments include apparatuses, systems and/or methods of controlling data flow over a communication network. For example, an apparatus may include a communication unit to communicate between first and second devices a transfer response, the transfer response in response to a transfer request, the transfer response including a transfer pending status indicating data is pending to be received at the second device, the communication unit is to communicate the transfer response regardless of whether a retry indicator of the transfer request represents a first request for transfer or a retried request. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135065 | FAULT HANDLING METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a fault handling method, apparatus and system, and relate to the field of communications, where the method includes: detecting, by a lower-layer fault management system, a fault alarm status in a lower-layer service; obtaining, by means of query by the lower-layer fault management system, according to the fault alarm status and a service dependence relationship table stored in a system, an affected higher-layer service; sending, by the lower-layer fault management system, a fault notification message to a higher-layer fault management system corresponding to the affected higher-layer service; and determining, by the higher-layer fault management system, according to the fault notification message whether a higher-layer service in which a fault occurs needs to be handled. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135101 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING NAS SIGNALING REQUEST IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more particularly, to a method and an apparatus for processing a NAS signaling request. A method for performing a non-access stratum (NAS) signaling process by means of a terminal in a wireless communication system according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises: a step of receiving a first message that includes information indicating a network failure from a network node of a first network; a step of starting a timer relating to a network selection; and a step of selecting a second network from among network candidates excluding the first network during the operation of the timer relating to a network selection. | 05-12-2016 |
20160135117 | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING MESSAGE BETWEEN ENTITIES IN COEXISTENCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - Disclosed are methods of exchanging messages necessary for interaction among entities in a coexistence management system that manages a plurality of frequency sharing devices. Specifically, a method of exchanging messages in a coexistence management system including a coexistence enabler (CE), a coexistence manager (CM), and a coexistence discovery and information server (CDIS) includes generating, by the CM, a ReconfigurationRequest message, sending the ReconfigurationRequest message to the CE, and waiting for a ReconfigurationResponse message from the CE. The ReconfigurationRequest message includes at least one of an operating channel list of a white space object (WSO) served by the CE, a transmission power limitation, a flag indicating whether or not a channel is shared, a transmission schedule, and channel classification information. | 05-12-2016 |
20160142245 | METHOD FOR ENHANCING MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK ON THE ONE HAND, AND A PLURALITY OF MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION DEVICES ON THE OTHER HAND - A method for enhancing machine type communication between a mobile communication network and a plurality of machine type communication devices includes, in case that a radio connection between a first machine type communication device and a base station entity is dysfunctional: transmitting, in a first step, an emergency mode message from the first machine type communication device to at least one further machine type communication device; transmitting, in a second step, machine type communication data of the first machine type communication device to the at least one further machine type communication device via a communication link between the first machine type communication device and the at least one further machine type communication device; and storing, in a third step subsequent to the second step, the machine type communication data of the first machine type communication device in a memory of the at least one further machine type communication device. | 05-19-2016 |
20160142288 | MINIMIZINING MESSAGE PROPAGATION TIMES WHEN BRIEF DATALINK INTERRUPTIONS OCCUR - A method for minimizing datalink message propagation time comprises determining whether a datalink TPDU ready for transmission requires an acknowledgement; transmitting the TPDU, starting a transport retry timer, and setting a transmission count to one, when acknowledgement is required; determining whether acknowledgement is received after transmitting the TPDU; determining whether the retry timer has expired if acknowledgement not received; determining whether a hold mode is in effect when the retry timer has expired; determining whether a transport inactivity timer has expired when the hold mode is in effect; determining whether the hold mode is still in effect when the inactivity timer has not expired; when the hold mode is no longer in effect, incrementing the transmission count by one; and retransmitting the datalink TPDU and restarting the retry timer, when the transmission count is less than a predetermined maximum value and the inactivity timer has not expired. | 05-19-2016 |
20160149671 | COMMUNICATION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLE ACCESS POINTS - Embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method, apparatus and system for multiple access points. The method includes: simultaneously sending, by a primary sending terminal and a secondary sending terminal, data corresponding to each receiving terminal to each receiving terminal through a shared channel; sending, by the primary sending terminal, BAR corresponding to the data to each receiving terminal; receiving, by the primary sending terminal, BA corresponding to the BAR and sent by each receiving terminal; and if the BA indicates that the data are correctly received by each receiving terminal, clearing the data cached in the primary sending terminal, and if the BA indicates that the data is not correctly received by each receiving terminal, retransmitting data which is not correctly received, and clearing correctly received data cached in the primary sending terminal. | 05-26-2016 |
20160149752 | IN-BAND SIGNALING FOR NETWORK PROTECTION SWITCHING - Systems are disclosed for automated protection switching enabled by in-band signaling. A status monitor coupled to a switch fabric may be operable to read signal quality information from cells packet-switched over the fabric, the cells carrying traffic signals from one or more working channels between two network nodes. The status monitor may apply a protection algorithm to the signal quality information to determine whether a traffic signal on a working channel meets requirements indicative of channel failure or degradation sufficient to move the traffic signal to an additional protection channel between the two nodes. The status monitor may encode a request to transfer this traffic signal in cells switched by the fabric. In some examples, this request may be encoded in an optional user and fabric overhead field of cells consistent with the Optical-Transport Network (OTN) over Packet Fabric Protocol (OFP). | 05-26-2016 |
20160150463 | BOOTSTRAPPING SERVER FOR JOINING PROCESS IN POWERLINE COMMUNICATION (PLC) NETWORKS - A bootstrapping server may include active discovering and be identified as at least one bootstrapping agent. A personal area network (PAN) identifier for one or more networks that are operating within a personal operating space of the bootstrapping server is provided . The bootstrapping server is selected a target bootstrapping agent to use for the join process with a target network. If an attempt to join the target network fails, then the bootstrapping server further determines if other bootstrapping agents are associated with the target PAN identifier. The bootstrapping server selects an alternate target bootstrapping agent from the other bootstrapping agents that are associated with the target PAN identifier and reattempts the join process. | 05-26-2016 |
20160156503 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC RADIO ACCESS NETWORK ORCHESTRATION | 06-02-2016 |
20160157209 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DELIVERING MEDIA CONTENT AND BACKUP MEDIA CONTENT USING MULTIPLE NETWORKS | 06-02-2016 |
20160164806 | Re-establishing a Direct Tunnel Between an Access Node and a Gateway Router - To re-establish a direct tunnel between an access node and a gateway router in a wireless network, a control node that provides mobility management on behalf of mobile stations detects restart of the gateway router. In response to detecting restart of the gateway router, the control node sends context information regarding a previously established direct tunnel to the gateway router to enable the gateway router to re-establish the direct tunnel. | 06-09-2016 |
20160165655 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE DEVICE RECOVERY FOLLOWING RADIO LINK FAILURE - Methods and apparatus to audibly provide messages in a mobile device at described. An example method includes detecting a radio link failure condition, in response to detecting the radio link failure condition, sending a cell update message to a medium access control of the user equipment, detecting that a timer associated with a radio access bearer has expired before receiving confirmation from the medium access control of transmission of the cell update message to a network, and in response to detecting that the timer associated with the radio access bearer has expired and sending the cell update message to the medium access control, maintaining the radio access bearer associated with the timer. | 06-09-2016 |
20160173322 | METHODOLOGY FOR RE-ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION, AND POWER LINKS IN A MARINE ENVIRONMENT | 06-16-2016 |
20160182359 | SYSTEM, NODE, FAILURE DETERMINING SYSTEM, FAILURE DETERMINING METHOD, AND COMPUTER PRODUCT | 06-23-2016 |
20160183103 | USE OF PACKET STATUS REPORT FROM SECONDARY BASE STATION TO MASTER BASE STATION IN WIRELESS NETWORK | 06-23-2016 |
20160204976 | IDENTIFYING THE ABSENCE AND PRESENCE OF A RING PROTECTION LINK OWNER NODE IN AN ETHERNET NETWORK | 07-14-2016 |
20160205014 | METHOD FOR RETRANSMITTING PACKET, DATA SERVER USING THE SAME, AND PACKET RETRANSMITTING SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
20160254881 | RRC AWARE TCP RETRANSMISSIONS | 09-01-2016 |
20160380709 | CABLE HAVING A SPARE SIGNAL LINE FOR AUTOMATIC FAILURE RECOVERY - A method and apparatus are provided for detecting and recovering from a damaged signal line in a communication cable. Signals are transmitted over a first plurality of signal lines within the cable from a first end, signals are transmitted over a second plurality of signal lines within the cable from the second end, and the quality of signals received on each of the first plurality of signal lines at the second end of the cable are monitored. A first one of the first plurality of signal lines that is not providing a signal of a predetermined minimum quality is identified, the identified first signal line is automatically switched out for a first spare signal line within the cable, and one of the second plurality of signal lines that is logically associated with the identified first signal line is automatically switched out for a second spare signal line within the cable. | 12-29-2016 |
20160380802 | METHODS AND APPARATUSES FOR FACILITATING P-CSCF RESTORATION WHEN A P-CSCF FAILURE HAS OCCURRED - A method of facilitating P-CSCF restoration when a P-CSCF failure has occurred is disclosed. The method comprises a Proxy Call Session Control Function, ‘P-CSCF’ receiving a Session Initiation Protocol, ‘SEP’, message when said P-CSCF has been selected as an alternative P-CSCF to a failed P-CSCF and providing, to an associated Policy and Charging Rules Function, ‘PCRF’, a message comprising an indication that P-CSCF restoration is required. | 12-29-2016 |
20170237605 | STORING NETWORK STATE AT A NETWORK CONTROLLER | 08-17-2017 |
20180026753 | Data Transmission Method and Apparatus, and First Device | 01-25-2018 |
20180026832 | NETWORK FUNCTIONS VIRTUALIZATION BASED FAULT PROCESSING METHOD AND APPARATUS | 01-25-2018 |
20180026844 | METHOD FOR RUNNING A COMPUTER NETWORK AND COMPUTER NETWORK | 01-25-2018 |
20180027433 | RESTORATION OF NETWORK ACCESS | 01-25-2018 |
20190149457 | MODELING A BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL NETWORK | 05-16-2019 |